Manual Aw119 Koala

ROTORCRAFT
FLIGHT MANUAL
Publication Code 502051486

ROTORCRAFT
FLIGHT MANUAL
AW119 MKII
Document No. 109G0040A017
Approved by EASA
Copy assigned to rotorcraft: S/N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registration Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISSUE 1 : 11 JUNE 2007

REVISION 16 : 2 APRIL 2020
THIS DOCUMENT MUST BE CARRIED IN AIRCRAFT AT ALL TIMES
Issued by LEONARDO S.p.A.

This publication contains information proprietary to LEONARDO S.p.A.
Reproduction and/or resale of the information or illustrations contained
herein is not permitted without the written approval of CUSTOMER
SUPPORT & SERVICES - ITALY - Product Support Engineering &
Licenses Dept.
Additional copies of this publication and/or change service may be
obtained from:
LEONARDO S.p.A.
HELICOPTERS
CUSTOMER SUPPORT & SERVICES - ITALY
Via Giovanni Agusta, 520
21017 Cascina Costa di Samarate (VA) Italy
Tel.: 0039-0331 225036 - Fax.: 0039-0331 225988
e-mail: gestpubs@finmeccanica.com
AW119 MKII RFM List of
Document N°109G0040A017 Revisions
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
— Issue 1 EASA Approval with
Type Certificate Data
Sheet (TCDS) N° R.005
dated 11 June 2007
1 Revised pages A-1, B-1, B-2, 2-4, 2-5, EASA Approval with
2-9, 2-11, 2-12, 3-49 and 3-50. EASA.R.A.01547
dated 02 February 2009
2 Revised pages A-1, B-1, B-2, 2-13, EASA Approval
2-14, 5-1, 5-3 and 5-4. N° 10031176
Added 5-5, 5-6 and Supplement 18. dated 26 July 2010
3 Revised pages A-1, B-1, B-2, 5-3 and EASA Approval
5-5. N° 10031065
Added Supplement 19. dated 26 July 2010
4 Revised pages A-1, B-1, B-2, iii, 1-3, EASA Approval
1-4, 1-20, 1-26, 1-27, 2-i, 2-22, 3-11, N° 10033985
3-36, 4-5, 4-9 thru 4-12, 4-20, 4-22, dated 24 February 2011
5-4, Supplement 10 and
Supplement 18.
Added pages B-3 and B-4
5 Revised pages A-1, B-1 thru B-4, 5-3 EASA Approval
and 5-4. N° 10034526
Added Supplement 16. dated 18 April 2011
6 Revised pages A-1, B-1 thru B-4, 1-1, EASA Approvals
5-3 thru 5-5 and Supplement 18. N° 10039252, 10039253
Added Supplement 20. dated 20 April 2012
7 Revised pages A-1, B-1 thru B-4 and EASA Approval
3-10. N° 10041956, REV. 1
dated 16 November 2012
8 Revised pages A-1, B-1 thru B-4, 2-30 EASA Approval
and 2-31. N° 10042627, REV. 1
dated 14 December 2012
Revised pages A-1, B-1 thru B-4, 2-15, Approved under the
2-16 3-47, 3-48 and Supplement 19. Authority of DOA
N° EASA 21J.005
EASA Approved 11-06-07 A-1

List of AW119 MKII RFM
Revisions Document N°109G0040A017
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
9 Revised pages A-2, B-1 thru B-4, 5-3, EASA Approvals N°
5-5 and Supplement 4. 10042641, REV. 1,
Added Supplement 21, Supplement 22 10042643, REV. 1,
and Supplement 23. 10042717, 10042719
10 Revised pages Title page, A-2, B-1 EASA Approval
thru B-4, 5-3 and 5-5. N° 10047601
Added Supplement 24. dated 23 December 2013
11 Revised pages Title page, A-2, B-1 Approved under the
thru B-4, 5-3 and Supplement 24. Authority of DOA
N° EASA 21J.005
dated 24 January 2014
thru B-4 and 1-14. N° 10051057
Revised Supplement 1. Approved under the
Authority of DOA
N° EASA 21J.005
thru B-4, 1-ii, 1-21, 2-5, 2-6 and 2-9. N° 10056621 REV. 1
14 Revised pages Title page, A-2, B-1 Approved with
thru B-4, 5-3 and 5-5. NDC-109G2590-002
Added Supplement 25. dated 23 May 2019
under the authority of
DOA ref EASA.21J.005
thru B-4 and 1-5. N° 10072157
thru B-4. N° 10072479
Revised Supplement 21 dated 02 April 2020
A-2 11-06-07 EASA Approved

Document No. 109G0040A017 Effective Pages
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

NOTE: Revised text is indicated by a black vertical line in the outer
margin of the page and the approval revision number is printed
in the lower margin.
Page Revision N° Page Revision N°
Title page 16 2-7 and 2-8 0
A-1 8 2-9 13
A-2 16 2-10 0
B-1 thru B-4 16 2-11 and 2-12 1
i and ii 0 2-13 and 2-14 2
iii 4 2-15 and 2-16 8
iv thru viii 0 2-17 thru 2-21 0
PART I — EASA Approved 2-22 4
1-i 0 2-23 thru 2-29 0
1-ii 13 2-30 and 2-31 8
1-iii and 1-iv 0 2-32 thru 2-34 0
1-1 1 3-i thru 3-iv 0
1-2 0 3-1 thru 3-9 0
1-3 and 1-4 4 3-10 7
1-5 15 3-11 4
1-6 0 3-12 thru 3-35 0
1-7 thru 1-13 0 3-36 4
1-14 12 3-37 thru 3-46 0
1-15 thru 1-19 0 3-47 and 3-48 8
1-20 4 3-49 and 3-50 1
1-21 13 3-51 and 3-52 0
1-22 thru 1-25 0 4-i thru 4-iv 0
1-26 and 1-27 4 4-1 thru 4-4 0
1-28 thru 1-40 0 4-5 4
2-i 4 4-6 thru 4-8 0
2-ii thru 2-iv 0 4-9 thru 4-12 4
2-1 thru 2-3 0 4-13 thru 4-19 0
2-4 1 4-20 4
2-5 and 2-6 13 4-21 0
11-06-07 B-1
Effective Pages Document No. 109G0040A017
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Cont.d)

4-22 4 Supplement 9
4-23 thru 4-36 0 (Refer to the applicable
List of Effective Pages)
5-1 2
Supplement 10
5-2 0
(Refer to the applicable
5-3 14 List of Effective Pages)
5-4 6 Supplement 11
5-5 14 (Refer to the applicable
5-6 2 List of Effective Pages)
Supplement 12
Supplement 1 List of Effective Pages)
List of Effective Pages) Supplement 13
List of Effective Pages) Supplement 17 (RESERVED)
Supplement 6 Supplement 18
(Refer to the applicable (Refer to the applicable
List of Effective Pages) List of Effective Pages)
B-2 11-06-07
Document No. 109G0040A017 Effective Pages
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Cont.d)

Supplement 21 7-5 thru 7-14 0
(Refer to the applicable 7-14A thru 7-14D 2
7-15 thru 7-32 0
Supplement 22
8-i thru 8-iv 0
List of Effective Pages) 8-1 thru 8-10 0
Supplement 23 9-i thru 9-iv 4
(Refer to the applicable 9-1 thru 9-48 4
Supplement 24
Supplement 25
PART II — MANUFACTER’S DATA

C-1 9
C-2 0
6-i 4
6-ii thru 6-iv 0
6-1 thru 6-7 0
6-8 and 6-9 4
6-10 0
6-11 thru 6-13 4
6-14 0
6-15 thru 6-17 4
6-18 thru 6-32 0
7-i 2
7-ii 9
7-iii and 7-iv 0
7-1 and 7-2 0
7-3 and 7-4 9
7-4A and 7-4B 9
11-06-07 B-3
Effective Pages Document No. 109G0040A017
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
B-4 11-06-07
AW119 MKII RFM Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
LIST OF REVISIONS...................................................................... A-1
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES ........................................................ B-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS ....................................................................... i
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................iii
PART I — EASA APPROVED

SECTION
LIMITATIONS ...................................................................................... 1
NORMAL PROCEDURES .................................................................. 2
EMERGENCY AND MALFUNCTION PROCEDURES ....................... 3
PERFORMANCE ............................................................................... 4
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT SUPPLEMENTS....................................... 5
PART II — MANUFACTURER’S DATA

Page
LIST OF REVISIONS...................................................................... C-1
SECTION
WEIGHT AND BALANCE ................................................................... 6
SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION ................................................................ 7
HANDLING, SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ................................ 8
SUPPLEMENTAL PERFORMANCE INFORMATION......................... 9
11-06-07 Page i
Table of Contents AW119 MKII RFM
Page ii 11-06-07
AW119 MKII RFM Introduction
INTRODUCTION
GENERAL
It is responsibility of the flight crew to be familiar with the contents of
this manual.
REVISIONS (REISSUES)
This manual is subject to revisions (reissues) which will be automati-
cally distributed to all holders of the manual. It is the responsibility of
the operator to assure that the revisions (reissues) are incorporated
into the manual upon receipt.
At the beginning of the manual there is the “List of Revisions” table
that shows all pages of the manual which have been revised as well
as number and approval reference of each revision.
REVISION SYMBOL
Revised text is indicated by a black vertical line on the outer margin of
the page, adjacent to the affected text and the revision is printed in the
lower inner margin. The revision symbol identifies the addition of new
information, a change of procedure, the correction of an error, or a
rewording of the previous information.
TEMPORARY REVISIONS
Temporary Revisions are issued when immediate data is to be
included in the manual. The Temporary Revision data can add to or
cancel the initial data in the manual. They are numbered progressively
for each section of the manual. Temporary Revision pages are not
written in the “List of Effective Pages”. A complete list of active and
inactive Temporary Revision are written in the “List of Temporary
Revisions” page.
11-06-07 Page iii

Rev. 4
Introduction AW119 MKII RFM
TERMINOLOGY
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS AND NOTES
WARNING
An operating procedure, practice, etc.,
which, if not correctly followed, could result
in personal injury or loss of life.
CAUTION
An operating procedure, practice, etc.,

which, if not strictly observed, could result in
damage to, or destruction of, equipment.
Note
An operating procedure, condition, etc.,
which is essential to highlight.
USE OF PROCEDURAL WORDS

The concept of procedural word usage and intended meaning which
has been adhered to in preparing this RFM is as follows:
“Shall” or “Must” have been used only when application of a proce-
dure is mandatory.
“Should” has been used only when application of a procedure is rec-
ommended.
“May” has been used only when application of a procedure is optional.
“Will” has been used only to indicate futurity, never to indicate a man-
datory procedure.
“Condition” has been used to determine if the item under examination
presents external damage which could jeopardize its safe operation.
“Secured” has been used to determine if the item under examination
is correctly locked; mainly referred to doors and disconnectable items.
“Security” has been used to determine if the item under examination
is correctly positioned and installed.
Page iv 11-06-07
ABBREVIATION
The use of capitol letters in the text, apart from normal grammatical
usage indicates the actual wording or marking of indicators, controls
or control positions on the helicopters.
Abbreviations and acronyms used throughout this RFM are defined as
follows:
— A/C : AirCraft
— a.c. / AC : Alternating current
— ADI : Attitude Data Indicator
— AGL : Above Ground Level
— AWG : Aural Warning Generator
— A/F : Airframe
— CCW : CounterClockWise
— CG : Center of Gravity
— CW : ClockWise
— d.c. / DC : Direct current
— EDU : Electronic Display Unit
— EEC : Engine Electronic Control
— EMM : Engine Maintenance Manuall
— GW : Gross Weight
— Hd : Density altitude
— Hp : Pressure Altitude
— HSI : Horizontal Situation Indicator
— IAS : Indicated AirSpeed
— ICS : InterCommunication System
— I.D.S. : Integrated Display System
— IGE : In Ground Effect
— ISA : International Standard Atmosphere
11-06-07 Page v
— ITT : Inter-Turbine Temperature

— KCAS : Knots Calibrated AirSpeed
— KIAS : Knots Indicated AirSpeed
— LH : Left hand
— MAN : MANual override system
— MCL : Master Caution Light
— MCP : Maximum Continuous Power
— MEC : MEChanical
— MFR : ManuFactureR
— MGB : Main Gear Box
— MWL : Master Warning Light
— N1 : Gas generator speed
— N2 : Power turbine speed
— NR : Rotor speed
— OAT : Outside Air Temperature
— OGE : Out of Ground Effect
— PLA : Power Lever Angle (throttle)
— QTY : QuantiTY
— RFM : Rotorcraft Flight Manual
— RH : Right Hand
— RMI : Radio Magnetic Indicator
— ROC : Rate Of Climb in ft/min
— RPM : Revolutions Per Minute
— SAS : Stabilization Augmentation System
— TAS : True AirSpeed in knots
— TOP : Take-Off Power
— TQ : Engine TorQue
Page vi 11-06-07
— VFR : Visual Flight Rules

— VHF : Very High Frequency
— VNE : Velocity Never Exceed
— VSI : Vertical Speed Indicator
— VY : Best rate of climb speed
— Xfer : Transfer
— WCA : Warning Caution Advisory
11-06-07 Page vii

STA 3380
WL 2531
DIA 1940
WL
1765
3598
WL 0
STA STA
0 9930
30
1 08
DIA
BL 0
11144
12984
1666
DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS
2100 ICN-19-A-150000-G-A0126-00001-A-01-1
Figure 1. Helicopter — Three views
Page viii 11-06-07

AW119 MKII RFM Section 1
Document No. 109G0040A017 Table of Contents
SECTION 1
LIMITATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
GENERAL ....................................................................................... 1-1

BASIS OF CERTIFICATION ........................................................... 1-1
TYPE OF OPERATION ................................................................... 1-1
FLIGHT CREW ................................................................................ 1-1
NUMBER OF SEATS ...................................................................... 1-1
AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS (IAS) ..................................................... 1-2
FLIGHT WITH PASSENGER CABIN DOORS OPEN
OR REMOVED ........................................................................... 1-2
GROUND SPEED LIMITATIONS .................................................... 1-2
SLOPE TAKE-OFF AND LANDING LIMITATIONS........................ 1-5
WEIGHT LIMITATIONS................................................................... 1-5
CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITATIONS ........................................... 1-5
ALTITUDE LIMITATIONS ............................................................. 1-10
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS ........................... 1-10
POWER PLANT LIMITATIONS..................................................... 1-11
GAS GENERATOR SPEED (N1) ............................................. 1-11
POWER TURBINE SPEED (N2) .............................................. 1-11
INTER-TURBINE TEMPERATURE (ITT) ................................. 1-12
ENGINE TORQUE (TQ) ........................................................... 1-12
EASA Approved 11-06-07 Page 1-i

Section 1 AW119 MKII RFM
Table of Contents Document No. 109G0040A017
Page
ROTOR LIMITATIONS (NR)..........................................................1-13

POWER-ON ..............................................................................1-13
POWER-OFF ............................................................................1-13
FUEL SYSTEM LIMITATIONS ......................................................1-14
FUEL PRESSURE ....................................................................1-14
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS ........................1-15
OIL PRESSURE........................................................................1-15
OIL TEMPERATURE ................................................................1-15
MAIN TRANSMISSION LUBRICATION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS 1-17
OIL PRESSURE........................................................................1-17
OIL TEMPERATURE ................................................................1-17
TAIL ROTOR GEARBOX LUBRICANT LIMITATIONS.............1-18
ENGINE STARTER LIMITATIONS................................................1-19
GENERATOR LOAD LIMITATIONS .............................................1-19
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM LIMITATIONS ..........................................1-20
FLUID PRESSURE ...................................................................1-20
APPROVED FLUID...................................................................1-20
MISCELLANEOUS LIMITATIONS ................................................1-21
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM LIMITATIONS ..........................1-21
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIMITATIONS ...........................1-21
LANDING LIGHTS OPERATION VS MAGNETIC COMPASS
INDICATION LIMITATIONS......................................................1-21
UPPER DECK WINTER KIT LIMITATIONS (IF INSTALLED) ..1-21
NORMAL IDS MODE OF OPERATION....................................1-21
INSTRUMENT MARKINGS ...........................................................1-22
ELECTRONIC DISPLAY UNIT FORMAT .....................................1-24
PLACARDS ...................................................................................1-38
Page 1-ii 11-06-07 EASA Approved

Rev. 13
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
1-1. Airspeed Limitation - VNE (power on/off) ............................ 1-3

1-2. Weight and Longitudinal CG Envelope
(metric units) ........................................................................ 1-6
1-3. Weight and Longitudinal CG Envelope
(imperial units) ..................................................................... 1-7
1-4. Weight and Lateral CG Envelope
(metric units) ........................................................................ 1-8
1-5. Weight and Lateral CG Envelope
(imperial units) ..................................................................... 1-9
1-6. Airspeed Indicator.............................................................. 1-23
1-7. Back-up Dual Tachometer Indicator .................................. 1-23
1-8. EDU1 Primary Mode - START format (typical) .................. 1-26
1-9. EDU1 Primary Mode - CRUISE format (typical) ................ 1-26
1-10. EDU2 Secondary Mode - MAIN format (typical) ................ 1-27
1-11. EDU1 & EDU2 - REVERSIONARY format (typical)........... 1-27
1-12. EDU 1 - InterTurbine Temperature (ITT) ........................... 1-28
1-13. EDU 1 - Torque (TQ) ......................................................... 1-29
1-14. EDU 1 - Gas Generator Speed (N1).................................. 1-30
1-15. EDU 1 - Power Turbine Speed (N2) .................................. 1-31
1-16. EDU 1 - Rotor Speed (NR) ................................................ 1-32
1-17. EDU 2 - Engine Oil (Pressure and Temperature) .............. 1-33
1-18. EDU 2 - Transmission Oil
(Pressure and Temperature) ............................................. 1-34
1-19. EDU 2 - Ammeter .............................................................. 1-35
1-20. EDU 2 - Fuel Pressure....................................................... 1-36
1-21. EDU 2 - Hydraulic Pressure............................................... 1-37
1-22. Placards in Clear View of the Pilot..................................... 1-38
EASA Approved 11-06-07 Page 1-iii

LIST OF TABLES
Page
1-1. Approved fuel.....................................................................1-14

1-2. Approved lubricating oils....................................................1-16
1-5. EDU parameters ................................................................1-24
1-6. EDU mode .........................................................................1-25
1-7. EDU revisionary mode .......................................................1-25
Page 1-iv 11-06-07 EASA Approved

Document No. 109G0040A017 Limitations
SECTION 1
LIMITATIONS
GENERAL
Compliance with the operating limitations in section 1 of this manual is
mandatory.
The helicopter must also be operated in accordance with the appropri-
ate operating rules.
BASIS OF CERTIFICATION
The helicopter is certified under JAR 27 Small Rotorcraft Category,
with the exemption of a limited number of paragraphs for which com-
pliance has been demonstrated with CS 27 and FAR part 27.
TYPE OF OPERATION
This helicopter is approved for day and night VFR operation, in non-
icing condition.
The helicopter equipped with only the Radio COMM KY196B (as alter-
native to Radio NAV/COMM KX165A) is approved for day VFR opera-
tion only.
No aerobatic maneuvres are permitted.
FLIGHT CREW
The minimum flight crew consists of one pilot who shall operate the
helicopter from the right crew seat.
NUMBER OF SEATS
Eight (pilot included).
EASA Approved 11-06-07 Page 1-1

Rev. 6
Limitations Document No. 109G0040A017
AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS (IAS)
VNE (Power-ON/OFF).................................................. : See Figure 1-1
Minimum airspeed in autorotation

(without close external references) ........................................: 60 KIAS
Maximum airspeed with torque between

100 and 108.5% (take-off power range).................................: 75 KIAS
FLIGHT WITH PASSENGER CABIN DOORS OPEN OR REMOVED
VNE with one or both doors open or removed ........................: 85 KIAS
VNE during doors opening and closing operation...................: 70 KIAS
Note
When passenger cabin doors are open or removed check
the Weight and Balance of the helicopter.
GROUND SPEED LIMITATIONS
Maximum forward speed at touchdown

after engine failure .................................................................... : 50 kts
Page 1-2 11-06-07 EASA Approved

20000
18000
00
16000 150
00
140
14000 00
130
00
120
12000
OA
00
110
TL
00
100
IM
10000 0
900
IT
DENSITY ALTITUDE - FEET
0
8000 8 0
0
0
700
0
6000 600
0
500
OAT LIMIT
0
4000 400
0
300
0
2000 200
0
100
0 0
ET
E - FE
-2000 TUD -10
00
ALTI
E
UR
ESS
-4000 PR
-6000
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE - °C INDICATED AIRSPEED - KNOTS
109G0290T149/2 ISSUE A ICN-19-A-151000-G-A0126-00003-A-01-1
Figure 1-1. Airspeed Limitation - VNE (power on/off)

Rev. 4

Rev. 4
SLOPE TAKE-OFF AND LANDING LIMITATIONS
Nose-up operations.................................................................. : 12 deg
Side-up operations................................................................... : 10 deg
Nose-down operations ............................................................... : 2 deg
WEIGHT LIMITATIONS
Maximum Gross Weight for ground operations

(towing and Take off prohibited) .............................. : 2900 kg (6393 lb)
Maximum Gross Weight......................................... : 2850 kg (6283 lb).
Minimum Gross Weight for flight ............................ : 1725 kg (3803 lb).
CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITATIONS
Longitudinal CG limits .................................. : See Figures 1-2 and 1-3
Lateral CG limits .......................................... : See Figures 1-4 and 1-5
Note
In some loading conditions the longitudinal limitation (aft
limit) can be exceeded. Refer to Section 6 for loading
instructions.
40

Rev. 15
3200
3000 3392
2850
2800
2600
2531
2400
2200
2160
2000 3284
1812
1800 Minimum
1725 flying
weight
3457
1600 3528 3580
1400
3200 3300 3400 3500 3600 3700
Note
Longitudinal Station ”0” is 1785 mm forward of the front
jack point.
Figure 1-2. Weight and Longitudinal CG Envelope

(metric units)

7000
133.5 140.9
6500
6283
6000 129.3
5580
5500
5000
4762
4500
4000 3995
Minimum
3803 flying
weight
136.1
3500
138.9
3000
127 129 131 133 135 137 139 141 143 145
Note
Longitudinal Station “0” is 70.2 in forward of the front jack
point.
Figure 1-3. Weight and Longitudinal CG Envelope

(imperial units)
40

3200
3000 -53 53
2850
2800
2600
2450 2450
2400
2200
2000
1800 Minimum
1725 1725 flying
weight
1600
-60 60
1400
-100 -80 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
Note
Lateral Station “0” is 450 mm inboard from each main jack
point and coincides with the helicopter longitudinal plane
of symmetry.
Figure 1-4. Weight and Lateral CG Envelope

(metric units)

7000
-2.1 2.1
6500
6283
6000
5500
5401 5401
5000
4500
4000
Minimum
3803 3803 flying
weight
3500 -2.4 2.4
3000
-4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4
Note
Lateral Station “0” is 17.7 in inboard from each main jack
point and coincides with the helicopter longitudinal plane
of symmetry.
Figure 1-5. Weight and Lateral CG Envelope

(imperial units) 40

ALTITUDE LIMITATIONS
Maximum operating altitude .............................. : 15000 ft (4572 m) Hp
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS
Refer to Figure 1-1.

POWER PLANT LIMITATIONS

The helicopter is powered by a Pratt & Whitney Canada PT6B-37A
Build Specification 1242 turboshaft engine.
GAS GENERATOR SPEED (N1)
Minimum ...................................................................................... : 51%
Cautionary (autorotation only)............................................. : 51 to 60%
Continuous operation..................................................... : 60 to 100.1%
Take-off (5 minutes) .................................................. : 100.1 to 103.2%
Maximum take-off (5 minutes)................................................. : 103.2%
Transient (30 seconds) ........................................................... : 103.8%
Note
Transient must not be used intentionally.
POWER TURBINE SPEED (N2)
Minimum ...................................................................................... : 95%
Cautionary......................................................................... : 95 to 101%
Continuous operation...................................................... : 101 to 103%
Maximum ................................................................................... : 103%
Transient (10 seconds) .............................................................. : 108%
Note
40

INTER-TURBINE TEMPERATURE (ITT)
Maximum continuous ............................................................... : 755 °C
Take-off (5 minutes) ...................................................... : 755 to 810 °C
Maximum take-off (5 minutes).................................................. : 810 °C
Transient (5 seconds)............................................................... : 860 °C
Maximum unlimited at starting ................................................. : 870 °C
Transient at starting................................................................ : 1090 °C

two second between 980 °C and 1090 °C.
Note
A linear variation applies above 870 °C, ten seconds,
and 980 °C, two seconds.
Note
ENGINE TORQUE (TQ)
Maximum continuous .................................................................: 100%
Take-off (5 minutes) .....................................................: 100 to 108.5%
Maximum take-off (5 minutes).................................................: 108.5%
Transient (6 seconds)................................................................. : 115%
Note

ROTOR LIMITATIONS (NR)
POWER-ON
Minimum ...................................................................................... : 95%
Cautionary......................................................................... : 95 to 101%
Continuous operation...................................................... : 101 to 103%
Maximum ................................................................................... : 103%
Transient (10 seconds) .............................................................. : 108%
Note
POWER-OFF
Transient (10 seconds) ................................................................ : 80%
Minimum ...................................................................................... : 90%
Continuous operation........................................................ : 90 to 110%
Maximum ................................................................................... : 110%
40

FUEL SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
FUEL PRESSURE
Cautionary............................................................................ : 0 to 7 psi
Continuous operation ......................................................... : 7 to 25 psi
Maximum................................................................................... : 25 psi
Table 1-1. Approved fuel
Type Specification
JET A ASTM D1655
JET A-1 ASTM D1655
JET B (***) ASTM D1655
JP-5 (*) MIL-T-5624
JP-8 (*) MIL-T-83133
TS-1 (**) GOST 10227-86, in addition complying to Decree 118
(*) Contains fuel system icing inhibitor (FSII) (for JP-8, MIL-T-83133C
allows two grades. The grade meeting NATO code F-34 has FSII while
the grade meeting code F-35 has no FSII without prior agreement).
(**) Use of TS-1 fuel complying with GOST 10227-86 specification, but
not complying with Decree 118, is prohibited.
(***) Use of Jet B fuel, alone or mixed with other approved fuels, is limited
to operation with ambient temperature up to +15 °C.
Note
Any mixture of approved fuels may be used.
Note
For operation below 4 °C the use of anti-ice additive is
authorized but not mandatory since the engine oil system
is provided with an oil-to-fuel heater where, depending
upon the temperature of the fuel, the engine oil is utilized
to preheat the fuel. For additive requirements and blending
procedures refer to EMM.

Rev. 12
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
OIL PRESSURE
Minimum ....................................................................................: 40 psi
Cautionary (with N1 < 72%) ..............................................: 40 to 80 psi
Continuous operation...................................................... : 80 to 110 psi
Maximum ................................................................................. : 110 psi
Note
During cold starting conditions the oil pressure can tempo-
rarily exceed 110 psi; it reduces as oil temperature
increases.
OIL TEMPERATURE
Minimum OAT for starting ........................................... : See Figure 1-1
Continuous operation...................................................... : 10 to 115 °C
Maximum ................................................................................. : 115 °C
Transient (5 minutes with N1 at 61 ± 1%) ................................ : 127 °C
40

Table 1-2. Approved lubricating oils
Designation Specification
BP Turbo Oil 2380 MIL-PRF-23699
Mobil Oil Jet II MIL-PRF-23699
Aeroshell Turbine Oil 500 MIL-PRF-23699
Turbonycoil 525-2A PWA 521
Royco Turbine Oil 500 MIL-PRF-23699
Castrol 5000 MIL-PRF-23699
Oils limited to ambient temperature above -40 °C (-40 °F).
Note
Mixing of oils of different brands, types and manufacturers
is prohibited.

MAIN TRANSMISSION LUBRICATION SYSTEM

LIMITATIONS
OIL PRESSURE
Minimum ....................................................................................: 30 psi
Continuous operation........................................................: 30 to 55 psi
Cautionary.........................................................................: 55 to 70 psi
Maximum ...................................................................................: 70 psi
OIL TEMPERATURE
Minimum OAT for starting ........................................... : See Figure 1-1
Continuous operation........................................................ : 0 to 115 °C
Maximum ................................................................................. : 115 °C
Mobil Oil Jet 254 MIL-PRF-23699
Aeroshell Turbine Oil 555 DOD-L-85734
Oils limited to ambient temperature above -40 °C (-40 °F)
Note
is prohibited.
40

TAIL ROTOR GEARBOX LUBRICANT LIMITATIONS
Mobil Oil Jet 254 MIL-PRF-23699
Aeroshell Turbine Oil 555 DOD-L-85734
Oils limited to ambient temperature above -40 °C (-40 °F)
Note
is prohibited.

ENGINE STARTER LIMITATIONS

The engine starter duty cycle is the following:
On battery
— 40 seconds on, 60 seconds off
— 40 seconds on, 30 MINUTES off
With external power

— 25 seconds on, 30 MINUTES off
GENERATOR LOAD LIMITATIONS
Continuous operation..........................................................: 0 to 200 A
Maximum ...................................................................................: 200 A
Transient (5 seconds) ................................................................: 300 A
40

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
FLUID PRESSURE
Minimum................................................................................ : 1200 psi
Cautionary................................................................ : 1200 to 1400 psi
Continuous operation ............................................... : 1400 to 1550 psi
Maximum............................................................................... : 1550 psi
APPROVED FLUIDS
The following hydraulic fluids are approved:
MIL-PRF-5606
MIL-PRF-83282.
Note
Mixing of fluids of different types is prohibited.
When changing type of oil, the hydraulic system
must be drained and completely flushed.

Rev. 4
MISCELLANEOUS LIMITATIONS
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
The primary mode of operation of the engine control system is the

electronic engine control (EEC).
The mechanical mode of operation (MEC) is to be used only in emer-
gency when the EEC is failed or for training purposes.
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIMITATIONS
Maximum load............................................................. : 150 kg (330 lb)
Note
Refer to Section 6, Weight and Balance, for load distribu-
tion.
Maximum unit load........................................ : 500 kg/m2 (102 lb/sq ft)
LANDING LIGHTS OPERATION VS MAGNETIC COMPASS

INDICATION LIMITATIONS
When operating the landing lights, the magnetic compass indications

is not reliable.
UPPER DECK WINTER KIT LIMITATIONS (IF INSTALLED)
Maximum ambent air temperature for

Upper Deck Winter Kit P/N 109G2900F01-101 installation ....... : 10 °C
NORMAL IDS MODE OF OPERATION
The normal mode of operation of the IDS is with both the EDUs oper-
ating. The reversionary mode of operation is intended only for EDU
malfunction or failure cases.
40

Rev. 13
INSTRUMENT MARKINGS
Instruments are marked as follows:
Safe operating limits..................................................... : Red radial line
Safe operating range........................................................... : Green arc
Take-off and cautionary range.............................................: Yellow arc
Transient limit ......................................................................... : Red dot
Transient limit during starting ...........................................: Red triangle
For the back-up dual tachometer indicator the following markings are
provided for the needles:
Engine ...............................................................................................: E
Main rotor ......................................................................................... : R

0
200 20
0 to 20 kts Indicator unreliable
AIRSPEED 40
150 20 to 152 kts
KNOTS 60 152 kts VNE
100 80
ICN-19-A-151000-G-A0126-01001-A-01-1
Figure 1-6. Airspeed Indicator
ROTOR (NR)
Transient (10 seconds)
90% Minimum
90 to 110% Continuous operation
ENG
0 10 110% Maximum
120
20
110 ROTOR ENGINE (N2)
30
100 95% Minimum
R
PERCENT 40
90 RPM 95 to 101% Cautionary
80 50
101 to 103% Continuous operation
70 60
103% Maximum
108% Transient (10 seconds)
ICN-19-A-151000-G-A0126-01002-A-01-1
Figure 1-7. Back-up Dual Tachometer Indicator

40

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY UNIT FORMAT

The EDUs present the following informations:
Table 1-5. EDU parameters
EDU 2
EDU 1
(bottom - secondary
(top - primary parameters)
parameters)
- ITT - Engine oil pressure
- TQ - Engine oil temperature
- N1 - Transmission oil pressure
- NR/N2 - Transmission oil temperature
- Caution, warning, advisory - DC ammeter

and status messages - DC voltmeter
- AC voltmeter
- Fuel pressure
- Fuel quantity
- Hydraulic pressure
- OAT
- Time

The display modes are:
Table 1-6. EDU mode
EDU2
EDU1
(secondary
(primary mode)
mode)
- START format - MAIN format
- CRUISE format
Table 1-7. EDU revisionary mode
EDU1 & EDU2

(reversionary mode)
- REVERSIONARY format
40

XMS OIL HOT

DC GEN
ON SAS 1
SAS 2 ITT°C TQ%
EXT PWR ON 755 100
DOORS OPEN
OFF
NR%
BRT 102
N1% N2%
100.0 102
ICN-19-A-151000-G-A0126-01003-A-01-1
Figure 1-8. EDU1 Primary Mode - START format (typical)

The START format is displayed automatically during engine starting.
CARGO HOOK ARM

SFTY HOOK ARM
ON FT OFF
ITT°C TQ%
755 100
OFF
NR%
BRT 102
N1% N2%
100.0 102
ICN-19-A-151000-G-A0126-01004-B-01-1
Figure 1-9. EDU1 Primary Mode - CRUISE format (typical)

The CRUISE format is displayed automatically at the end of the start
sequence.

Rev. 4
ENG OIL XMSN OIL ELEC

PSI °C PSI °C AMP VDC
27.9
ON
1 VAC 2
115 115
98 70 35 67 43
OFF
FUEL HYD OAT
PSI KG PSI °C
25
TIME
13:23:54
BRT
21 120 70 1520 1470
ICN-19-A-151000-G-A0126-01005-A-01-1
Figure 1-10. EDU2 Secondary Mode - MAIN format (typical)

The MAIN format is displayed upon I.D.S. initialization.
EDU FAIL-SEC N1%

100.0
CARGO HOOK ARM
ON SFTY HOOK ARM
FT OFF ITT°C TQ%
755 100
OFF ENG OIL

93 PSI 62 °C
XMSN OIL
35 PSI 67 °C
FUEL
14 PSI NR%
BRT 201 KG 202 102
HYD N2%
1495 PSI 1493 102
Figure 1-11. EDU1 & EDU2 - REVERSIONARY format (typical)

Any EDU enters in the REVERSIONARY format manually by pressing
the ON/OFF switch to OFF on the failed EDU or automatically when a
critical failure occurs and is detected by the healty EDU. 40

Rev. 4
ITT°C TQ%
755 100
NR%
102
N1% N2%
100.0 102
MAXIMUM 870°C TRANSIENT 1090°C

MAX CONTINUOUS 755°C TAKE OFF 810°C
TRANSIENT 860°C
0°C
0°C
ITT ITT
Primary and Reversionary modes Primary and Reversionary modes
CRUISE format START format
ICN-19-A-151000-G-A0126-01007-A-01-1
Figure 1-12. EDU 1 - InterTurbine Temperature (ITT)

ITT°C TQ%
755 100
NR%
102
N1% N2%
100.0 102
MAX CONTINUOUS 100% TAKE OFF 108.5%
TRANSIENT 115%
0%
TQ
Primary and Reversionary modes
ICN-19-A-151000-G-A0126-01008-A-01-1
Figure 1-13. EDU 1 - Torque (TQ) 40

ITT°C TQ%
755 100
NR%
102
N1% N2%
100.0 102
TAKE OFF 103.2%

MAX CONTINUOUS 100.1%
TRANSIENT 103.8%
60%
MINIMUM 51%
0%
N1
Primary mode
ICN-19-A-151000-G-A0126-01009-A-01-1
Figure 1-14. EDU 1 - Gas Generator Speed (N1)

ITT°C TQ%
755 100
NR%
102
N1% N2%
100.0 102
CONTINUOUS OPERATION
101%
MAXIMUM 103%
MINIMUM 95%
TRANSIENT 108%
0%
N2
ICN-19-A-151000-G-A0126-01010-A-01-1
Figure 1-15. EDU 1 - Power Turbine Speed (N2) 40

ITT°C TQ%
755 100
NR%
102
N1% N2%
100.0 102
MINIMUM 90%
MAXIMUM 110%
TRANSIENT 80%
0%
NR
ICN-19-A-151000-G-A0126-01011-A-01-1
Figure 1-16. EDU 1 - Rotor Speed (NR)


27.9
1 VAC 2
115 115
98 70 35 67 43
FUEL HYD OAT

PSI KG PSI °C
25
TIME
13:23:54
21 120 70 1520 1470
TRANSIENT 127°C
MAXIMUM 110 PSI
MAXIMUM 115°C
80 PSI
MINIMUM 40 PSI
10°C
0 PSI
PRESSURE TEMPERATURE
ENG OIL
ICN-19-A-151000-G-A0126-01012-A-01-1
Figure 1-17. EDU 2 - Engine Oil (Pressure and Temperature) 40


27.9
1 VAC 2
115 115
98 70 35 67 43
FUEL HYD OAT

PSI KG PSI °C
25
TIME
13:23:54
21 120 70 1520 1470
MAXIMUM 115°C
MAXIMUM 70 PSI
55 PSI
MINIMUM 30 PSI
0 PSI 0°C
PRESSURE TEMPERATURE
XMSN OIL
ICN-19-A-151000-G-A0126-01013-A-01-1
Figure 1-18. EDU 2 - Transmission Oil

(Pressure and Temperature)

27.9
1 VAC 2
115 115
98 70 35 67 43
FUEL HYD OAT

PSI KG PSI °C
25
TIME
13:23:54
21 120 70 1520 1470
TRANSIENT 300 AMP (5 sec.)
MAXIMUM 200 AMP
0 AMP
AMMETER
ICN-19-A-151000-G-A0126-01014-A-01-1
Figure 1-19. EDU 2 - Ammeter 40


27.9
1 VAC 2
115 115
98 70 35 67 43
FUEL HYD OAT

PSI KG PSI °C
25
TIME
13:23:54
21 120 70 1520 1470
MAXIMUM 25 PSI
7 PSI
0 PSI
FUEL
ICN-19-A-151000-G-A0126-01015-A-01-1
Figure 1-20. EDU 2 - Fuel Pressure


27.9
1 VAC 2
115 115
98 70 35 67 43
FUEL HYD OAT

PSI KG PSI °C
25
TIME
13:23:54
21 120 70 1520 1470
MAXIMUM 1550 PSI
1400 PSI
MINIMUM 1200 PSI
0 PSI
HYD
ICN-19-A-151000-G-A0126-01016-A-01-1
Figure 1-21. EDU 2 - Hydraulic Pressure 40

PLACARDS
A B C
E
A
Vne AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS - KIAS
Hp ft
-1000 3000 6000 9000 12000 15000
OAT °C TO SL
50 152 - - - - -
40 152 150 - - - -
30 152 152 143 134 - -
20 152 152 146 137 128 119
10 152 152 149 140 131 121
0 152 152 152 143 133 124
-10 152 152 152 146 136 127
-20 152 152 152 149 139 130
-25 152 152 152 150 140 131
ICN-19-A-151000-G-A0126-01017-A-01-1
Figure 1-22. (sheet 1 of 2). Placards in Clear View of the Pilot

IN ALTN POSITION MAINTAIN

B INSTRUMENT ACCURACY BY
CLOSING WINDOWS VENTS
AND TURNING HEATER OFF
ALTN STATIC
DECREASE ALTIMETER
C READINGS BY 250 ft
THIS ROTORCRAFT IS
APPROVED FOR DAY AND
NIGHT VFR OPERATIONS
IN NON-ICING CONDITIONS.
D IT MUST BE OPERATED
IN ACCORDANCE WITH
THE APPROVED ROTORCRAFT
FLIGHT MANUAL
USABLE FUEL
E TANK 1 TANK 2
238 Kg 238 Kg
WHEN OPERATING LDG LIGHT OR

F SEARCHLIGHT, MAGNETIC COMPASS
INDICATION IS NOT RELIABLE
ICN-19-A-151000-G-A0126-01018-A-01-1
Figure 1-22. (sheet 2 of 2). Placards in Clear View of the Pilot 40


SECTION 2
NORMAL PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................. 2-1

FLIGHT PLANNING ........................................................................ 2-2
COLD WEATHER OPERATIONS................................................... 2-2
PRE-FLIGHT CHECK...................................................................... 2-2
PILOT’S DAILY PRE-FLIGHT CHECK ....................................... 2-4
PILOT’S PRE-FLIGHT CHECK ................................................ 2-11
ENGINE PRE-START CHECK ...................................................... 2-13
STARTING PROCEDURE............................................................. 2-18
ENGINE START ....................................................................... 2-18
DRY MOTORING RUN............................................................. 2-22
SYSTEMS CHECK ........................................................................ 2-23
HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS ........................................................... 2-23
FUEL SYSTEM ......................................................................... 2-24
ELECTRICAL A.C. SYSTEM .................................................... 2-25
MISCELLANEOUS ................................................................... 2-26
HELIPILOT SYSTEM................................................................ 2-27
BEFORE TAKE-OFF ..................................................................... 2-28
TAKE-OFF AND CLIMB ................................................................ 2-29
IN FLIGHT ..................................................................................... 2-30
ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONS ...................................... 2-31

Rev. 4
Page
APPROACH AND LANDING ........................................................2-32

SHUTDOWN ..................................................................................2-33
POST FLIGHT CHECK..................................................................2-34

LIST OF FIGURES
Page
2-1. Pre-flight Check Sequence .................................................. 2-3


Document No. 109G0040A017 Normal Procedures
SECTION 2
NORMAL PROCEDURES
INTRODUCTION
This section contains instructions and procedures for operating the
helicopter from the planning stage, through actual flight conditions, to
securing the helicopter after landing.
Normal and standard conditions are assumed in these procedures.
Pertinent data in other sections is referenced when applicable.
The instructions and procedures contained herein are written for the
purpose of standardization and are not applicable to all situations.
The minimum and maximum limits, and the normal and cautionary
operating ranges for the helicopter and its subsystems are indicated
by instrument markings and placards. Refer to Section 1 for a detailed
explanation of each operating limitation.
Each time an operating limitation is exceeded, a malfunction or an
emergency occurs, an appropriate entry shall be made in the logbook
(helicopter, engine, etc.). The entry shall state which limit was
exceeded, the duration of time, the extreme value attained, and any
additional information essential in determining the maintenance action
required.

Normal Procedures Document No. 109G0040A017
FLIGHT PLANNING
Each flight should be adequately planned to ensure safe operations
and to provide the pilot with the data to be used during flight.
Essential data, and performance information should be compiled as
follows:
— check type of mission to be performed and destination;
— select appropriate performance charts to be used from Section 4;
— review the appropriate Appendices of this Rotorcraft Flight Manual
for the optional equipment(s) installed.
Ascertain proper weight and balance of the helicopter as follows:
— consult Section 6 - Weight and Balance;
— ascertain weight of fuel, oil, payload, etc;
— compute take-off and anticipated landing gross weights;
— check helicopter center of gravity (CG) locations;
— check that the weight and CG limitations in Section 1 are not
exceeded.
COLD WEATHER OPERATIONS

The battery should be stored in a warm place during prolonged
helicopter inactivity. Engine starting with a cold, fully charged battery
was demonstrated down to an OAT of -10 °C.
PRE-FLIGHT CHECK
Pre-flight checks are intended as those checks to be performed by the
pilot in order to ascertain that the helicopter is flightworthy and
adequately equipped.
They are therefore not meant as detailed mechanical inspections, but
as a guide to check the condition of the helicopter.
Passengers should be briefed on relevant operational procedures and
associated hazards.

2 5
7
6
1
ICN-19-A-152000-G-A0126-00001-A-01-1
AREA N°1: Helicopter nose

AREA N°2: Fuselage - RH side
AREA N°3: Tail boom - RH side
AREA N°4: Fins, 90° gearbox, tail rotor, tail skid
AREA N°5: Tail boom - LH side
AREA N°6: Fuselage - LH side
AREA N°7: Cabin interior
Figure 2-1. Pre-flight Check Sequence

PILOT’S DAILY PRE-FLIGHT CHECK
(First flight of the day)

The following procedure outlines the pilot walk-around and interior
checks (see figure 2-1).
Main and tail rotor tie-downs : Removed.

(if present)
Area N°1 (Helicopter Nose)

Nose exterior : Condition.
Landing lights : Condition.
Nose compartment access door : Open.
Battery : Secured; connectors secured.
Electrical/avionic equipment : Secured.
Nose compartment access door : Secured; fastener security pin
out.
Area N°2 (Fuselage - RH side)

Lateral panel, windshield and roof : Condition and cleanliness.
transparent panel
Windshield wiper : Condition.
(if installed)
External power receptacle : Door secured.
OAT probe : Condition.
Pilot door, window and, if : Condition, cleanliness, security
installed, sliding window and correct operation of locking
mechanism.
Sliding window closed.
Pitot tube/static ports : Cover removed; condition and
obstructions.

Rev. 1
Fuselage exterior : Condition.

Ventilation air intake : Free of obstructions.
Upper Deck Winter kit covers : Condition.
(if installed)
Passenger door, window and, if : Condition, cleanliness and
stalled, sliding window security. Sliding window closed.
Passenger door lock : Check.
Passenger door jettison window : Security of window and seal
retainer.
Check red strap secured.
Drain and vent lines : Leaks.
Landing gear skid and attach- : Condition.
ments
Fuel filler cap : Secured.
Servo hydraulic system valves : Leaks and bypass indication
and filters group (red button out: filter clogged).
Door secured.
Hydraulic system reservoirs : Correct oil level, filler caps
secured.
Quick-disconnect return lines
secured. Door secured.
Main rotor head and blades : Condition.
In cold weather check for the
removal of snow, frost or ice.
Turn the rotor by hand at least
once before start-up.
Main rotor dampers : Check for correct fluid level.
Main rotor pitch change links : Condition and security.
Upper anticollision light : Condition.
Servo actuator : Condition and leaks.

Rev. 13
Main transmission and accesso- : Condition and leaks.

ries (visible area)
Transmission external oil filter : Bypass indication (red button
out: filter clogged).
Door secured.
Engine upper and RH air intake : Covers removed; foreign matter
screens and plenum chamber and condition.
Engine oil : Correct level and cap secured.
Engine area : Leaks of fuel and/or oil.
Engine to transmission drive shaft : Condition.
Engine cowling : Condition; secured.
Engine exhaust duct : Cover removed; condition.
Cowlings and fairings : Condition and secured.
Access doors : Secured.
Area N°3 (Tailboom - RH side)

Tail boom exterior : Condition.
Lower anti-collision light : Condition.
Antenna(s) : Condition.
Stabilizer and protective fairing : Condition and security.
Navigation light : Condition.

Rev. 13
Area N°4 (Fins, 90° gearbox, tail rotor and tail skid)
Exterior : Condition.
Tail skids : Condition and security.
Tail rotor (90°) gearbox : Check oil level.
Check for leaks.
Filler cap secured.
Tail navigation light : Condition.
Tail rotor hub and blades : Condition, security and freedom
of flapping.
Tail rotor pitch change mecha- : Condition and secured.
nism
Area N°5 (Tail boom - LH side)

Tail boom exterior : Condition.
Stabilizer and protective fairing : Condition and security.
Navigation light : Condition.
Antenna(s) (if installed) : Condition.
Tail rotor drive shaft bearing : Condition.
Tail rotor drive shaft dampers : Condition.
Tail rotor drive fairing : Secured.

Area N°6 (Fuselage - LH side)

Tail rotor servo actuator (inside : Condition and leaks.
baggage compartment)
Baggage compartment : Cargo properly secured.
Door secured.
Fuselage exterior : Condition.
Drain and vent lines : Leaks.
Oil cooler rear end : Foreign matter.
Transmission to fan shaft : Condition and security.
Engine area : Leaks of fuel and/or oil.
Engine oil filter : Check for bypass indication
(button out: filter clogged).
Engine cowling : Condition; secured.
Engine exhaust duct : Cover removed; condition.
Main rotor head and blades : Condition.
Main rotor dampers : Check for correct fluid level.
Main rotor pitch change links : Condition and security.
Main rotor servo actuators : Condition and leaks.
Door secured.
Main transmission and accesso- : Condition and leaks.
ries (visible area)
Transmission : Filler cap secured.
Transmission oil : Correct level.
Door secured.
Engine LH air intake screen and : Cover removed; foreign matter,
plenum chamber and condition.

Cowlings and fairings : Condition and secured.

Landing gear skid and attach- : Condition and security.
ments
LH and RH fuel sumps or (if : Drain.
installed and d.c. power con-
nected) fuel drain valve #1(#2)
switch
Upper Deck Winter kit covers : Condition.
(if installed)
Roof transparent panel, wind- : Condition and cleanliness.
shield and lateral panel
Windshield wiper (if installed) : Condition.
Passenger door, window and, if : Condition, cleanliness and secu-
installed, sliding window rity. Sliding window closed.
Passenger door lock : Check.
Passenger jettison window : Security of window and seal
retainer.
Check red strap secured.
Co-pilot door, window and, if : Condition and cleanliness,
installed, sliding window security and correct operation of
locking mechanism. Sliding win-
dow closed.
Check following systems for correct operation (connect d.c. electrical
power supply):
— navigation and anticollision lights;
— landing lights.
Disconnect the d.c. electrical power supply.

Rev. 13
Area N° 7 (Cabin interior)

Cabin interior : Security of equipment and
cargo.
Note
Operation with passenger sliding doors open or removed
requires the removal or securing of all cabin equipment.
First aid kit (if installed) : Security and contents on board.
Cabin fire extinguisher (if : Security.
installed)
Co-pilot door jettison handle and : Correct position.
safety latch
Co-pilot safety belt and inertia : Condition and belt fastened if
reel seat is unoccupied.
Pilot door jettison handle and : Correct position.
safety latch
Pilot safety belt and inertia reel : Condition.
Relay box circuit breakers : IN.
Pilot flight controls : Condition and security.
Instruments : Condition and legibility.

PILOT’S PRE-FLIGHT CHECK
(Every flight)
Main and tail rotors tie-downs : Removed.

Nose compartment access door : Condition; latched.
RH side, windshield and roof : Condition and cleanliness.
transparencies
Pitot tube/static ports : Cover removed; free of obstruc-
tions.
RH side crew/passenger doors : Condition, hinges and latches.
Sliding windows (if installed)
closed.
RH forward fuselage : Condition.
RH landing gear skid assembly : Condition.
Fuel filler cap : Secured
Main rotor blades : Condition and cleanliness.
Main rotor dampers : Correct fluid level.
RH engine air intake : Cover removed; free of obstruc-
tions.
RH engine exhaust : Cover removed.
RH side access panels : Closed and secured.
RH aft fuselage : Condition.
RH horizontal stabilizer/fairing : Condition and security.
Vertical fins/tail skid : Condition and security.
Tail rotor gearbox : Correct oil level.
Tail rotor blades and hub : Condition, cleanliness and
security.
LH horizontal stabilizer/fairing : Condition and security

Rev. 1
Tail rotor drive shaft cover : Closed and latches secured.

LH aft fuselage : Condition.
Antenna(s) (if installed) : Condition.
Baggage compartment : Baggage secured; door latched.
LH engine exhaust : Cover removed.
LH engine air intake : Cover removed; free of obstruc-
tions.
Transmission oil : Correct level.
LH landing gear skid assembly : Condition.
LH side access panels : Closed and secured.
LH side crew/passenger doors : Condition, hinges and latches.
Sliding windows (if installed)
closed.
LH forward fuselage : Condition.
LH side, windshield and roof : Condition and cleanliness.
transparencies
Cabin interior : Loose items secured.
Seat belts/shoulder harnesses : Unoccupied belts/harnesses
secured.

Rev. 1
ENGINE PRE-START CHECK

All switches : OFF or CLOSED.
Pedals and seats : Adjust.
Seat belt : Fasten and adjust.
Cyclic stick : Centered (or positioned to
counter wind) and friction
adjusted.
Collective lever : Fully down and friction adjusted.
Circuit breakers : IN.
Engine throttle : OFF. Check IDLE and FLT posi-
tions; move MAN/NOR selector
to MAN and rotate the throttle
full open up to MAX then back to
FLT.
Return the MAN/NOR selector
to NOR and up (locked) posi-
tion. Rotate the throttle to IDLE.
Release the IDLE stop until
throttle returns to the OFF posi-
tion. After prolonged exposure
on ground to very low tempera-
ture (below - 20 °C), the force
required to rotate the engine
throttle may slightly increase.
STATIC source switch : NORM and protected.
Altimeter : Set.
BAT switch : ON; check voltage at least 24 V.
Note
In cold weather conditions wait for EDUs warm-up period
until the information on the displays are clearly readable.
BUS switch : ON.

Rev. 2
Note
On helicopter power-up, the IDS FAN caution light tempo-
rarily illuminates (built-in test). No corrective action is
required.
External power (if used) : Connect.
Note
Be sure that external power source supplies not less than
28 V.
Electronic Display Units : Check on.
(EDU 1 and EDU 2)
MCL and MWL : Push to reset.

IGN switch : AUTO.
POS lights switch : As required.
A-COLL lights switch : ON.
ENG HTR switch : ON.
COMPASS MAG/DG switch : MAG
F-TRIM switch : ON
SERVO switch : NORM.
EDU 1 : Press TEST key;
check the following test
sequences on the EDUs and on
the IDS FAN caution light.

Rev. 2
EDU 1 : ENG FIRE warning message and

FUEL LOW caution message are
presented for 4 seconds in the
message area.
The ENGINE FIRE aural mes-
sage is activated.
Note
During the test the IDS will activate the MASTER WARN-
ING/MASTER CAUTION lights: they will be reset auto-
matically at the end of the test sequence.
Note
If a failure is detected on Engine Fire and/or Fuel Low
detectors, the caution messages FIRE DET and/or F
LOW FAIL will remain displayed on EDU 1. In this case
the MCL will not be reset automatically.
EDU 2 : Check that fuel quantity indica-
tions decrease on both scales,
that the LH fuel quantity indica-
tion becomes boxed and yellow
and that the RH fuel quantity
indication becomes boxed and
crossed as soon as the indicated
quantity decreases below
120 kg.
IDS FAN caution light : Temporarily illuminates.
EDU 1 and EDU 2 : At the end of the test automati-
cally return to previous formats.
EDU 2 : Press TEST key; observe the
same sequences as above on
EDU 1 and EDU 2.

Approved uder DOA Rev. 8
Note
In case of different result of test sequence refer to the per-
tinent paragraph of Section 3 or to the A119/AW119MKII
Maintenance Manual.
Aural Warning Generator test : Set AWG switch on TEST and
maintain. Check the aural mes-
sage “TEST OK” and, after
approximately 3 seconds, the
AWG FAIL caution message
activates and the vocal alarm
operates in the following
sequence:
“ROTOR LOW”
“ENGINE OUT”
“ENGINE FIRE”
“WARNING”
“ROTOR HIGH”
“ONE HUNDRED FIFTY FEET”.
Fuel quantity : Check.
FUEL VALVE switch : OPEN and associated light illu-
minated.
Xfer PUMP switch : XFER.
EDU 1 : XFER PUMP caution message
out.
FUEL PUMP 1 switch : ON.
EDU 1 : FUEL PUMP 1 caution mes-
sage out.
EDU 2 : Check fuel pressure.
FUEL PUMP 1 switch : OFF.
EDU 1 : FUEL PUMP 2 caution mes-
sage out.

Rev. 8 Approved under DOA
EDU 2 : Check fuel pressure.

EEC/MEC switch : Accomplish EEC self-test by
cycling the switch (MEC - EEC):
check that EEC FAIL, EEC
DEGRADED and MEC OPN
caution messages illuminate
sequentially.
A successful self-test is indi-
cated by the MEC OPN caution
message remaining displayed at
the end of the test sequence.
Note
With NR below 30%, the MEC OPN caution message is
displayed regardless of the EEC/MEC switch position

STARTING PROCEDURE
Collective control : Flat pitch, check.
ENGINE START
START pushbutton : Press and release.

(on collective lever)
EDU 1 : ENG START and IGNITER ON
advisory messages displayed .
Note
Observe starter limitations in Section 1.
Engine throttle (with N1 > 12% : IDLE.
and residual ITT < 100°C)
Gas generator (N1) : Note increasing.
Engine temperature (ITT) : Note increasing.
CAUTION
Maximum ITT transient during starting is 1090 °C, not to

exceed two seconds above 980 °C. A linear variation
applies above 870 °C, ten seconds, and 980 °C, two sec-
onds. Consult EMM if ITT limits are exceeded.

CAUTION
Monitor engine start and if lightup is not obtained within

10 seconds after the throttle has been set to IDLE, shut-
down the engine by returning the throttle to OFF and
press and release again the START switch.
Following an aborted start perform the following proce-
dure before restarting:
— after N1 has come to a complete stop, allow a 30 seconds
fuel drain period;
perform a 15 seconds DRY MOTORING RUN.
Refer to Section 1 for engine starter limitations and to
DRY MOTORING RUN procedure in this section.
Engine oil pressure : Check.
Note
During cold starting conditions, the engine oil pressure
can temporarily exceed 110 psi; it reduces as oil tempera-
ture increases.
Engine starter : Automatically deactivated when
N1 reaches approximately 43%.
advisory message out.
Note
EDU 1 automatically changes to CRUISE format 5 sec-
onds after N1 reaches 51%.
Hydraulic systems : When main rotor begins to
rotate, check rise in hydraulic
pressure.
Pedals : Paired.
Note
Avoid any cyclic movement below 85% NR except to pre-
vent hitting blade stops.

Gas generator (N1) : Stabilized at 61 ±1%, check.
Note
During cold starting, low IDLE N1 speed may occur. Pro-
vided the N1 is not less than 51%, a warm-up period of 3
minutes should restore the correct N1 IDLE setting. If not,
an additional 3 minutes warm-up period should be accom-
plished. At the end, if the N1 IDLE setting is still below 61
±1%, shut down the engine and consult the EMM.
Engine and transmission oil : Check pressures and tempera-
tures.
Note
On ground, in IDLE condition, the transmission oil pres-
sure indication can be below the green arc. No corrective
action is required provided that the oil temperature indica-
tion is in the green arc.
BAT switch : Check ON.
External power : Disconnect (if used);
door secured.
EDU 1 : EXT PWR ON caution message
out.
GEN switch : ON.
Check DC GEN caution mes-
sage out.
INV 1 and 2 switches : ON. Check INV 1 (2) OFF cau-
tion messages out.
RAD MSTR switch : ON.
Ammeter : Check current within limits.
Engine throttle : Rotate to FLT position.

Note
With engine oil temperature below 10 °C, leave the
engine throttle at IDLE until the engine oil temperature
reaches 10 °C. Then, if transmission oil temperature is
still at 0 °C, the engine throttle should be rotated to FLT
position smoothly to prevent exceedance of the transmis-
sion oil pressure maximum limit.
Note
During engine throttle increase, if the transmission oil
pressure is still below the green arc the XMSN OIL
PRESS warning messages activates. No corrective
action is required provided that the oil temperature is in
the green arc.
EDU 1 : PLA POS caution message out.
NR : 102%.
EEC/MEC switch : MEC.
(first flight of the day only)
EDU 1 : MEC OPN caution message
displayed.
Note
A small power and NR change is to be expected when
switching from EEC to MEC and viceversa.
NR : Check at 97% (adjust, if needed,
using NR TRIM switch).
EEC/MEC switch : EEC. Check MEC OPN caution
message out.
Note
With the EEC mode engaged the NR TRIM switch is inop-
erative.
NR : 102%.
Proceded to “SYSTEM CHECK”.

DRY MOTORING RUN
The following procedures is used to clear the engine of internally

trapped fuel and vapor or if there is evidence of fire within the engine.
Engine throttle : OFF.

IGN switch : OFF.
FUEL VALVE switch : CLOSED.
FUEL PUMP 1 and 2 switches : OFF.
START pushbutton : Push and hold as necessary.
Note
START pushbutton : Release.
IGN switch : AUTO.

Rev. 4
SYSTEMS CHECK
Engine and transmission oil : Pressure and temperature within
limits.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS
Note
During very cold temperature conditions, the longitudinal
cyclic control force may increase up to 2 kg maximum.
SERVO switch : NORM, check. Make small
clockwise cyclic movements and
collective and pedal movements.
Pressure drops must be equal
for both n.1 and n.2 systems and
should not exceed 70 psi.
Set 2 OFF; SERVO 2 caution
message displayed on EDU1.
Check operation of system N°1
with same cyclic, collective and
pedal movements.
Pressure drop should not
exceed 70 psi and there should
be no force increase, discontinu-
ity or cyclic/collective coupling.
Repeat check with switch set to
1 OFF to check system N°2,
then set to NORM.
Note
Tail rotor boost pressure is furnished by system N°1.
When system N°2 is being checked, it is normal for the
pedals to be unboosted.

FUEL SYSTEM
Xfer PUMP switch : OFF.
displayed.
EDU 2 : Note fuel pressure fall.
EDU 1 : FUEL PUMP 1 and 2 caution
messages displayed.
Engine driven fuel pump : Check operation.
EDU 2 : Fuel pressure within limits.
EDU 1 : FUEL PUMP 1caution mes-
sage out.
FUEL PUMP 1 switch : OFF.
Repeat the check on fuel pump 2 following the procedure shown for
fuel pump 1 in the two previous steps; check that associated FUEL
PUMP caution message is out.
FUEL PUMP 1 and 2 switches : ON.
messages out.
EDU 2 : Fuel pressure within limits.
Xfer PUMP switch : XFER.
out.

ELECTRICAL A.C. SYSTEM

INV 1 switch : OFF.
EDU 1 : INV 1 OFF caution message dis-
played.
#1 a.c. electrical loads : No loss, check voltage.
Check ADI and HDG flags
retracted.
INV 1 switch : ON.
EDU 1 : INV 1 OFF caution message out.
INV 2 switch : OFF.
EDU 1 : INV 2 OFF caution message dis-
played.
#2 a.c. electrical loads : No loss, check voltage.
Check ADI and HDG flags
retracted.
INV 2 switch : ON.
EDU 1 : INV 2 OFF caution message out.
Note
VG 1 (2) caution message temporarily illuminates after
INV 1 (2) is switched off.

MISCELLANEOUS
PITOT heat switch : ON.
Check current peak on ammeter
and PITOT HEAT advisory mes-
sage displayed on EDU 1;
then OFF.
Cyclic stick : Friction fully unlocked, freedom
of movement.
Marker beacon lights (if installed) : Test.
ADI (if installed) : Erected and flag retracted.
Altimeter : Check flag retracted and set.
VSI : Check zero indication.
HSI (if installed):
HDG flag : Retracted.
Gyro compass heading : Set.
RMI/HSI selector knob : As desired.
Clock : Check and set.
Radio Altimeter (if installed):
Indication : Zero altitude.
OFF flag : Retracted.
TEST switch : Press and maintain.
DH light : Out.
Needle : 100 ft.
TEST switch : Release.
DH light : On.
Pilot/Co-pilot (if installed):
NORM/FAIL switch : FAIL, perform a radio check then
back to NORM.
HELIPILOT SYSTEM
SAS 1 switch : SAS 1.
EDU 1 : SAS 1 caution message out.
ATTD HOLD switch : OFF.
EDU 1 : ATT OFF caution message dis-
played.
Cyclic stick Motion will cause PITCH and
ROLL HELIPILOT indicators
motion.
Pedals Motion will cause YAW HELIPI-
LOT indicator motion.
SAS 1 switch : OFF.
EDU 1 : SAS 1 caution message dis-
played.
Cyclic stick : Motion will cause PITCH and
ROLL HELIPILOT indicator
motion.
SAS 2 switch : OFF.
EDU 1 : SAS 2 OFF caution message
displayed.
ATTD HOLD switch : Automatically trips to ATTD
HOLD.
EDU 1 : ATT OFF caution message out.
EDU 1 : SAS 1caution message out.
BEFORE TAKE-OFF
Communication and navigation : Set as required.
frequencies
Voltammeter : Within limits.
Cockpit lights : As required.
External lights : Check and leave as required.
CAUTION
Landing lights operation shall be limited to the time nec-

essary to carry out take-off and landing manoeuvers in
order to avoid overheating.
Note
When operating the landing lights, the stand-by magnetic
compass indication is not reliable.
Caution and Warning messages : Check none.

TAKE-OFF AND CLIMB

Collective : Increase slowly and bring the
helicopter to a 3 ft AGL hover.
Pedals : Apply as necessary to maintain
direction.
Flight instruments : Check.
Engine parameters : Within limits.
Hydraulic systems instruments : Within limits.
Cyclic and collective : Rotate the nose down approxi-
mately 10° from the hover da-
tum. While accelerating
increase slightly the torque to
avoid loss of altitude.
At 30 KIAS increase torque by
approximately 15% and adjust
cyclic to obtain 0° attitude.
Continue acceleration to VY.
At VY increase torque as re-
quired by the desired flight path.
Note
Do not exceed TQ and ITT limits (refer to Section 1).
Force trim pushbutton : Trim as desired for attitude ref-
(on cyclic stick) erence changes during hover
and climb out.

IN FLIGHT
Collective : Adjust as necessary to keep
engine parameters within limits.
Airspeed : Maintain within limits shown on
VNE placards.
Landing lights : OFF, if used.

EDU 1 : LANDING LT ON advisory mes-
sage out.
PITOT heat : As required.
CAUTION
Turn Pitot heat on for flight in visible moisture and in rain

regardless of ambient temperature.
Altitude : As required.
CAUTION
Refer to applicable operating rules for high altitude oxy-

gen requirements.
Note
Above 7000 ft Hp NR/N2 needle split in autorotation may
occur above 103% N2. In this case, in accordance with
N2 limitations reduce N2 within the limit of 103% using
engine throttle.
If transient limit is exceeded consult EMM.
Note
In case of intentional selection of EEC/MEC switch to
MEC position, reduce engine power below 50% TQ
before re-selecting the switch to EEC position to minimize
torque transients.

Rev. 8
HELIPILOT indicators : Monitor and re-center by de-

pressing the FTR pushbutton
switch on cyclic grip.
Note
During very cold temperature conditions, the longitudinal
cyclic control force may increase up to 2 kg maximum.
ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONS
If adverse weather conditions are expected during flight, with possible

risk of engine flame out, perform the following.
IGN switch : CONT.

EDU 1 : IGNITER ON advisory mes-
sage displayed.
Note
When the IGN switch is set to CONT the engine auto-
matic starter feature is armed and permits automatic
starting of the engine in case of flame out.

Rev. 8
APPROACH AND LANDING

Engine parameters : Within limits.
External lights : As required.
Landing lights : As required.
CAUTION
Landing lights operation shall be limited to the time nec-

essary to carry out takeoff and landing manoeuvres in
order to avoid overheating.
Note
When operating the landing lights, the stand-by magnetic
compass indications is not reliable.
Approach path : Perform the approach at
75 KIAS.
Reduce the airspeed gradually
with the cyclic. At 70 ft make a
flare and apply collective as
required to bring the helicopter
to a 3 ft AGL hover.
After reaching a hover descend
slowly to the ground surface.
CAUTION
Additional care must be taken during nose-down slope

operations in order not to touch the ground with tail.

SHUTDOWN
Collective lever : Check fully down.
Cyclic stick and pedals : Centered and trimmed.
Pedals : Centered.
Note
Do not apply collective in this phase and during rotor
deceleration, particularly in windy conditions.
Below 85% NR, avoid any cyclic movement except to
prevent hitting blade stops.
Engine throttle : IDLE for at least 30 seconds to
allow ITT to stabilize.
EDU 1 : PLA POS caution message dis-
played.
CAUTION
During shutdown check that the N1 speed decelerates

freely. Note any abnormal noise or rapid rundown. In this
event perform corrective maintenance action as per
EMM.
messages displayed.
Associated light : Out.
displayed.
PITOT heat : OFF, if used

ENG HTR switch : OFF.

Cockpit lights : OFF.
External lights : OFF.
Landing lights : OFF, if used.
RAD-MSTR switch : OFF.
Miscellaneous switches : OFF.
INV 1 and INV 2 switches : OFF.
GEN switch : OFF.
BAT switch : OFF.
POST FLIGHT CHECK

If conditions require, perform the following:
Pitot, intake and exhaust covers : Installed.
CAUTION
Wait at least 5 minutes after pitot heat has

been switched off before installing pitot-
static tube covers.
Wait at least 30 minutes after engine shut-
down before installing engine exhaust
ducts covers.
Refer to the A119/AW119MKII Maintenance
Manual for additional information.

SECTION 3
EMERGENCY AND MALFUNCTION

PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................. 3-1

DEFINITIONS .................................................................................. 3-1
WARNING SYSTEM........................................................................ 3-2
MASTER WARNING AND MASTER CAUTION LIGHT ............. 3-5
WARNING (RED) AND ASSOCIATED AURAL MESSAGES..... 3-5
CAUTION MESSAGES (YELLOW) ............................................ 3-7
ENGINE FAILURES ...................................................................... 3-12
FAILURE OF ENGINE .............................................................. 3-12
AUTOROTATIVE LANDING ..................................................... 3-15
ENGINE RESTART IN FLIGHT ................................................ 3-16
MALFUNCTION OF THE FUEL CONTROL SYSTEM ............. 3-18
ENGINE RESTART IN FLIGHT WITH MANUAL OVERRIDE
SYSTEM (MAN)........................................................................ 3-20
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL (EEC) MALFUNCTIONS . 3-23
ENGINE OPERATION IN MECHANICAL MODE (MEC).......... 3-24
ENGINE HOT START............................................................... 3-25
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE BELOW NORMAL RANGE ............ 3-26
ENGINE COMPRESSOR STALL ............................................. 3-27
ENGINE DROOP COMPENSATION BINDING........................ 3-28
TAIL ROTOR FAILURES .............................................................. 3-29
COMPLETE LOSS OF TAIL ROTOR CONTROL .................... 3-29
JAMMING OF TAIL ROTOR PITCH ......................................... 3-32

Page
SYSTEM FAILURES .....................................................................3-34

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM MALFUNCTION...................................3-34
PRESSURE LOSS IN SYSTEM N.1.........................................3-34
PRESSURE LOSS IN SYSTEM N.2.........................................3-35
JAMMING OF A SERVO VALVE ..............................................3-36
ELECTRICAL POWER FAILURE .............................................3-37
HELIPILOT SYSTEM MALFUNCTION .....................................3-40
INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM FAILURE ........................3-42
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM FAILURE...........................3-42
FIRE ...............................................................................................3-47
ENGINE FIRE ON GROUND....................................................3-47
ENGINE FIRE DURING FLIGHT ..............................................3-48
SMOKE IN CABIN, TOXIC FUMES, ETC. ....................................3-49
STATIC PORT OBSTRUCTION ....................................................3-50
FLIGHT IN THUNDERSTORMS – LIGHTNING ............................3-51

LIST OF FIGURES
Page
3-1. Cockpit Layout of the Warning and Caution System ........... 3-4


Document No. 109G0040A017 Emergency and
Malfunction Procedures
SECTION 3
EMERGENCY AND MALFUNCTION

PROCEDURES
INTRODUCTION
The following procedures contain the indications of equipment or
system failure or malfunction, the use of emergency features of
primary and backup systems, and appropriate cautions, warnings and
explanatory notes.
All corrective action procedures listed herein assume the pilot gives
first priority to aircraft control and a safe flight path.
DEFINITIONS
The following items indicate the degree of urgency in landing the
helicopter.
LAND IMMEDIATELY : The urgency of the landing is

paramount.
The primary consideration is to
assure the survival of the
occupants.
LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE : Land without delay at the

nearest suitable area (i.e., open
field) at which a safe approach
and landing is reasonably
assured.
LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE: The duration of the flight and

landing site are at the discretion
of the pilot.
Extended flight beyo nd the
nearest approved landing area
is not recommended.

Emergency and Document No. 109G0040A017
WARNING SYSTEM
(Figure 3-1)
Many of the malfunctions described in this Section are indicated
through the display of red warning messages or yellow caution
messages on the EDU 1. Aircrew attention is drawn to the warnings/
cautions by flashing MASTER WARNING/CAUTION lights. Some of
the red warnings are accompanied by an audio warning tone and by a
vocal warning.
Green advisory and cyan status messages are also displayed on
EDU 1.
Whenever a warning/caution message activates, appropriate actions
should be taken to deal with the indicated malfunction, after which the
associated warning/caution message should be acknowledged either
by pressing the MASTER RESET pushbutton on the cyclic stick or by
pressing the MCL/MWL light(s) on the instrument panel.
By cancelling the red/yellow master light(s) also the audio warning
tone and aural messages are suppressed for future indications while
the warning/caution visual messages on EDU1 switch from inverse
video to normal video mode.
The ROTOR LOW warning is an exception as the visual message and
the master warning light can not be reset, remaining active until the
causative condition no longer exists.
The EDU 1 presents a specific area capable of displaying up to 18
lines of 15 characters each, for warning, caution, advisory and status
messages.
The order of priority of the messages is:
Priority Messages Color
1 WARNING red
2 CAUTION yellow
3 ADVISORY green
4 STATUS cyan

The “last-in” message goes always on the top of the relative screen
area and displace the existing list down.
When the messages list exceeds 18, the additional caution/advisory/
status messages can be displayed by pressing the MORE key on the
bottom side of the EDU, while the warning messages always remain
displayed at the top of the list.
Warning and caution messages remain presented until the causative
condition has been corrected.

B
A C
A WARNING
WARNING
ON CAUTION
CAUTION ITT°C TQ%
ADVISORY 755 100
ADVISORY
STATUS
OFF
NR%
BRT 102
N1% N2%
100.0 102
EDU 1- WARNING, CAUTION, ADVISORY AND STATUS MESSAGES
B MASTER MASTER
C
CAUTION WARNING
PUSH TO RESET PUSH TO RESET
YELLOW MASTER CAUTION RED MASTER WARNING

LIGHT (MCL) LIGHT (MWL)
IDS
D
FAN
IDS FAN
CAUTION LIGHT ICN-19-A-153000-G-A0126-00001-A-01-1
Figure 3-1. Cockpit Layout of the Warning and Caution System

MASTER WARNING AND MASTER CAUTION LIGHT
Panel wording Fault condition Corrective action

MASTER WARNING See warning mes- Reset after malfunction
sage on EDU 1. acknowledgement and rela-
tive action.
MASTER CAUTION See caution mes- Reset after malfunction

sage on EDU 1. acknowledgement and rela-
tive action.
WARNING (RED) AND ASSOCIATED AURAL MESSAGES
Panel wording
Fault condition Corrective action
(aural message)
ROTOR LOW Rotor RPM low. Rotor Use collective to adjust
(“rotor low”) RPM between 80 and RPM.
96%.
Note
With rotor RPM between 80 and 96%, a cabin acoustic
signal is activated.
ROTOR HIGH Rotor RPM high. Rotor Use collective to adjust
(“rotor high”) RPM above 108%. RPM.
XMSN OIL HOT Transmission oil tem- Reduce power, land as

(“warning”) perature above maxi- soon as possible.
mum limit (115 °C).
XMSN OIL PRESS Transmission oil pres- Reduce power, land as

(“warning”) sure below minimum soon as possible.
limit (30 psi).
BATT HOT Battery temperature Switch battery off (BATT

(“warning”) exceeding limits. OFF warning message
activates). Land as soon
as possible.

Panel wording
Fault condition Corrective action
(aural message)
BATT OFF Battery disconnected Check battery switch
(“warning”) position. If the switch is
ON land as soon as
practicable.
Correct trouble before
next flight.
ENG OUT N1 RPM abnormally low Reduce collective

(“engine out”) (below 51%). immediately to autoro-
Engine power failure. tate. If altitude permits
investigate failure
and attempt engine
restart. (See the perti-
nent paragraphs in this
section).
Note
With ENG OUT warning message illuminated, a cabin
acoustic signal is activated.
ENG FIRE Fire in engine compart- Shut down engine.
(“engine fire”) ment. Perform autorotative
landing. (See the perti-
nent paragraphs in this
section).
ENG OIL PRESS Engine oil pressure low Reduce power by lower-
(“warning”) (< 40 psi). ing collective, land as
soon as possible.
ENG OIL HOT Engine oil temperature Reduce power by lower-

(“warning”) high (>115 °C) ing collective. Check oil
temperature indication:
if rising above maxi-
mum, land as soon as
possible.

CAUTION MESSAGES (YELLOW)

FUEL LOW Fuel quantity is low. Verify fuel quantity in tank 1.
Land as soon as practicable
(10 minutes of flight remain-
ing at MCP).
Note
Avoid sideways flight and hovering in crosswind when the
indicated fuel quantity is less than 10 kg.
F LOW FAIL Fuel low sensor fail- Keep under control the fuel
ure. No fuel low indi- quantity and proceed with
cation. flight.
FUEL DRAIN 1 (2) Fuel drain valve 1(2) Close the valve before refu-
(if installed) open. elling and/or taking off.
FUEL PUMP 1 (2) Fuel pump n.1 (n.2) in Affected fuel pump OFF.
tank 1 failed. Land as soon as practica-
ble.
XFER PUMP Fuel tank 2 empty or, if Set PUMP switch to OFF.
fuel quantity in tank 2
is not empty, transfer
fuel pump failed.
Note
In case the transfer fuel pump is switched off or fails and
the fuel quantity in tank 2 is less than 120 kg, the RH fuel
quantity indication becomes boxed and crossed to indi-
cate that the remaining fuel in tank 2 is not usable.
FUEL FILTER Engine fuel filter par- Land as soon as practica-
tially clogged. ble. Correct malfunction
before next flight.
EXT PWR ON External power re- Close door before flight.

ceptacle door not
closed.


GEN CONTR Generator relay box Correct malfunction before
circuit breaker tripped operating the engine starter.
out.
DC GEN See paragraph ”Failure of the generator and d.c.

bus” in this section.
INV 1 (2) OFF Failure of inverter n.1 See paragraph ”Failure of

(n.2). an inverter” in this section.
SAS 1 (2) No power to the sys- Check SAS 1 (2) engage

tem. switch, breakers and VG 1
(2) caution message. Pro-
ceed with flight (refer to
paragraph ”Failure of one
Helipilot” in this section).
ATT OFF No pitch and roll atti- Check ATTD HOLD switch.
tude retention. Proba- Proceed with flight. Correct
ble switch failure. malfunction before next
flight.
VG 1 (2) Gyro not erected, loss Check breaker. Check SAS

of power to gyro. 1 (2) engage switch and
SAS 1 (2) caution message.
Proceed with flight (refer to
paragraph ”Failure of one
Helipilot” in this section).
SERVO 1 (2) Failure of one of the Check for low hydraulic

two hydraulic systems. pressure. Land as soon as
practicable (refer to para-
graph ”Hydraulic system
malfunction” in this sec-
tion).
FIRE DET Engine fire detection Land as soon as practica-

system inoperative ble. Correct trouble before
next flight
ENG OIL PRESS Engine oil pressure Proceed as per paragraph

low (in yellow arc). ”Engine oil pressure
below normal range” in
this section.


EEC DEGRADED See paragraph ”Electronic engine control (EEC)
malfunctions” in this section.
EEC FAIL Electronic engine con- Engine control automati-

trol (EEC) failure. cally trips to MEC mode.
Proceed with flight (refer to
paragraph ”Electronic
engine control (EEC) mal-
functions” in this section).
MEC OPN Mechanical (MEC) Refer to paragraph ”Engine

mode of operation fol- operation in mechanical
lowing an EEC failure. mode (MEC)” in this sec-
tion.
ENG AGB CHIPS Metallic particles in Reduce power by lowering

engine accessory collective. Land as soon as
gearbox lubricating oil. possible.
ENG RGB CHIPS Metallic particles in Reduce power by lowering
engine reduction gear- collective. Land as soon as
box lubricating oil. possible.
XMSN OIL CHIPS Metallic particles in the Reduce power by lowering

main transmission oil. collective. Land as soon as
possible.
T/R BOX CHIPS Metallic particles in the Reduce power by lowering

90 deg tail rotor gear- collective. Land as soon as
box lubricating oil. possible.
DOORS OPEN The door(s) of pilot Close door(s) correctly

and/or passenger and/ before flight. If the message
or baggage compart- illuminates in flight, reduce
ments is (are) not cor- speed below 70 KIAS and
rectly closed. check door(s) closed. If the
light is still illuminated,
maintain speed below 70
KIAS and land as soon as
practicable.
AWG FAIL Aural warning system Proceed with flight, correct

failure. trouble before next flight.


IDS FAN Failure of the IDS In flight:
cooling fan. Open windows and vents
and select VENT to HIGH.
Land as soon as practicable
within 30 minutes. Correct
malfunction before next
flight.
On ground:
Correct malfunction before
taking off.
PLA POS Engine throttle out of Check throttle position.

FLT position. In flight (power on condition
only):
- set throttle correctly and
check MAN/NOR selector
to NOR and up (locked).
- If still illuminated, toggle
the EEC/MEC switch to
MEC and proceed with
flight (refer to paragraph
“Engine operation in
mechanical mode (MEC)”
in this section.
Correct trouble before next
flight.
On ground:
- before take off set throttle
correctly and check MAN/
NOR selector to NOR and
up (locked).
- If still illuminated, shut
down the engine and refer
to A119/AW119MKII Main-
tenance Manual for the
proper action to be taken.
PITOT HTR FAIL Failure of the pitot During night flight land as
(if caution light heater. soon as practicable.
is installed)

Rev. 7

MISCMP-P(S) Some primary (sec- Try to identify the faulty
ondary) data from one information and take the
of the two EDUs pertinent corrective action.
invalid. Refer to paragraph “Inte-
Possible degradation grated Display System
in system function. Failure” in this section.
CHECK CONFIG IDS system configura- In flight: proceed with flight,

tion setting in dis- correct trouble before next
agreement between flight.
EDU 1 and 2 (only On ground: correct trouble
programmable param- before taking-off.
eters).
CHECK STRAP IDS hardware configu- In flight: proceed with flight,
ration setting incor- correct trouble before next
rect. flight.
On ground: correct trouble
before taking-off.
CHECK CAL Some parameter cali- In flight: proceed with flight,

bration discordance correct trouble before next
(greater than ±1.5%) flight.
between EDU 1 and 2. On ground: correct trouble
before taking-off.
EDU FAIL-PRI Failure of primary In flight: proceed with flight,

EDU correct trouble before next
flight.
before taking-off.
EDU FAIL-SEC Failure of secondary In flight: proceed with flight,

EDU correct trouble before next
flight.
before taking-off.

Rev. 4
ENGINE FAILURES
FAILURE OF ENGINE
INDICATIONS
Helicopter : Left yaw.
Audio signal : Present.
EDU 1 : ROTOR LOW warning message

displayed and “ROTOR LOW”
aural warning activated.
ENG OUT warning message
displayed and “ENGINE OUT”
aural warning activated when
N1 below 51% and decreasing.
Gas generator (N1) : Rapidly decreasing.
NR : Rapidly decreasing.
ITT : Rapidly decreasing.
Torque : Rapidly decreasing.
PROCEDURE - HOVER IGE and TAKE-OFF (up to 30 KIAS)
Pedals : Control yaw rate.
Collective : Maintain initially then increase

to cushion the touchdown.
Cyclic : Adjust as required to obtain a

level attitude touchdown
(landing skid parallel to the
ground).

PROCEDURE - HOVER OGE
Collective : Lower immediately to stop the

NR decay.
Cyclic : Forward to obtain approximately

25 deg nose down. Increase
airspeed up to 80 KIAS.
Perform an autorotative landing (refer to ”Autorotative landing”

procedure).
PROCEDURE - TAKE-OFF ABOVE 30 KIAS

NR decay.
Cyclic : Flare as required to increase

NR above 100%.
Collective : Apply at the end of the flare,

before touchdown, to reduce
the rate of descent.
Cyclic : Forward to obtain a level

attitude (landing skid parallel to
the ground).
Collective : Continue application to cushion

the touchdown.
Pedals : Maintain direction.
Note
In case of ground contact on the aft portion of the landing
skid, avoid counteracting the pitch down with cyclic.

PROCEDURE - CRUISE

NR decay. Then maintain the
NR between 90 and 110%.
Cyclic : Adjust to obtain desired

autorotative airspeed.
Note
Airspeed for minimum rate of descent is 80 KIAS.
Airspeed for maximum glide distance is 110 KIAS.
If altitude permits, attempt to restart the engine (see ”Engine restart

in flight” procedure).
CAUTION
When the cause of engine failure is suspected to be of a

mechanical nature, do not attempt a restart.
If the engine cannot be restarted:
GEN switch : OFF.

procedure).

AUTOROTATIVE LANDING
Cyclic : At approximately 150 ft AGL,

initiate a flare and hold the flare
to reduce the forward speed.
Collective : Apply at the end of the flare,

before touchdown, to reduce
the rate of descent.
Cyclic : Forward to obtain a level

attitude (landing skid parallel to
the ground).
Collective : Continue application to cushion

the touchdown.
Pedals : Maintain direction.
Note
In case of ground contact on the aft portion of the landing
skid, avoid counteracting the pitch down with cyclic.

ENGINE RESTART IN FLIGHT
Note
Engine restart in flight has not been demonstrated.
If altitude permits and a restart is attempted, proceed as follows:
CAUTION
When the cause of an engine failure is suspected to be of

a mechanical nature, do not attempt a restart.
Collective : Adjust to maintain NR between

90 and 110%.

Note
GEN switch : OFF.
FUEL VALVE switch : Check OPEN.
Associated light : Illuminated.
FUEL PUMP 1 and 2 switches : Check ON.
Fuel pressure : Check.
START pushbutton (on collective lever):Press and release.

advisory messages displayed.
Engine throttle (N1 between 10

and 20%) : IDLE.

Note
A lightup should be obtained within 10 seconds. If this is
not the case, engine restart may be attempted with the
manual override system. (See ”Engine restart in flight
with manual override system (MAN)” procedure).
Gas generator N1 : Note increasing to 61±1%.
ITT : Note increasing.
Engine oil pressure : Check positive indication.


advisory messages out, check.
Gas generator N1 : Stabilized at 61±1%.
Engine throttle : FLT.
EDU 1 : PLA POS caution messages

out, check
GEN switch : ON.
Engine oil : Pressure and temperature

in green arc.
Xfer PUMP switch : Check XFER.

MALFUNCTION OF THE FUEL CONTROL SYSTEM
INDICATIONS
EDU 1 : N1 and/or ITT unstable.
Engine power : Uncommanded change.
PROCEDURE
If an automatic fuel control system malfunction arises in flight, the
manual override system (MAN) can be used. The MAN overrides
automatic control features associated with normal operation of the
engine. The pilot will have to compensate for collective and pedal
movements by rotating the engine throttle.
WARNING
When using the MAN, the engine response is directly
related to the rate at which the engine throttle is rotated.
Additional care is required during engine acceleration.
Monitor cockpit indicators closely to avoid the possibility of
overtemperature, overtorque, overspeed or engine surge.
Note
An initial dead band (no engine response) may occur while
operating in MAN.
If the fuel control system malfunction causes an increase in power:
Engine throttle : Slowly rotate towards IDLE.
If the fuel control system malfunction causes a decrease in power:
Collective : Adjust.
MAN/NOR selector (on collective) : MAN.
Engine throttle : Slowly rotate towards MAX.

WARNING
Monitor N1 closely. Do not allow N1 to decrease below
minimum speed (51%).
WARNING
If N1 is below 60%, extreme caution is required when
rotating the throttle towards MAX as engine surge or over-
temperature is possible.
Land as soon as possible.


SYSTEM (MAN)
Note
Engine restart in flight has not been demonstrated.
If engine restart fails or automatic fuel control system failure causes
engine shutdown, engine restart may be attempted when altitude
permits by using the MAN.
Collective : Adjust to maintain NR between

90 and 110%.

Note
GEN switch : OFF.
FUEL VALVE switch : Check OPEN.
Associated light : Illuminated.
FUEL PUMP 1 and 2 switches : Check ON.
Fuel pressure : Check.
MAN/NOR selector (on collective) : MAN.
START pushbutton (on collective

lever) : Press and release.

advisory messages displayed.

Engine throttle (N1 between 10

and 20%) : Slowly rotate until engine
lightup.
Note
During a start using the MAN, a dead band (no engine
response) may occur between the OFF and the IDLE posi-
tions and extend beyond the FLT position of the throttle.
N1 and ITT : Note increasing.
Engine throttle : Continue rotating towards MAX

until N1 is 61±1%.


advisory messages out, check.
WARNING
When operating using the MAN, the engine response is
directly related to the rate at which the engine throttle is
rotated. Additional care is required during engine accelera-
tion.
WARNING
If N1 is below 60%, extreme caution is required when
rotating the throttle towards MAX as engine surge or over-
temperature is possible.
N1 should not remain below 60% for more than 40 sec-
onds.
Gas generator (N1) : Stabilized at 61±1%, check.
Engine throttle : Slowly rotate towards MAX to

increase power.

CAUTION
When operating using the MAN, monitor cockpit indicators

closely to avoid the possibility of overtemperature, over-
torque, overspeed or engine surge.
GEN switch : ON.

If restart is unsuccessful, abort the engine start as follows:
GEN switch : OFF.

procedure).

ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL (EEC) MALFUNCTIONS
There are two levels of electronic engine control (EEC) malfunctions:

— EEC failed;
— EEC degraded.
EEC failed malfunctions
INDICATIONS
EDU 1 : EEC FAIL caution message

displayed.
Engine mode of operation : Automatic reversion from EEC

to MEC.
EDU 1 : MEC OPN caution message

displayed.
PROCEDURE
EEC/MEC switch : MEC.
Proceed with flight. Refer to paragraph ”Engine operation in

mechanical mode (MEC)” in this section.
— Refer to the A119/AW119MKII Maintenance Manual for the proper
action to be taken.
EEC degraded malfunctions

”EEC degraded” malfunctions have no impact on engine performance.
The EEC DEGRADED caution message is only displayed on ground
(at NR < 20%), for maintenance purposes.
INDICATIONS
On ground (at NR < 20%)
EDU 1 : EEC DEGRADED caution

message displayed.

PROCEDURE
On ground, ”EEC degraded” malfunctions may be cleared by cycling
the EEC/MEC switch from EEC to MEC and back to EEC.
EEC/MEC switch : MEC then EEC.
If the EEC DEGRADED caution message is still illuminated:

— Refer to the A119/AW119MKII Maintenance Manual for the proper
action to be taken.
ENGINE OPERATION IN MECHANICAL MODE (MEC)
Note
MEC mode is to be used only in case of EEC failure or for
training purposes.
The mechanical mode is an automatic mode of operation which is
accomplished through a mechanical N2 governor connected to the
collective control by a mechanical linkage. A droop compensator,
connected to the collective, maintains the NR at approximately 102%
as collective pitch is raised. A rotor speed beep trim allows fine
adjustment to maintain NR within limits (refer to Section 1 for NR/N2
limitations).
Note
In MEC mode it may not be possible to obtain NR/N2 nee-
dle split in autorotation without retarding the throttle to
IDLE. Therefore autorotation practice is not recommended
in MEC mode.
Engine operation in mechanical mode (MEC) in flight
N2/NR : Maintain at 102% (using NR

TRIM switch, as required)

ENGINE HOT START
A hot start is caused by an accumulation of fuel in the combustion

chamber, and/or delay in light-up, causing flames to be emitted from
the exhausts and/or an overtemperature.
INDICATIONS
ITT : Increasing beyond transient

starting limits.
CAUTION
Maximum ITT transient during starting is 1090 °C, not to

exceed two seconds above 980 °C. A linear variation
applies between 870°C, ten seconds, and 980 °C, two
seconds.
Engine exhausts : Visible smoke, flames or fire.
PROCEDURE
Abort engine start as follows:
IGN switch : OFF.
Engine starter : Continue to operate.
CAUTION
Refer to EMM for inspection requirements.

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE BELOW NORMAL RANGE
INDICATIONS
EDU 1 : ENG OIL PRESS caution

message displayed.
PROCEDURE
If N1 is above 72% and engine oil pressure is between 40 and 80 psi
(yellow arc).
Cyclic : As required to obtain level

attitude.
Collective : Reduce power by lowering.
Airspeed : 60 to 70 KIAS level flight.
When N1 is below 72% proceed as follow:
Engine oil pressure : Check:
– if stable between 40 and 80

psi (yellow arc) land as soon
as practicable.
– if below 40 psi (ENG OIL
PRESS warning message
activated) or between 40 and
80 psi (yellow arc) and
decreasing land as soon as
possible .

ENGINE COMPRESSOR STALL
INDICATIONS
Engine : ”Popping” sounds.
ITT : Abnormally increasing.
N1 : Decreasing.
PROCEDURE
Collective : Reduce power by lowering.
Airspeed : 60 to 70 KIAS, level flight.
ITT and N1 : Check for normal indications.
Note
The consequences of a compressor stall may vary
depending upon its severity.
Avoid the condition that resulted in compressor stall.
Land as soon as practicable.

ENGINE DROOP COMPENSATION BINDING
The mechanical engine droop compensator is connected to the

collective lever through a linkage incorporating a shear section.
If engine droop compensator linkage binding occurs, an increased
collective force of 4 kg (8.8 pounds) maximum will be necessary to cut
the shear section.
When the section has been cut, the collective force will return to
normal level but the mechanical droop compensator (MEC) will be
inoperative.
The EEC mode of operation will not be affected.
PROCEDURE
EEC/MEC switch : EEC, check.

TAIL ROTOR FAILURES

Tail rotor failures may typically result in a complete loss of tail rotor
control or in a jamming of the tail rotor pitch.
COMPLETE LOSS OF TAIL ROTOR CONTROL
A tail rotor drive failure results in a loss of yaw control with a

consequent yaw to the right, which increases in rapidity at low forward
speeds and high torque levels.
A tail rotor drive failure may be accompanied by noise, vibration or
oscillation in the tail section.
The vertical fin produces an antitorque component which is a function
of the forward speed and which assists in controlling the helicopter in
low torque conditions.
The action to be taken depends upon whether the helicopter is in
hover or in forward flight. In both cases, the landing should be made at
the lowest possible power or even with the engine out.
While a tail rotor drive failure in hovering is immediately detected, the
same failure may be less evident in cruise.
If trouble in the tail rotor is suspected when flying at cruise speed,
proceed as follows:
Altitude : Maintain the cruise altitude.
Airspeed and pedal control : Reduce gradually to 60 KIAS

and meanwhile check the
helicopter response to pedal
control displacement and the
appearance of any anomalous
vibrations and/or noise.
If the check confirms the tail rotor failure, proceed as per paragraph
”Complete loss of tail rotor control in cruise”, otherwise accomplish
the following further check:
Airspeed : Maintain 60 KIAS.

Collective : Slowly raise, to increase the

antitorque demand, as close as
possible to maximum
continuous power and let the
helicopter climb.
Pedals : Check the pedals effectiveness

in controlling the yaw and any
anomalous vibration and/or
noise.
If the pedals are not effective in controlling the yaw, proceed as per
paragraph ”Complete loss of tail rotor control in cruise”.
If on the contrary nothing seems to confirm a tail rotor failure, proceed
with flight.
Complete loss of tail rotor control in hovering
PROCEDURE
Engine throttle : Chop to IDLE.
Collective : As necessary to cushion the

touchdown.
Note
A slight rotation can be expected at touchdown.

Complete loss of tail rotor control in cruise
PROCEDURE
If a suitable landing site is not available:
Collective : Lower as necessary to eliminate

yaw to the right.
Airspeed/power : As necessary in order to reach

a suitable landing site.
Note
Power may be increased if necessary; however an
increase in power necessitates an increase in speed to
prevent the helicopter from turning.
On reaching the point of intended landing:
Collective : Decrease and enter

autorotation.
GEN switch : OFF.
BAT switch : OFF (except as needed in night

flight).
Perform an autorotative landing, into wind, maintaining forward speed

(35 KIAS).

JAMMING OF TAIL ROTOR PITCH
This condition produces an inability to change tail rotor thrust with

pedals.
INDICATIONS
Helicopter response : No yaw response when pedals

are moved.
OR
Pedals : Locked.
CAUTION
If the pedals cannot be moved with a moderate amount of

force, do not apply excessive force since a more serious
malfunction could result.
Note
If helicopter is in a trimmed flight condition when malfunc-
tion occurs, TQ and airspeed should be noted and helicop-
ter flown to a suitable landing area. Combinations of
torque and airspeed will correct yaw attitude and these
should be adjusted to land the helicopter.
PROCEDURE
HOVERING
Do not close engine throttle unless a severe right yaw occurs. If

pedals lock in any position during hovering, landing can be
accomplished with greater safety under power-controlled flight rather
than closing engine throttle and entering autorotation.

IN FLIGHT - HIGH POWER CONDITION
In a high power condition, helicopter will yaw to the left when the
power is reduced. If airspeed is increased, vertical fin will become
more effective and left yaw will increase.
To accomplish landing proceed as follows:
Collective : Reduce to establish a power-on

approach.
Airspeed : Reduce to ensure an

acceptable sideslip.
At about 3 ft above touchdown area:
Collective : Apply to stop the rate of

descent, left yaw will be
reduced.
Airspeed : Zero.
Land.
IN FLIGHT - LOW POWER CONDITION
In a low power cruise flight or descent condition, helicopter will yaw to

the right when power is increased.
A low power run-on type landing will be necessary:
Airspeed : Approach at 60 to 70 KIAS.
At about 50 feet AGL, reduce airspeed to arrive at the intended

landing point at about 30 KIAS.
At 2 to 5 feet AGL, apply collective to cushion landing and
simultaneously gradually reduce engine throttle to maintain heading. If
right yaw becomes excessive, rotate engine throttle to IDLE.

SYSTEM FAILURES
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
The helicopter is equipped with two independent hydraulic systems for

cyclic and collective pitch control.
Either system can deliver adequate power to control the helicopter.
The tail rotor pedals are boosted by system n.1 only.
PRESSURE LOSS IN SYSTEM N.1
INDICATIONS
EDU 1 : SERVO 1 caution message

displayed.
EDU 2 : N.1 HYD system pressure

below minimum.
Pedals : In hover and in high power

condition tendency to move
slowly to the tail rotor traction
zero position. In all other flight
conditions tendency to maintain
the initial position.
Cyclic and collective : No change in control force.
PROCEDURE
Airspeed : Reduce gradually avoiding pull

up manoeuvers; recommended
maximum 90 KIAS and 25 deg
bank angle in order to maintain
acceptable control loads.
Flight controls : Avoid rapid movements.
Failed hydraulic system : OFF.

PRESSURE LOSS IN SYSTEM N.2
INDICATIONS
EDU 1 : SERVO 2 caution message

displayed.
EDU 2 : N.2 HYD system pressure

below minimum.
Cyclic, pedals and collective : No change in control force.
PROCEDURE
Proceed as per failure of hydraulic system n.1.

JAMMING OF A SERVO VALVE
The helicopter is equipped with three hydraulic servo actuators, dual

body type, on main rotor controls (cyclic and collective) and with one
hydraulic servo actuator, single body type, on tail rotor control
(pedals).
INDICATIONS
The jamming of a servo valve of main rotor servo actuators can be
detected only during the system check on ground before take-off (refer
to Section 2) when hydraulic systems are alternatively deactivated.
PROCEDURE
Airspeed : Reduce gradually avoiding pull

up manoeuvers; maximum 90
KIAS and 25 deg bank angle.
WARNING
Following the loss of tail rotor servo actuator avoid landing
and/or operating in conditions which require a high degree
of manoeuverability (i.e. avoid operating in enclosed
areas, avoid operation with sideward winds, in particular
with wind from the right).

Rev. 4
ELECTRICAL POWER FAILURE
Failure of the generator and d.c. bus
INDICATIONS
EDU 1 : DC GEN caution message

displayed.
Following the generator and d.c. bus failure the caution message
listed below will also be illuminated:
— INV 2 OFF;
— SAS 2;
— FUEL PUMP 2.
PROCEDURE
GEN switch : RESET, then ON.

If DC GEN caution message is
still illuminated, set the switch to
OFF.
GEN BUS switch : If ON, set to OFF (loss of d.c.

bus).
Copilot ICS (if installed)

NORM/FAIL switch : FAIL.
WARNING
After the generator and d.c. bus failure, the battery is
capable of supplying power for approximately 30 minutes.
In this condition the engine is fed by the fuel pump no. 1
only.
Land as soon as practicable and before battery discharge (within max.
30 minutes).

Note
The battery will supply the following indicators and sys-
tems:
— N1 and ITT indicators (on EDU 1);
— torquemeter indicator (on EDU 1);
— dual tachometer indicator (on EDU 1);
— warning, caution and advisory messages (on EDU 1);
— transmission & engine oil indicators (on EDU 2);
— voltammeter indicator (except for VDC - on EDU 2);
— fuel pressure indicator (on EDU 2);
— fuel quantity indicator (on EDU 2);
— hydraulic pressure indicator (on EDU 2);
— backup dual tachometer indicator;
— fuel pump n.1;
— fuel transfer pump;
— fuel valve;
— EEC;
— SAS n.1 system;
— inverter n.1;
— force trim;
— landing light (max. 3 minutes before landing);
— anticollision light;
— pilot spot light;
— ADI indicator (if installed);
— pilot/copilot ICS (if installed);
— transponder (if installed);
— pilot windshield wiper (if installed).

Failure of an inverter
In the event of an inverter failure (#1 or #2) the remaining inverter will
automatically power the 115 V and 26 V busses of the failed inverter.
INDICATIONS
EDU 1 : INV 1 (2) OFF caution message

displayed.
SAS 1 (2) caution message
displayed.
PROCEDURE
INV 1 (2) switch : Attempt reset.

If INV 1 (2) OFF caution
message is still illuminated set
failed inverter switch to OFF.
SAS 1 (2) switch : ON.
EDU 1 : SAS 1 (2) caution message out.
Proceed with flight.

Correct malfunction before next flight.
RAD MSTR (radio master) switch failure

In case of RAD MSTR (radio master) switch failure disengage the
RADIO MASTER circuit breaker; then use the radio equipment as
desired, by means of their control panels.

HELIPILOT SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
During operation of the Helipilot system, malfunctions may occur

which require pilot intervention.
These malfunctions are treated in detail in the following paragraphs.
Note
The Helipilot indicators normally refer to Helipilot 1. Turn-
ing SAS 1 off, the Helipilot indicators will automatically
switch to SAS 2.
Note
Following one of the two Helipilot failures, attitude beep
trim on the cyclic is inoperative.
Failure of one Helipilot
PROCEDURE
Cyclic and collective : Hands on.
Max. airspeed : Reduce VNE by 30 KIAS.
Max. ROC : 750 ft/min.

Repair failed system before next flight.

Repeated disturbances during pitch, roll or yaw operation
PROCEDURE
Retrim the helicopter; failed Helipilot system can be identified by
observing the Helipilot indicators. Disengage the failed system and
proceed as per ”Failure of one Helipilot” procedure.
Note
SAS 2 pitch and roll linear actuator positions may be
observed by pressing the SAS 2 PUSH pushbutton on the
Helipilot control panel.
Oscillatory malfunction during pitch, roll or yaw operation
PROCEDURE
Identify affected axis; isolate SAS 1 or SAS 2 by observing Helipilot
indicators, or switch SAS 1 off.
If SAS 1 disengagement eliminates the oscillation, disengage the
failed system and proceed as per ”Failure of one Helipilot”
procedure.
If oscillations persist, re-engage SAS 1 and switch SAS 2 off.
If oscillations occur in yaw, disengage Helipilot 1 by switching SAS 1
off and proceed as per ”Failure of one Helipilot” procedure leaving
SAS 2 on.
WARNING
Landing should not be attempted while an oscillatory mal-
function exists.
Note
SAS 2 pitch and roll linear actuator positions may be
observed by pressing the SAS 2 PUSH pushbutton on the
Helipilot control panel.

INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM FAILURE
PROCEDURE
FAIL/NORM switch (on intercommu-

nication panel) : FAIL.
Resume normal operation.
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM FAILURE
The internal I.D.S. failures may differ according to the following cases:
EDU failure
INDICATIONS
Affected EDU : Blank or unusable.
Healthy EDU : Automatically set to

REVERSIONARY mode.
PROCEDURE
ON/OFF switch on affected EDU : OFF.
Proceed with flight and correct trouble before next flight
EDU display degradation
INDICATIONS
Affected EDU : Visible display degradation (i.e.

graphical and/or lighting
degradation
PROCEDURE
Healthy EDU : REVERSIONARY mode dis-

played.
Proceed with flight and correct trouble before next flight.

Failure of both EDUs
INDICATIONS
EDU1 and EDU 2 : Blank or unusable.
PROCEDURE
EDU 1 and EDU 2 : Switch to OFF.
CAUTION
Primary and secondary parameters, warning, caution and

advisory visual and aural messages no more available
except:
— N2/NR (on backup tachometer)

— “ONE-FIFTY FEET” aural message
Note
Engine and rotor governing still maintained by EEC.
Land as soon as practical taking care that fuel quantity and FUEL
LOW caution indications are no more available.
Loss of EDU primary (secondary) parameter(s)

Each EDU receives electrical signals from the sensors of all primary
and secondary parameters but displays only the parameters data
related to its current display format. Two failure cases are possible:
— loss of primary parameter(s) in EDU 1 or secondary parame-
ter(s) in EDU 2;
— loss of secondary parameter(s) in EDU 1 or primary parame-
ter(s) in EDU 2.

LOSS OF PRIMARY (SECONDARY) PARAMETER(S) IN EDU 1(2)
INDICATIONS
EDU 1(2) : No indication of the affected

parameter and white dashes (---)
in the digital box.
EDU 1 : MISCMP-P(S) caution message

displayed.
PROCEDURE
Healthy EDU : REVERSIONARY mode

automatically displayed.
Note
If affected EDU is the EDU 2, then OAT and electrical
parameters no more available.
Proceed with flight and correct trouble before next flight.
LOSS OF SECONDARY (PRIMARY) PARAMETER(S) IN EDU 1(2)
INDICATIONS
EDU 1 : MISCMP-P(S) caution message

displayed.
PROCEDURE
Refer to the following paragraph “Miscompare of EDU primary
(secondary) parameter(s)”.

Miscompare of EDU primary (secondary) parameter(s)

The two EDUs perform a continuous cross-comparison of the
electrical signals received from the sensors of all primary and
secondary parameters. In case a discrepancy results from this
comparison, two failure cases are possible:
— miscompare between primary parameter(s) of the two
EDUs;
— miscompare between secondary parameter(s) of the two
EDUs.
MISCOMPARE OF PRIMARY PARAMETER(S)
INDICATIONS
EDU 1 : MISCMP-P caution message

displayed.
PROCEDURE
If flight conditions permit, try to identify the faulty information by
comparing indications on EDU 1 with indications on EDU 2 forced to
REVISIONARY display mode.
Note
To force each EDU to REVERSIONARY display mode,
switch the other EDU to OFF.
Return EDUs to normal mode of operation, proceed with flight
monitoring the faulty parameter.
Correct trouble before next flight.

MISCOMPARE OF SECONDARY PARAMETER(S)
INDICATIONS
EDU 1 : MISCMP-S caution message

displayed.
PROCEDURE
If flight conditions permit, try to identify the faulty information by
comparing indications on EDU 2 with indications on EDU 1 forced to
REVISIONARY display mode.
Note
In case no information discrepancy results from displays
comparison, the faulty information is OAT or voltammeter
indication.
Return EDUs to normal mode of operation, proceed with flight
monitoring the faulty parameter.
Correct trouble before next flight.

FIRE
ENGINE FIRE ON GROUND
INDICATIONS
EDU 1 : ENG FIRE warning message

displayed and “ENGINE FIRE”
Engine area : Smoke, fumes and fire.
PROCEDURE
Shutdown the engine as follows:
GEN switch : OFF.
BAT switch : OFF.
Evacuate the helicopter as soon as possible.

Approved under DOA Rev. 8
ENGINE FIRE DURING FLIGHT
INDICATIONS
EDU 1 : ENG FIRE warning message

displayed and “ENGINE FIRE”
Engine area : Smoke, fumes and fire.
PROCEDURE
Collective : Immediately reduce as required

to maintain NR between 90 and
110%.

Note
Shutdown the engine as follows:
FUEL PUMP 1 and 2 switches : CLOSED.
GEN switch : OFF.
Execute an autorotative descent and landing (refer to ”Autorotative

landing” procedure).
After landing:
BAT switch : OFF.
Evacuate the helicopter as soon as possible.

Rev. 8 Approved under DOA
SMOKE IN CABIN, TOXIC FUMES, ETC.

INDICATIONS
Cabin : Smoke, toxic fumes.
PROCEDURE
VENT switch : ON.
Sliding windows (if installed) and

vents : Open.
Note
If the altitude permits and the source is suspected to be of
an electrical origin, attempt to isolate the source by switch-
ing OFF electrical circuits.

Rev. 1
STATIC PORT OBSTRUCTION

When operating in adverse weather conditions, if erratic readings from
the airspeed indicator and altimeter occur, with the STATIC source
switch in NORM position, proceed as follows:
Doors, vents and, if installed, sliding

windows : Closed.
STATIC source switch : Remove the guard and select

ALTERNATE.
This procedure selects an alternate static source utilizing cabin air.

CAUTION
When the alternate static source is used decrease the

altimeter readings by 250 ft.
Note
The airspeed indications obtained through the alternate
static source is slightly higher than the actual value in all
the speed range.

Rev. 1
FLIGHT IN THUNDERSTORMS – LIGHTNING

When flying in thunderstorms, the helicopter may be struck by
lightning.
If it is suspected that the helicopter has been struck by lightning
proceed as follows:
Airspeed : Reduce (VNE 80 KIAS)
CAUTION
Avoid extreme manoeuvers.


SECTION 4
PERFORMANCE DATA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
GENERAL ....................................................................................... 4-1

USING THE GRAPHS ..................................................................... 4-1
DENSITY ALTITUDE CHART ......................................................... 4-2
CONVERSION CHART ................................................................... 4-4
AIRSPEED CALIBRATION CURVE ............................................... 4-5
POWER ASSURANCE CHECK...................................................... 4-7
OPERATION VS ALLOWABLE WIND ......................................... 4-13
HOVER CEILING........................................................................... 4-15
HEIGHT - VELOCITY DIAGRAM .................................................. 4-20
RATE OF CLIMB........................................................................... 4-23
AUTOROTATION GLIDE DISTANCE ........................................... 4-34
NOISE CHARACTERISTICS ........................................................ 4-36

LIST OF FIGURES
Page
4-1. Density / Altitude Chart ........................................................4-3

4-2. Conversion Chart .................................................................4-4
INSTRUMENT CALIBRATIONS
4-3. Airspeed Calibration Curve - Pilot........................................4-6
ENGINE POWER CHECKS

4-4. Power Assurance Check - Hover.........................................4-9
4-5. Power Assurance Check - In Flight (130 KIAS) .................4-10
4-6. Power Assurance Check - In Flight (100 KIAS) .................4-11
OPERATIONS VS ALLOWABLE WIND

4-7. Wind/Ground Speed Azimuth Envelope ............................4-13
HOVER CEILING
4-8. In Ground Effect (IGE) - Take-Off Power (TOP)
(Heater Off) ........................................................................4-16
4-9. In Ground Effect (IGE) - Maximum Continuous Power (MCP)
(Heater Off) ........................................................................4-17
4-10. Out of Ground Effect (OGE) - Take-Off Power (TOP)
(Heater Off) ........................................................................4-18
4-11. Out of Ground Effect (OGE) - Maximum Continuous Power
(MCP) (Heater Off).............................................................4-19
HEIGHT - VELOCITY DIAGRAM

4-12. Height - Velocity Diagram - Chart A...................................4-21
4-13. Height - Velocity Diagram - Chart B...................................4-22

Page
RATE OF CLIMB
4-14. Take-Off Power (TOP) (Heater Off)
- Gross Weight 2050 kg ..................................................... 4-24
- Gross Weight 2250 kg ..................................................... 4-25
- Gross Weight 2450 kg ..................................................... 4-26
- Gross Weight 2650 kg ..................................................... 4-27
- Gross Weight 2850 kg ..................................................... 4-28
4-19. Maximum Continuos Power (MCP) (Heater Off)
- Gross Weight 2050 kg ..................................................... 4-29
- Gross Weight 2250 kg ..................................................... 4-30
- Gross Weight 2450 kg ..................................................... 4-31
- Gross Weight 2650 kg ..................................................... 4-32
- Gross Weight 2850 kg ..................................................... 4-33
AUTOROTATION GLIDE DISTANCE

4-24. Autorotation Glide Distance ............................................... 4-35

LIST OF TABLES
Page
4-1. Hover ceiling - Correction table..........................................4-15

4-2. Rate of climb - Correction table .........................................4-23

Document No. 109G0040A017 Performance Data
SECTION 4
PERFORMANCE DATA
GENERAL
The performance data presented herein are derived from the engine
manufacturer’s minimum specification power for the engine less
installation losses.
These data are applicable to the basic helicopter without any optional
equipment which would appreciably affect lift, drag or power available.
USING THE GRAPHS

The performance information is presented graphically and on the
sequence in which it would ordinarily be used. The introduction to
each performance item contains an example of graph usage.
Additionally, each graph contains a pictogram showing the correct
sequence of steps in graph usage. As aircraft performance can be
substantially affected by many factors (weight, altitude, temperature,
power levels, etc,), careful attention should be paid to the explanatory
text accompanying each graph to assure that the correct set of factors
is being used.
When quick estimates of performance are required (no interpolation
between curves), it is recommended that the most critical curves be
used for estimates (higher weight, higher density altitude, etc.).

Performance Data Document No. 109G0040A017
DENSITY ALTITUDE CHART

(Figure 4-1)
Enter the graph at the desired value of Outside Air Temperature
(OAT), on the horizontal axis. Proceed vertically until intercepting the
desired value of Pressure Altitude. Proceed left to read the resulting
Density Altitude (in feet). Proceed right to read the corresponding
value of the reciprocal of square root of the density ratio, which is used
to calculate True Airspeed.
Example:
At a Pressure Altitude of 5,000 ft and OAT of +25 °C, determine the
corresponding Density Altitude.
Solution:
Enter Figure 4-1 at an OAT of +25 °C, and proceed vertically until
intersecting a Pressure Altitude of 5,000 ft (diagonal curves). From
this point, proceed left to read a Density Altitude of 7,300 ft.

DENSITY ALTITUDE CHART
▼
▼
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE - [°F]
-70 -50 -30 -10 10 30 50 70 90 110 130

26000 1.52
0
00 1.50
24000 24 1.48
0 1.46
00 1.44
22000 22 1.42
0 1.40
00
20000 20 1.38
00 1.36
180 1.34
18000
STA
1.32
0
00 1.30
16
ND
16000 1.28
AR
0
00 1.26
14
DD
14000 1.24
00
AY
120 1.22
12000
DENSITY ALTITUDE - [ft]
0 1.20
00 1.18
10000 10
1.16
00
80 1.14
8000
1.12
00
60 1.10
6000
0
σ
0 1.08
40
4000 1.06
00
1/
2000 20 1.04
0 1.02
0 1.00
T 00
EE -20
-2000 -F 0.98
D E 0
0
TU -40
0.96
TI
-4000 AL 0.94
E 00
S UR -60
-6000 ES 0.92
PR 00
-80 0.90
-8000
0.88
-10000
-60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE - [°C]
119G1560A001 ISSUE A ICN-19-A-154000-G-A0126-00001-A-01-1
Figure 4-1. Density / Altitude Chart

CONVERSION CHART
(Figure 4-2)
The table in Figure 4-2 is self-explanatory. The conversion from Metric
System values to Imperial System values, and vice-versa, is given for
a number of useful flight parameters.
CONVERSION CHART
IMP.
m ft kg lb °C °F km/h kts m/s ft/min lt Gallon
20000 3000 6600 50 180 3800
6000 120 330 19 850
6500 175
115 320 180
19000 45 170 3600
2900 6400 310 18 800
110 165
5500 18000 6300 300
40 105 160 3400
6200 17 750
2800 100 290 155
17000 6100 3200 160
35 95 280 150
5000 16
6000 270 145 700
16000 2700 90
5900 3000
30 85 260 140 15
15000 5800 250 135 650
4500 2600 80 2800 140
5700 25 240 130 14
75
14000 5600 125 600
230 2600
70 13
2500 5500 20 220 120
4000 13000 65
5400 115 2400 550 120
210 12
15 60 110
12000 2400 5300 200
55 105 2200 500
3500 5200 190 11
11000 10 50 100
2300 5100 180
45 95 2000 450 100
5000 170 10
3000 10000 5 40 90
4900 160 1800
2200 85 9 400
35
9000 4800 0 150 80
30 80
4700 140 75 8 1600
2500 25 350
8000 2100 4600 -5 130 70
20 65 7 1400
4500 120
7000 300
2000 4400 -10 15 60
2000 110
10 6 1200 60
6000 4300 100 55
250
4200 -15 5 90 50
1900 5 1000
1500 5000 0 45
4100 80 200
-20 -5 40
4000 70 4 800 40
4000 1800 35
3900 -10 60
-25 30 150
1000 3 600
3000 3800 -15 50
1700 25
3700 -20 40 100
-30 20 2 400 20
2000 -25
500 3600 30 15
1600 3500 -30 20 50
1000 -35 10 1 200
3400 -35 10 5
0 0 1500 -40 -40 0 0 0 0 0 0
ALTITUDE WEIGHT TEMPERATURE SPEED VERTICAL CAPACITY

VELOCITY
Figure 4-2. Conversion Chart

AIRSPEED CALIBRATION CURVE

(Figure 4-3)
Calibration curves is presented for the pilot’s Air Data System.
The Indicated Airspeed shown on the cockpit instrument is produced
by pressure readings at the aircraft pitot and static ports and, in gen-
eral, these pressure readings contain errors which must be corrected
in order to obtain Calibrated Airspeed (the airspeed which would be
shown on the cockpit instrument if there were no errors). Calibrated
airspeed must be used in order to calculate correct values of the True
Airspeed.
The magnitude of the error depends on the Indicated Airspeed. Enter
the Airspeed Calibration Curve graph (Figures 4-3), with the desired
value of Indicated Airspeed, and proceed vertically until intercepting
the curve. Proceed to the left to read the corresponding value of Cali-
brated Airspeed. Use this value to calculate the corresponding True
Airspeed, as required.
Example:
On the Air Data System Indication, determine the Calibrated Airspeed
corresponding to an Indicated Airspeed of 50 knots.
Solution:
Use Figure 4-3. Enter the graph at an Indicated Airspeed of 50 knots
and proceed vertically until intersecting the curve. Proceed left and
read the corresponding Calibrated Airspeed of 54 knots.

Rev. 4
AIRSPEED CALIBRATION CURVE

PILOT INDICATOR
(FORWARD FLIGHT)
160
150
140
130
120
110
CALIBRATED AIRSPEED [kt]
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
INDICATED AIRSPEED [kt]
Figure 4-3. Airspeed Calibration Curve - Pilot

POWER ASSURANCE CHECK

The Power Assurance Check charts indicate if the engine power
available is within the limits established for the legitimate use of the
RFM.
A power assurance check should be performed daily. Additional
checks should be made if unusual operating conditions or indications
arise. Three power assurance charts are provided, one for a hover
check and the remaining charts for a level flight check at 130 KIAS or,
if this condition is not attainable because engine MCP limits are first
encountered, at 100 KIAS. The heading of each chart contains the
procedure to be followed during the power assurance check.
The hover check is performed prior to takeoff and the in-flight check is
provided for periodic in-flight monitoring of engine performance. Either
power assurance check method may be selected at the discretion of
the pilot.
It is the pilot’s responsibility to accomplish the procedure safely,
considering passenger load, terrain being overflown and the
qualification of persons on board to assist in watching for other air
traffic and to record power check data.
If the hover check is unsuccessful, engine performance is less than
minimum specification and performance data contained in this manual
cannot be achieved.
Refer to EMM.


Document No. 109G0040A017 Performance
POWER ASSURANCE CHECK in HOVER
HEATER OFF
GENERATOR LOAD TO MINIMUM
NR 102%
INCREASE COLLECTIVE UNTIL LIGHT ON SKID OR HOVERING AT 3 FEET. DO NOT EXCEED ITT 755°C OR N1 100.1% OR TQ 100%
STABILIZE POWER 1 MINUTE, THEN RECORD OAT, PRESSURE ALTITUDE, ENGINE TORQUE, ITT AND N1
ENTER CHART AT INDICATED TQ, MOVE DOWN TO INTERSECT PRESSURE ALTITUDE, PROCEED TO THE RIGHT TO INTERSECT OAT,
THEN MOVE UP TO READ VALUES FOR MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE ITT AND N1
IF INDICATED ITT OR N1 EXCEEDS MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE, REPEAT CHECK, STABILIZING POWER FOR THREE MINUTES
IF THE ENGINE EXCEEDS ALLOWABLE ITT OR N1 AFTER STABILIZING POWER FOR THREE MINUTES, PUBLISHED PERFORMANCE MAY NOT BE ACHIEVABLE. REFER TO EMM
NOTE: ENGINE TORQUE SHOULD BE PREFERABLY SET ABOVE 70% FOR REPEATABILITY OF THE TESTS.
ENGINE TORQUE TQ (%) MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE ITT (°C) MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE N1 (%)
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 80 85 90 95 100 105
OA
OA
-40
-30
-20
-10
- 40 )
- 30
- 20
- 10
10
30
40
50
10
20
30
40
50
20
T(
0
0
T(
°C
°C
)
PR
ES
.
SU
10 -1
R
00 0 0 00
80 T (
70 0 t )
60
50 0
40 0
30
20 0
E
AL
00
0 f
00
0
0
00
0
Figure 4-4. Power Assurance Check - Hover

Rev. 4
Performance Document No. 109G0040A017
POWER ASSURANCE CHECK in LEVEL FLIGHT

130 KIAS
HEATER OFF ESTABLISH LEVEL FLIGHT ABOVE 1000 FT AGL
NR 102%
STABILIZE A 130 KIAS LEVEL FLIGHT WITHOUT EXCEEDING TQ 100%, ITT 755°C OR N1 100.1%.
NOTE: IF 130 KIAS CAN NOT BE REACHED DUE TO ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS OR ENGINE LIMITATIONS, THEN LEVEL FLIGHT CAN BE ESTABLISHED AT 100 KIAS (REFER TO NEXT CHART).
IF INDICATED ITT OR N1 EXCEEDS MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE, REPEAT CHECK, STABILIZING POWER FOR THREE MINUTES
IF THE ENGINE EXCEEDS ALLOWABLE ITT OR N1 AFTER STABILIZING FOR THREE MINUTES, CARRY OUT A POWER ASSURANCE CHECK IN HOVER.
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 500 600 700 800 80 85 90 95 100 105
OA
OA
- 40 ° C )
- 30
-2 0
- 10
- 4 0 ° C)
-3 0
-20
-1 0
10
20
30
40
50
10
20
30
40
50
0
0
T(
T(
PR
ES
10 -1
00 0 00
10 E A
SU
90 0 T .(
80 0
70
60 0
50
40 0
30
20
0
00 L
00
0
00
0
00
0
00
00
R
ft)
Figure 4-5. Power Assurance Check - In Flight (130 KIAS)

Rev. 4
POWER ASSURANCE CHECK in LEVEL FLIGHT

100 KIAS
HEATER OFF ESTABLISH LEVEL FLIGHT ABOVE 1000 FT AGL
NR 102%
STABILIZE A 100 KIAS LEVEL FLIGHT WITHOUT EXCEEDING TQ 100%, ITT 755°C OR N1 100.1%.
IF INDICATED ITT OR N1 EXCEEDS MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE, REPEAT CHECK, STABILIZING POWER FOR THREE MINUTES.
IF THE ENGINE EXCEEDS ALLOWABLE ITT OR N1 AFTER STABILIZING POWER FOR THREE MINUTES, CARRY OUT A POWER ASSURANCE CHECK IN HOVER
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 500 600 700 800 80 85 90 95 100 105
OA
OA
- 40 C )
- 30
-2 0
- 10
- 4 0 ° C)
-3 0
-20
-1 0
10
20
30
40
50
10
20
30
40
50
0
0
T(
T(
°
PR
ES
10 -1
SU
00 0 00
10 A
9 0 0 0 . (f t
80 0
70
60 0
50
40 0
30
20
0
RE
0 LT
00
00
0
0
00
0
00
00
)
Figure 4-6. Power Assurance Check - In Flight (100 KIAS)

Rev. 4

Rev. 4
OPERATION VS ALLOWABLE WIND

(Figure 4-7)
Satisfactory stability and control was demonstrated for sideways and
rearward flight up to the maximum weight, in hover IGE or OGE in the
following wind/ground speed azimuth envelope.
350° 0° 10°
315° 45°
DIRECTION
OF WIND
DIRECTION 60°
OF WIND
GS/WIND
VELOCITY
35 40 45 50 (kts)
15 20
270° 90°
DIRECTION DIRECTION
OF WIND OF WIND
225° 135°
180° 160°
APPLICABILITY: UP TO 3000 ft Hd
OPERATION WITH PASSENGER CABIN DOORS CLOSED
OPERATION WITH ONE OR BOTH PASSENGER

CABIN DOORS OPEN OR REMOVED
Figure 4-7. (sheet 1 of 2). Wind/Ground Speed Azimuth Envelope

350° 0° 10°
315° 45°
DIRECTION
OF WIND
DIRECTION 60°
OF WIND
GS/WIND
VELOCITY
45 (kts)
20 30 35 40
270° 90°
DIRECTION DIRECTION
OF WIND OF WIND
225° 135°
180° 160°
APPLICABILITY: FROM 3000 TO 8700 ft Hd


Figure 4-7. (sheet 2 of 2). Wind/Ground Speed Azimuth Envelope

HOVER CEILING
(Figures 4-8 thru 4-11)
The Hover Ceiling charts define the maximum weight at which an In
Ground Effect (IGE) hover (3 ft skid height AGL) or an Out of Ground
Effect (OGE) hover (at least 60 ft skid height AGL) is possible for
different combinations of Pressure Altitude and OAT with main rotor
speed (NR) at 102% and zero wind conditions.
The performance presented for Take-Off Power (TOP) and for
Maximum Continuous Power (MCP) refer to an electrical load of 100 A.
When the electrical load is greater than 100 A, reduce the maximum
weight obtained from the charts according to Table 4-1.
Table 4-1. Hover ceiling - Correction table
WHEN ELECTRICAL LOAD > 100 A REDUCE GROSS WEIGHT BY [KG]:
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 10
0 15 0 15
10 40 10 35
25 50 20 40
40 55 35 50
45 65 40 65
50 70 45 70
85 85 75 80

HOVER CEILING IN GROUND EFFECT

TAKE-OFF POWER
▲
ROTOR SPEED:102%
ZERO WIND
ELECTRICAL LOAD: 100 A ▲

SKID HEIGHT: 3 ft
WITH ELECTRICAL LOAD IN EXCESS OF 100 A REFER TO CORRECTION TABLE
GROSS WEIGHT [lb x 100]

39 43 47 51 55 59 63
15
45
-
14 -3 35
-2 0
0
13 -1 40
HD
0
ft
0
0
12
00
15
10 35
11
PRESSURE ALTITUDE [m x 100]

PERFORMANCE ABOVE
PRESSURE ALTITUDE [ft x 1000]
10 15000 ft DENSITY ALTITUDE 20 30

ARE CALCULATED
9
MA
30 25
XO
8
AT
7
LIM
20
IT
5 15
40
4
10
3
2
5
1
0 OAT - [°C] 0
-1
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
GROSS WEIGHT [kg x 100]
Figure 4-8. In Ground Effect (IGE) - Take-Off Power (TOP)

(Heater Off)

MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS POWER
ROTOR SPEED:102% ELECTRICAL LOAD: 100 A

ZERO WIND SKID HEIGHT: 3 ft

39 43 47 51 55 59 63
15
45
14
-3 -35
0
HD -2
0 40
13 ft
0 00 -1
15 0
12
0 35
11

10 10
30
9
MAX
20
8 25
OAT
7
LIM
20
30
IT
5 15
4
10
3 PERFORMANCE ABOVE
15000 ft DENSITY ALTITUDE
40
ARE CALCULATED
2
5
1
0 OAT - [°C] 0
50
-1
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Figure 4-9. In Ground Effect (IGE) - Maximum Continuous Power

(MCP) (Heater Off)

HOVER CEILING OUT OF GROUND EFFECT

TAKE-OFF POWER
▲
ROTOR SPEED:102%
ZERO WIND
ELECTRICAL LOAD: 100 A ▲

39 43 47 51 55 59 63
15
45
14
- 40
-3 35
D
13
tH
-2 0
0
0f
12
00
-1
0
15
35
11 0

10 30
10
9
20
MA
8 25
XO
AT
7
LIM
30
20
IT
5 15
4 PERFORMANCE ABOVE
ARE CALCULATED 10
3
40
2
5
1
0 OAT - [°C] 0
50
-1
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Figure 4-10. Out of Ground Effect (OGE) - Take-Off Power (TOP)

(Heater Off)


ZERO WIND

39 43 47 51 55 59 63
15
45
14
OAT - [°C]
13 HD 40
ft -
00 -3 35
1 50 0
12
-2
0
35
-1
11
0

10
0
30
9
10
8 25
MAX
20
7
OAT
20
6
LIMIT
30
5 15
4
10
3
40
2
PERFORMANCE ABOVE 5
1 15000 ft DENSITY ALTITUDE
ARE CALCULATED
0 0
50
-1
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Figure 4-11. Out of Ground Effect (OGE) - Maximum Continuous

Power (MCP) (Heater Off)

(Figures 4-12 and 4-13)
The Height-Velocity diagram defines the combination of airspeed and
height above ground from which a safe landing on a smooth, level and
hard surface cannot be assured following an engine failure.
The Height-Velocity diagram is valid up to the maximum GW of
2850 kg.
Two Height-Velocity charts are provided:
— CHART A is applicable up to 3,000 ft Hd;
— CHART B is applicable from 3,000 to 7,000 ft Hd.

Rev. 4
HEIGHT-VELOCITY DIAGRAM
FOR SMOOTH, LEVEL, HARD SURFACES
Chart A
900
260
H- V
A= 5ft - 0kts
800
B= 10ft - 30kts 240
G C= 60ft - 42kts
D=100ft - 50kts
E=150ft - 55kts 220
700
F=450ft - 35kts
G=750ft - 0kts 200
600 180
SKID HEIGHT - [m]

160
SKID HEIGHT - [ft]
500
F 140
400 120
100
300
80
AVOID OPERATION
200 60
IN THIS AREA
E
40
D
100
C 20
A B
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
INDICATED AIRSPEED - [kts]
Figure 4-12. Height - Velocity Diagram - Chart A

HEIGHT-VELOCITY DIAGRAM
FOR SMOOTH, LEVEL, HARD SURFACES
Chart B
APPLICABILITY: from 3000 TO 7000 ft Hd
G
900
260
H- V
A= 5ft - 0kts
800
B= 10ft - 30kts 240
C= 60ft - 58kts
D=100ft - 65kts
E=150ft - 67kts 220
700
F=450ft - 47kts
G=900ft - 0kts 200
600 180
SKID HEIGHT - [m]

160
SKID HEIGHT - [ft]
500
F 140
400 120
100
300
80
AVOID OPERATION
200 60
IN THIS AREA
E
40
D
100
C 20
A B
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
INDICATED AIRSPEED - [kts]
Figure 4-13. Height - Velocity Diagram - Chart B

Rev. 4
RATE OF CLIMB
The Rate Of Climb (ROC) charts are presented for Take-Off Power
(TOP) rating and for Maximum Continuous Power (MCP) rating, both
with NR at 102%.
They refer to the best Rate of Climb airspeed Vy of 60 KIAS up to
15,000 ft Hp.
Rate of Climb obtained from the charts according to Table 4-2.
Table 4-2. Rate of climb - Correction table
WHEN ELECTRICAL LOAD > 100 A REDUCE RATE OF CLIMB BY [ft/min]:
0 0
0 5
0 15
0 25
15 55
45 70
55 80
60 110
65 110
80 115

RATE OF CLIMB
TAKE-OFF POWER
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
ELECTRICAL LOAD: 100 A
Vy: 60 KIAS
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
GROSS WEIGHT
14 2050 kg
( 4519 lb)
13 40
12
35
11
20
10
0
-10
-20
-30
-35

10 30
9
MAX
8 25
30
OAT
7
LIMIT
20
6
5 15
4
40
10
3
2
5
1
0 0
50
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
RATE OF CLIMB [ft/min x 100]
Figure 4-14. Take-Off Power (TOP) (Heater Off)

- Gross Weight 2050 kg
RATE OF CLIMB
TAKE-OFF POWER
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
Vy: 60 KIAS
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
GROSS WEIGHT
14 2250 kg
( 4960 lb)
13 40
12
35
11
20
10
0
-10
-20
-30
-35

10 30
9
MAX
8 25
30
OAT
7
20
LIMIT
5 15
4
40
10
3
2
5
1
0 0
50
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

RATE OF CLIMB
TAKE-OFF POWER
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
Vy: 60 KIAS
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
GROSS WEIGHT
14 2450 kg
( 5401 lb)
13 40
12
35
11
20
10
0
-10
-20
-30
-35

10 30
9
8 25
MAX
30
7
OAT
20
6
LIMIT
5 15
4
40
10
3
2
5
1
0 0
50
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

RATE OF CLIMB
TAKE-OFF POWER
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
Vy: 60 KIAS
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
GROSS WEIGHT
14 2650 kg
( 5842 lb)
13 40
12
35
11
20
10
0
-10
-20
-30
-35

10 30
9
25
MAX
8
30
OAT
7
20
LIM
6
IT
5 15
4
40
10
3
2
5
1
0 0
50
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

RATE OF CLIMB
TAKE-OFF POWER
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
Vy: 60 KIAS
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
GROSS WEIGHT
14 2850 kg
( 6283 lb)
13 40
12
35
11
20
10
0
-10
-20
-30
-35

10 30
9
MA
8 25
30
XO
AT
7
20
LIM
6
IT
5 15
4
40
10
3
2
5
1
0 0
50
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

RATE OF CLIMB
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
Vy: 60 KIAS
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
GROSS WEIGHT
14 2050 kg
( 4519 lb)
13 40
12
35
11
20
10
-10
-20
-30
-35

10 30
9
MAX OAT
8 25
30
7
20
LIMIT
5 15
4
40
10
3
2
5
1
0 0
50
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
Figure 4-19. Maximum Continuos Power (MCP) (Heater Off)

RATE OF CLIMB
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
Vy: 60 KIAS
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
GROSS WEIGHT
14 2250 kg
( 4960 lb)
13 40
12
35
11
20
10
-10
-20
-30
-35

10 30
9
25
MAX OAT LI
8
30
7
20
6
MIT
5 15
4
40
10
3
2
5
1
0 0
50
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

RATE OF CLIMB
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
Vy: 60 KIAS
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
GROSS WEIGHT
14 2450 kg
( 5401 lb)
13 40
12
35
11
20
10
-10
-20
-3
-350

10 30
9
MAX O
8 25
30
AT LIM
7
20
IT
5 15
4
40
10
3
2
5
1
0 0
50
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

RATE OF CLIMB
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
Vy: 60 KIAS
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
GROSS WEIGHT
14 2650 kg
( 5842 lb)
13 40
12
35
11
20
10
-10
-20
-30
-35

10 30
9
MAX
8 25
30
OAT
7
LIMIT
20
6
5 15
4
40
10
3
2
5
1
0 0
50
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

RATE OF CLIMB
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
Vy: 60 KIAS
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
GROSS WEIGHT
14 2850 kg
( 6283 lb)
13 40
12
35
11
10
-10
-20
-30
-35

10 30
9
20
8 25
7
30
20
MAX O
5 15
AT LIM
4
40
IT
10
3
2
5
1
0 0
50
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28


(Figure 4-24)
The autorotation glide distance chart presents the autorotation glide
distance as function of altitude, at 100% NR and is applicable to all
GW.

▼
DISTANCE OVER GROUND - km ▼
5 15 20
15 0 10
45
14
13 40
Minimum Rate of Descent
12 Airspeed 80 KIAS
35
11
PRESSURE ALTITUDE - FEET x 1000
PRESSURE ALTITUDE - METERS X 100

10 30
8 25
Maximum Glide Distance
Airspeed 110 KIAS
7
20
6
5 15
3 10
2
5
1
0 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
DISTANCE OVER GROUND - nm
Figure 4-24. Autorotation Glide Distance

NOISE CHARACTERISTICS
The following noise level complies with ICAO Annex 16, Chapter 8,
4th Edition:
Model: AW119 MKII Engine Pratt & Whitney PT6B-37A

Maximum Gross Weight 2850 kg
Level Flyover Take-off Approach

Configuration EPNL EPNL EPNL
(EPNdB) (EPNdB) (EPNdB)
Clean aircraft.
No external kit 88.2 90.8 91.0
installed

Document No. 109G0040A017 Optional Equipment
Supplements
SECTION 5
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT SUPPLEMENTS
GENERAL
This section contains all supplements related to optional equipments
or specific operation applicable to AW119 MKII Helicopter.
The supplements may modify any of the limitations, procedures (both
normal and emergency), and performance characteristics of the basic
RFM.
It is responsibility of the flight crew to be familiar with the contents of
each supplement.

Rev. 2
Optional Equipment Document No. 109G0040A017
Supplements
LIST OF SUPPLEMENTS
The RFM supplement for each optional equipment must be carried in
the aircraft whenever the optional equipment is installed on the aircraft.
Table 5-1. List of supplements
Helicopter
Supplement
Name of equipment P/N applicability
No.
S/N
“Green aircraft”
1 -- All
configuration
2 Bleed-air heater 109-0811-60 All
3 External hoist 109-0812-68 All
4 Searchlight 109-0812-83 All
5 Snow skis 109-0812-92 All
6 Cargo hook 109-0810-31 All
109-0810-31 plus
7 Dual cargo hook All
109-0811-75
8 Dual controls 109-0810-01 All
Supplementary fuel
9 109-0811-49 All
tanks
10 Rotor brake 109-0811-87 All
Emergency Medical
11 Transportation 109-0812-34 All
(E.M.T.)
Emergency Medical
12 109-0811-70 All
Service (E.M.S.)
GPS/COMM system
13 109-0772-18 All
GNC 250 XL
14 Oxygen system 109-0811-76 All
15 Pulsed chip detector 109-0813-78 All

Supplements
Table 5-1. List of supplements
Helicopter
Supplement
Name of equipment P/N applicability
No.
S/N
Battery in Baggage
16 109G2406R01 All
Compartment
17 Reserved -- --
Low Temperature
18 -- All
Operations
Digital AWG with DH
19 109-B811-08 All
Tone
GPS/NAV/COMM
20 system GARMIN 109-0772-18 All
GNS430AW
21 Operator seat 109G2520F24 All
22 HF System Type 109G2310F13 All
KHF1050
23 Cockpit Voice Data 109G3130F01 All
Recorder (CVDR)
24 SWE400 Camera 109G9300F04 14707,
14732,
14735.
25 Rearview Mirrors 109G2590F01 All

Rev. 14
Supplements
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT INCOMPATIBILITY

The following table shows the incompatibility of one or more optional
equipment when installed on board the helicopter.
Table 5-2. Optional equipment incompatibility
Supplements Incompatibility
Name of equipment
No. (Supplements No.)
1 “Green aircraft” configuration 16
2 Bleed-air heater None
3 External hoist 16
4 Searchlight 5
5 Snow skis 4
6 Cargo hook None
7 Dual cargo hook None
8 Dual controls 12
11 and 12
9 Supplementary fuel tanks
(-147 and -153)
10 Rotor brake None
Emergency Medical
11 Transportation 9, 12 and 14
(E.M.T.)
Emergency Medical Service 8, 9 (-147 and -
12
(E.M.S.) 153) and 11
13 GPS/COMM system GNC 250 XL 20
14 Oxygen system 11 and 16
15 Pulsed chip detector None
16 Battery in Baggage Compartment 1, 3 and 14

Rev. 6
Supplements
Table 5-2. Optional equipment incompatibility
Supplements Incompatibility
Name of equipment
No. (Supplements No.)
17 Reserved --
18 Low Temperature Operations None
19 Digital AWG with DH Tone None
GPS/NAV/COMM system
20 13
GARMIN GNS430AW
21 Operator Seat 11, 12
22 HF System Type KHF1050 None
Cockpit Voice Data Recorder
23 None
(CVDR)
24 SWE400 Camera (*)
25 Rearview Mirrors None
(*) This installation is certified under No Hazard principle and for this
reason it cannot be declared compatible with installations not included
into the helicopter configuration at the moment of the certification.
Note
The VHF radio systems KY196B (P/N 109-0772-18-169)
and KX165A (P/N 109-0772-18-149) are incompatible.

Rev. 14
Supplements

Rev. 2
AW119 MKII RFM Supplement 1
Optional Equipment Supplements “Green Aircraft”
Document No. 109G0040A017 Configuration
EASA Approval with TCDS N° R.005

dated 11 June 2007
The information contained herein supplements the information of

the basic Rotorcraft Flight Manual.
For limitations, procedures and performance data not contained
in this supplement, consult the basic Rotorcraft Flight Manual.
”GREEN AIRCRAFT” CONFIGURATION
The “Green Aircraft” configuration as defined in the Agusta Report N°

109G0000Q007, includes the following non-conformities with respect
to the General Arrangement Drawing N° 119-9000-01-111:
— Interior arrangement (soundproofing, upholstery, ashtrays, etc.),
seats and safety belts not installed except for the pilot seat and rel-
ative safety belt and ashtray. The helicopter may not be painted.
ISSUE 1: 11 JUNE 2007

REVISION 1: 5 NOVEMBER 2014
Supplement 1 AW119 MKII RFM
“Green Aircraft” Optional Equipment Supplements
Configuration Document No. 109G0040A017

LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
dated 11 June 2007
1 Revised pages Title page, A-1 and Approved under the
B-1. Authority of DOA
N° EASA 21J.005



margin of the page and the approval revision number is
printed in the lower margin.
Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 1
A-1 1
A-2 0
B-1 1
B-2 0
i and ii 0
PART I — EASA Approved
1 and 2 of 2 0
11-06-07 B-1
This Page Is Intentionally Left Blank
B-2 11-06-07
Optional Equipment Supplements Table of Contents
”GREEN AIRCRAFT”
CONFIGURATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
SECTION 1 - LIMITATIONS
NUMBER OF SEATS ..................................................................1 of 2
SECTION 2 - NORMAL PROCEDURES 1 of 2
SECTION 3 - EMERGENCY AND MALFUNCTION

PROCEDURES 1 of 2
SECTION 4 - PERFORMANCE DATA 1 of 2
EASA Approved 11-06-07 Page i

Table of Contents Optional Equipment Supplements
Page ii 11-06-07 EASA Approved

NUMBER OF SEATS
Two (pilot included).
SECTION 2 - NORMAL PROCEDURES
No change, apart from the checks relevant to the items that are not
installed in the green configuration.
SECTION 3 - EMERGENCY AND

MALFUNCTION PROCEDURES
No change.
SECTION 4 - PERFORMANCE DATA
No change.
EASA Approved 11-06-07 Page 1 of 2

Page 2 of 2 11-06-07 EASA Approved

Optional Equipment Supplements Bleed-air Heater

dated 11 June 2007

the basic Rotorcraft Flight Manual
BLEED-AIR HEATER
The Bleed-Air Heater P/N 109-0811-60 consists of a Venturi tube, a

shut-off valve, a mixing valve with solenoid control valve, an outside
air intake, a temperature sensor control for pilot and passenger area
outlets, connecting ducts and tubing and control switches to operate
the shut-off valve and solenoid control valve.
Bleed air and outside air are fed into the mixing valve where a sensor
determines the mixing ratio to produce the desired temperature. The
temperature is regulated by a manual control knob and flexible cable
connected to a variable remote sensor in the mixing valve.
The system is provided with an overtemperature switch.

Bleed-air Heater Optional Equipment Supplements

Optional EquipmentSupplements Bleed-air Heater
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
dated 11 June 2007



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 0
A-1 and A-2 0
B-1 and B-2 0
i and iv 0
1 thru 22 of 22 0
11-06-07 B-1
B-2 11-06-07
BLEED-AIR HEATER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
BLEED-AIR HEATER OPERATION .........................................1 of 22

BLEED-AIR HEATER OPERATIONAL CHECK ................... 2 of 22
CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITATIONS .....................................1 of 22
PLACARDS ...............................................................................1 of 22
ENGINE PRE-START CHECK ..................................................2 of 22

SYSTEM CHECK ......................................................................2 of 22
IN FLIGHT .................................................................................3 of 22
APPROACH AND LANDING ....................................................3 of 22

PROCEDURES
ENGINE FAILURES ..................................................................4 of 22
FAILURE OF ENGINE .......................................................... 4 of 22
ENGINE RESTART IN FLIGHT ............................................ 4 of 22
ENGINE RESTART IN FLIGHT WITH MANUAL
OVERRIDE SYSTEM (MAN) ................................................ 5 of 22
11-06-07 Page i
Page
FIRE ...........................................................................................5 of 22
ENGINE FIRE DURING FLIGHT .......................................... 5 of 22
SMOKE IN CABIN, TOXIC FUMES, ETC. ................................5 of 22
STATIC PORT OBSTRUCTION ................................................6 of 22
BLEED-AIR HEATER MALFUNCTION ....................................6 of 22
GENERAL..................................................................................7 of 22
HOVER CEILING.......................................................................7 of 22
RATE OF CLIMB .....................................................................12 of 22
Page ii 11-06-07
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
1-1. Placards......................................................................... 1 of 22
HOVER CEILING
4-1. In Ground Effect (IGE) - Take-Off Power (TOP)
(Heater On).................................................................... 8 of 22
4-2. In Ground Effect (IGE) - Maximum Continuous Power
(MCP) (Heater On) ........................................................ 9 of 22
(Heater On).................................................................. 10 of 22
4-4. Out of Ground Effect (OGE) - Maximum Continuous
Power (MCP) (Heater On) ........................................... 11 of 22
RATE OF CLIMB
4-5. Take-Off Power (TOP) (Heater On)
- Gross Weight 2050 kg ............................................... 13 of 22
4-10. Maximum Continuous Power (MCP) (Heater ON)
4-11. Maximum Continuous Power (MCP) (Heater On)
11-06-07 Page iii

LIST OF TABLES
Page
4-1. Hover ceiling - Correction table...................................... 7 of 22

4-2. Rate of climb - Correction table ................................... 12 of 22
Page iv 11-06-07
BLEED-AIR HEATER OPERATION

The bleed-air heater shall be OFF during take off and landing and in
all flight conditions requiring the maximum engine power available.
Note
If necessary the bleed-air heater may be used in hovering.

After bleed-air heater installation the new empty weight and CG
location must be determined.
PLACARDS
A
A
DO NOT OPERATE HEATER ABOVE 21°C OAT
ICN-19-A-155002-G-A0126-11001-A-01-1
Figure 1-1. Placards

Bleed-air Heater Optional EquipmentSupplements

HEATER switch : OFF.
S/OFF switch : OFF.
MIX switch : OFF.
SYSTEM CHECK
BLEED-AIR HEATER OPERATIONAL CHECK
TEMPerature CONTrol knob : Minimum (fully counterclock-

wise).
HEATER switch : ON.
EDU1 : HEATER ON advisory message

displayed.
TEMPerature CONTrol knob : Turn the knob clockwise (to

increase temperature) and
observe no air-flow from outlets.
MIX switch : ON and observe no air-flow.
S/OFF switch : ON and observe warm air-flow

from outlets.
TEMPerature CONTrol knob : Turn the knob fully counter-

clockwise and observe that the
air-flow decreases, then turn the
knob clockwise.
MIX switch : OFF, observe that the air-flow

stops, then set the switch to
ON. 22

HEATER switch : OFF, observe that the air-flow

stops.
EDU1 : HEATER ON advisory message

out.
TEMPerature CONTrol knob : Turn fully counterclockwise.
MIX switch : OFF.
S/OFF switch : OFF.
IN FLIGHT
If heater operation is desired:
TEMPerature CONTrol knob : Fully counterclockwise.
S/OFF switch : ON.
MIX switch : ON.
HEATER switch : ON.
TEMPerature CONTrol knob : Turn clockwise (to increase

temperature) and set to desired
temperature.
CAUTION
Do not operate heater above 21 °C OAT.

S/OFF switch : OFF.
MIX switch : OFF.


ENGINE FAILURES
FAILURE OF ENGINE
Note
Whenever an engine out condition is detected (ENG OUT
warning message displayed on EDU1), the Bleed-Air
Heater shut-off valve is automatically closed, thus switch-
ing off the air bleed.
PROCEDURE
S/OFF switch : OFF.
MIX switch : OFF.
Before attempting a restart:
HEATER switch : OFF, check.
S/OFF switch : OFF, check.
MIX switch : OFF, check.
22


SYSTEM (MAN)
Before attempting a restart:
HEATER switch : OFF, check.
S/OFF switch : OFF, check.
MIX switch : OFF, check.
FIRE
Note
Whenever an engine fire condition is detected (ENG FIRE
warning message displayed on EDU1), the Bleed-Air
Heater shut-off valve is automatically closed, thus switch-
ing off the air bleed.
PROCEDURE
S/OFF switch : OFF.
MIX switch : OFF.
SMOKE IN CABIN, TOXIC FUMES, ETC.

PROCEDURE
S/OFF switch : OFF.
MIX switch : OFF.

STATIC PORT OBSTRUCTION

PROCEDURE
S/OFF switch : OFF.
MIX switch : OFF.
BLEED-AIR HEATER MALFUNCTION

If a malfunction in the bleed-air heater occurs deactivate the system
as follows:
S/OFF switch : OFF.
MIX switch : OFF.
Proceed with flight, correct trouble before next flight.
22


GENERAL
The maximum power available with the Bleed-Air Heater system operating
is less than that available with the helicopter in basic configuration.
This power loss is caused by the compressor bleed-air used for the
heater system. Performance with the bleed-air heater system switched
OFF is the same as that shown in the basic Rotorcraft Flight Manual.
HOVER CEILING
The Hover Ceiling charts define the maximum weight at which an In
Ground Effect (IGE) hover (3 ft skid height AGL) or an Out of Ground
Effect (OGE) hover (at least 60 ft skid height AGL) is possible for
different combinations of Pressure Altitude and OAT with main rotor
speed (NR) at 102% and zero wind conditions.
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 15 0 10
10 40 10 35
20 50 20 40
40 60 35 55
50 85 45 75
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -


TAKE-OFF POWER
▲
ROTOR SPEED:102%
ZERO WIND
SKID HEIGHT: 3 ft ▲
HEATER ON

39 43 47 51 55 59 63
15
45
14 -
-3 35
HD
-2 0
0 40
ft
13
0
-1
00
0
15
12 0
35
11
10

10 PERFORMANCE ABOVE
30
ARE CALCULATED
9
20
8 25
7
20
6
5 15
4
10
3
2
5
1
0 OAT - [°C] 0
-1
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Figure 4-1. In Ground Effect (IGE) - Take-Off Power (TOP) 22

(Heater On)



ZERO WIND SKID HEIGHT: 3 ft
HEATER ON

39 43 47 51 55 59 63
15
45
14
HD -
ft -3 35 40
13 0 0
00 -2
15 0
12 -1
0
35
11
0

10 30
9
10
8 25
20
7
PERFORMANCE ABOVE 20
ARE CALCULATED
5 15
4
10
3
2
5
1
0 OAT - [°C] 0
-1
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Figure 4-2. In Ground Effect (IGE) - Maximum Continuous Power

(MCP) (Heater On)

TAKE-OFF POWER

ZERO WIND HEATER ON

39 43 47 51 55 59 63
15
45
14
D
tH
40
0f
13
-3 -35
00
0
15
12
-2
0
35
-1
11
0

10 30
9
10
8 25
20
7
PERFORMANCE ABOVE 20
ARE CALCULATED
5 15
4
10
3
2
5
1
0 OAT - [°C] 0
-1
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Figure 4-3. Out of Ground Effect (OGE) - Take-Off Power (TOP) 22

(Heater On)


ZERO WIND HEATER ON

39 43 47 51 55 59 63
15
45
HD
14
ft
0
00
13 40
15
-
12 -3 35
0
35
-2
0
11
-1

0
10 30
0
8 25
10
7
20
6
20
5 15
4 PERFORMANCE ABOVE
ARE CALCULATED 10
3
2
5
1
0 OAT - [°C] 0
-1
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Power (MCP) (Heater On)
RATE OF CLIMB
(TOP) rating and for Maximum Continuous Power (MCP) rating, both
with NR at 102%, Heater ON.
15,000 ft Hp.
0 0
0 10
0 20
20 25
45 50
55 80
75 130
- -
- -
- -
22

RATE OF CLIMB
TAKE-OFF POWER
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
▲
Vy: 60 KIAS
HEATER ON
▲
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
14
13 40
12
35
11
20
10
0
-10
-20
-30
-35

10 30
9
8 25
7
20
6
5 15
4
10
3
GROSS WEIGHT
2 2050 kg
( 4519 lb) 5
1
0 OAT - [˚C] 0
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
Figure 4-5. Take-Off Power (TOP) (Heater On)


RATE OF CLIMB
TAKE-OFF POWER
ROTOR SPEED: 102% Vy: 60 KIAS
HEATER ON
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
14
13 40
12
35
11
20
10
0
-10
-20
-3
-350

10 30
9
8 25
7
20
6
5 15
4
10
3
GROSS WEIGHT
2 2250 kg
( 4960 lb) 5
1
0 0
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
Figure 4-6. Take-Off Power (TOP) (Heater On) 22

RATE OF CLIMB
TAKE-OFF POWER
HEATER ON
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
14
13 40
12
35
11
20
10
0
-10
-20
-30
-35

10 30
9
8 25
7
20
6
5 15
4
10
3
GROSS WEIGHT
2 2450 kg
( 5401 lb) 5
1
0 OAT - [˚C] 0
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

RATE OF CLIMB
TAKE-OFF POWER
HEATER ON
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
14
13 40
12
35
11
20
10
0
-10
-20
-30
-35

10 30
9
8 25
7
20
6
5 15
4
10
3
GROSS WEIGHT
2 2650 kg
( 5842 lb) 5
1
0 0
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
Figure 4-8. Take-Off Power (TOP) (Heater On) 22

RATE OF CLIMB
TAKE-OFF POWER
HEATER ON
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
14
13 40
12
35
11
20
10
0
-10
-20
-30
-35

10 30
9
8 25
7
20
6
5 15
4
10
3
GROSS WEIGHT
2 2850 kg
( 6283 lb) 5
1
0 0
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

RATE OF CLIMB
HEATER ON
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
14
13 40
12
35
11
20
10
-10
-20
-30
-35

10 30
9
8 25
7
20
6
5 15
4
10
3
GROSS WEIGHT
2 2050 kg
( 4519 lb) 5
1
0 OAT - [˚C] 0
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
Figure 4-10. Maximum Continuous Power (MCP) (Heater ON) 22

RATE OF CLIMB
HEATER ON
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
14
13 40
12
35
11
20
10
-10
-20
-30
-35

10 30
9
8 25
7
20
6
5 15
4
10
3
GROSS WEIGHT
2 2250 kg
( 4960 lb) 5
1
0 OAT - [˚C] 0
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
Figure 4-11. Maximum Continuous Power (MCP) (Heater On)

RATE OF CLIMB
HEATER ON
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
14
13 40
12
35
11
20
10
-10
-20
-30
-35

10 30
9
8 25
7
20
6
5 15
4
10
3
GROSS WEIGHT
2 2450 kg
( 5401 lb) 5
1
0 OAT - [˚C] 0
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
Figure 4-12. Maximum Continuous Power (MCP) (Heater On) 22

RATE OF CLIMB
HEATER ON
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
14
13 40
12
35
11
10
-10
-20
-30
-35
20

10 30
9
8 25
7
20
6
5 15
4
10
3
GROSS WEIGHT
2 2650 kg
( 5842 lb) 5
1
0 OAT - [˚C] 0
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

RATE OF CLIMB
HEATER ON
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
14
13 40
12
35
11
10
-10
-20
-30
-35

10 30
20
8 25
7
20
6
5 15
4
10
3
2
5
1
GROSS WEIGHT
0 OAT - [˚C] 2850 kg 0
( 6283 lb)
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
Figure 4-14. Maximum Continuous Power (MCP) (Heater On) 22

Optional Equipment Supplements External Hoist

dated 11 June 2007

EXTERNAL HOIST
The external hoist installation P/N 109-0812-68 consists of:

— an electric hoist motor and winch assembly;
— a mounting frame;
— a protection for the RH skid;
— an hoist electronic control system with two cable payout displays,
one in the cockpit and one on the hoist operator pendant;
— a radio-ICS system to allow communication among the crewmem-
bers and the human external cargo (HEC);
— electrical components, wiring and relative hardware;
— an hoist operator safety shoulder harness;
— a manual cable cutter (located on the forward RH cabin strut), pro-
vided for emergency use.

External Hoist Optional Equipment Supplements

Optional EquipmentSupplements External Hoist
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
dated 11 June 2007



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 0
A-1 and A-2 0
B-1 and B-2 0
i thru iv 0
1 thru 22 of 26 0
PART II — Manufacturer’s data
23 thru 26 of 26 0
11-06-07 B-1
B-2 11-06-07
EXTERNAL HOIST
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
TYPE OF OPERATION .............................................................1 of 26

FLIGHT CREW ..........................................................................1 of 26
AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS (IAS) ...............................................2 of 26
MAXIMUM OPERATING LIMIT SPEED (VNE) ..................... 2 of 26
HOIST LIMITATIONS ................................................................4 of 26
PLACARDS ...............................................................................7 of 26
PRE-FLIGHT CHECKS .............................................................9 of 26

PILOT’S DAILY PRE-FLIGHT CHECK ................................. 9 of 26
PILOT’S PRE-FLIGHT CHECK .......................................... 11 of 26
ENGINE PRESTART CHECK .................................................12 of 26
SYSTEMS CHECK ..................................................................12 of 26
IN FLIGHT ...............................................................................15 of 26
HOIST OPERATING PROCEDURE................................... 15 of 26
LITTER HOISTING ..................................................................18 of 26
LITTER................................................................................ 18 of 26
11-06-07 Page i
Page

PROCEDURES
WARNING SYSTEM ................................................................19 of 26

CAUTION MESSAGES (YELLOW) .................................... 19 of 26
HOIST LOAD JETTISON ........................................................20 of 26
HOIST MOTOR OVERTEMPERATURE .................................20 of 26
CABLE FOUL ..........................................................................21 of 26
SYSTEM FAILURES ...............................................................22 of 26
ELECTRICAL POWER FAILURE ....................................... 22 of 26
SECTION 7 - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 23 of 26
Page ii 11-06-07
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
1-1. Wind/Ground Speed Azimuth Envelope

with Load on Hoist ......................................................... 3 of 26
1-2. Hoist Station and Butt Line ............................................ 5 of 26
1-3. Lateral CG Limits for Hoist Operations (metric units) .... 6 of 26
1-4. Lateral CG Limits for Hoist Operations (imperial units) . 7 of 26
1-5. Placards......................................................................... 8 of 26
2-1. Hook Locking Screws .................................................. 14 of 26
7-1. Hoist Controls .............................................................. 24 of 26
7-2. Radio-ICS Interface Box and Manual Cable Cutter
Positions (typical)......................................................... 25 of 26
11-06-07 Page iii

Page iv 11-06-07
TYPE OF OPERATION
Operations of the hoist must be authorised by the Competent
Authority in accordance with applicable national operational
regulations.
The design of the external hoist installation is suitable to lower or haul
on board loads or a human cargo, with the aircraft in stationary hover,
in areas where landing cannot be accomplished provided that, for
human external cargo, a personnel-carrying device system approved
by the Competent Authority is also installed.
Use of the radio-ICS system must be in accordance with the national
operating regulations.
Hoist operation is approved for day-VFR with ground visual contact.
Hoist operation is approved also with the right passenger door
removed.
Normal helicopter operation is approved, with the hoist installed,
providing the hoist is not used and the hoist electical system is
deactivated.
FLIGHT CREW
One pilot and one hoist operator.
The hoist operator must be restrained by a safety shoulder harness
during all phases of hoist operation and shall wear protective gloves
for guiding cable during operation.
The maximum weight of hoist operator must be 90 kg (198 lb).
The hoist operator shall be familiar with hoist operating procedures
and limitations.
A manual cable cutter must be always available for the hoist operator
during all phases of hoist operation.

External Hoist Optional EquipmentSupplements
MAXIMUM OPERATING LIMIT SPEED (VNE)
Hoist operation (cable reeling-in/-out, load raising or lowering) is

permitted with aircraft in stationary hover only.
WARNING
Aircraft horizontal translation with hoist cable deployed
and no external hoisted load is prohibited.
Aircraft horizontal traslation with external hoisted load outside the
aircraft cabin is approved up to 8000 ft Hd in accordance with the
wind/ground speed azimuth envelope of Figure 1-1.
CAUTION
Airspeed with external load is limited by controllability.

Caution should be exercised when carrying an external
load as the handling characteristics may be affected by the
size, weight and shape of the load.
The vertical speed shall be limited to ± 200 ft/min.
26

350° 0° 10°
DIRECTION DIRECTION
OF WIND OF WIND
G.S./WIND
VELOCITY
35 40 45 (kts)
20 30
270° 90°
DIRECTION DIRECTION
OF WIND OF WIND
180°
Figure 1-1. Wind/Ground Speed Azimuth Envelope

with Load on Hoist
At altitudes higher than 8000 ft, flight with external hoisted load
outside the aircraft cabin is prohibited.
Note
Flight with external hoisted load shall be limited to reach a
place suitable for load recovering.
WARNING
Hoisting or lowering an empty litter in open position is pro-
hibited.
HOIST LIMITATIONS
Maximum hoist load : 204 kg (450 lb).
Maximum available hoist cable lenght : 50 m (164 ft).

After hoist installation the new empty weight and CG location must be
determined.
See Figures 1-3 and 1-4 for lateral CG limits; the longitudinal CG limit
do not change from basic aircraft.
26

STA 2437 mm
(96 inches)
BL 1195 mm
(47 inches)
BL 0
ICN-19-A-155003-G-A0126-61001-A-01-1
Figure 1-2. Hoist Station and Butt Line

3100
-53 53 180
2900
2850
2720
2700
2500
2450 2450
2300
2100
1900
Minimum
flying
1725
1700 weight
-60 60 200
1500
-160 -120 -80 -40 0 40 80 120 160 200 240
Note
Lateral Station “0” is 450 mm inboard from each main jack point and coin-
cides with the helicopter longitudinal plane of symmetry.
Note
The diagram shaded area is only applicable during hoist operation.
Figure 1-3. Lateral CG Limits for Hoist Operations

(metric units) 26

6700
-2.1 2.1 7.1
6300 6283
5997
5900
5500
5401 5401
5100
4700
4300
3900 Minimum
flying 3803
weight
-2.4 2.4 7.9
3500
-6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Note
Lateral Station “0” is 17.7 in inboard from each main jack point and coin-
Note
The diagram shaded area is only applicable during hoist operation.
Figure 1-4. Lateral CG Limits for Hoist Operations

(imperial units)

PLACARDS
A B
A
B TYPICAL IN 2 PLACES
CAUTION
THE HOIST OPERATOR MUST BE
RESTRAINED BY A SAFETY HARNESS
DURING ALL PHASES OF HOIST
CAUTION
OPERATION AND SHALL WEAR IF FOR ANY REASON
PROTECTIVE GLOVES TO GUIDE THE HOIST STOPS,
THE CABLE AT ANY TIME DURING DURING RAISING OR
HOIST OPERATION. LOWERING OPERATION,
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
IN CLEAR VIEW OF FREE IT BY ACTUATING
HOIST OPERATOR THE CONTROLLER.
RESCUE HOIST CONTINUED OPERATION
MAY CAUSE TOTAL
C 600 lb (272 kg)
CABLE FAILURE. LAND
AS SOON AS POSSIBLE
RESCUE HOIST
MAX LOAD CAPACITY IN CLEAR VIEW OF
450 lb (204 kg) PILOT AND HOIST OPERATOR
IN CLEAR VIEW OF
HOIST OPERATOR
ICN-19-A-155003-G-A0126-11001-A-01-1
26
PRE-FLIGHT CHECKS
AREA N°2 (Fuselage - RH side)
Hoist : Condition, security, oil leaks

and wiring connected.
Skid protection : Inspect for condition and

damages.
Hoist cowling : Secured.
Hoist mount : Condition and security.
Hook : Check for condition, security

and freedoom of rotation on
cable.
Hook rubber bumper : Inspect for crushing.
AREA N°7 (Cabin interior)
CABLE CUT switch (on pilot’s cyclic

stick) : OFF, guard closed.
HOIST PWR circuit breaker : In.
For the following checks connect the d.c. electrical supply:
HOIST switch : ON.
EDU1 : HOIST ON advisory message

displayed.

Hoist cable payout display (both

pilot and pendant control) : Check built-in-test reading is
“88.8”.
CAUTION
Care should be taken to prevent cable damage caused by

kinking when handling it on the ground. The cable should
lie onto a clean surface whenever possible.
Hoist operation : Check by reeling-out and

reeling-in approximately three
(3) meters of cable.
Note
When reeling-in the cable with no load, apply tension with
gloved hands to ensure smooth and even wrapping.
WARNING
Hoist operator should always wear protective gloves
whenever handling the hoist cable to prevent injury from
any possible broken cable strands.
Cable terminal : Condition and security
Note
Ensure that the two locking screws, located above the
hook assembly and rubber bumper, are in place and each
one has a cotter pin securing it. See Figure 2-1.
Reel in cable : Check hoist automatically stops

when cable fully reeled in.
26

Hoist operator:
Hoist pendant control : Verify correct installation and

condition.
Manual cable cutter : Verify presence and condition

(forward RH cabin strut).
Safety shoulder harness and gloves : Verify presence and condition.
Radio-ICS portable transceiver

and interface box : Verify presence and condition of
portable transceiver. Verify the
portable transceiver and inter-
face box are set on the same
frequency.
HOIST switch : OFF. Check HOIST ON

advisory message extinguishes
on EDU 1.
Disconnect the d.c. electrical supply.
(Every flight)
Hoist operator:
Hoist pendant control : Verify condition.
Manual cable cutter : Verify presence (forward RH

cabin strut).
Safety shoulder harness and gloves : Verify presence and condition.
Radio-ICS portable transceiver : Verify presence and condition.

Check the transceiver and
interface box are set on the
same frequency.

ENGINE PRESTART CHECK

stick) : OFF, guard closed. HOIST CUT
ARMD caution message not
illuminated on EDU1.
HOIST circuit breakers : Check in.
SYSTEMS CHECK
HOIST switch : ON.

displayed.

stick) : ON (guard raised).
EDU1 : HOIST CUT ARMD caution

message displayed.
CABLE CUT switch : OFF (guard closed). Check

HOIS T CU T AR MD caution
message extinguishes.
HOIST control switch (on pilot’s cyclic

stick) : DN.
HOIST hook : Check lowering.
Cable payout display : Check for meter counting.
HOIST control switch : UP.
Note
When reeling-in the cable with no load, apply tension with
gloved hands to ensure smooth and even wrapping.
HOIST hook : Check raising.

26

Hoist operator:
HOIST thumb wheel (on

pendant control) : Rotate to DN and to UP.
HOIST hook : Check lowering or raising

according to thumb wheel
selection.
HOIST control switch (on pilot’s cyclic

stick) : DN or UP, checking that it over-
rides the thumb wheel selection.
HOIST thumb wheel (on pendant

control) : Off position.

advisory message extinguishes
on EDU1.

1
2
2
1
ICN-19-A-155003-G-A0126-21001-A-01-1
1. Locking screw
2. Cotter pin
Figure 2-1. Hook Locking Screws 26

IN FLIGHT
HOIST OPERATING PROCEDURE
Note
When the OAT is below 4 °C verify the hoist functionality
by lowering and hauling the cable by at least 2 meters.
HOIST switch : ON.

displayed.
WARNING
Hoist operator shall be secured to helicopter with the
safety harness during hoist operations.
Establish hover over hoist operation area.
CAUTION
Avoid, whenever possible, operating the hoist with cross-

wind or rear wind.
Verify positive audio communication is achieved among all
crewmembers using the onboard ICS and portable radio-ICS
transceiver.
Note
If necessary select an alternative channel on both the
radio-ICS interface box and portable transceiver.
Right passenger door (if installed) : Open and locked.

WARNING
During hoist operation the operator must always maintain
his hand on the cable and verify the correctness of cable
unwinding and rewinding.
HOIST control switch (pilot) or HOIST

thumb wheel (operator) : DN.
Cable speed (operator only) : As desired by means of the

HOIST thumb wheel on pendant
control.
Note
As hook approaches the up or down limits (colored sec-
tions of the cable), hoist speed should slow automatically:
if not, manually control hoist speed.
CAUTION
During hoist operation the cable trail angle must be kept to

minimum. If for any reason the trail angle exceeds
15 degrees (30 degrees cone angle), refer to helicopter
Maintenance Manual for pertinent actions.
CAUTION
Do not allow cable to drag on the ground or any other sur-

face which could contaminate or damage the cable.
WARNING
Static electricity should be dissipated by suitable means
before ground personnel touch the hook or cable.
HOIST control switch (pilot) or HOIST

thumb wheel (operator) : UP.
26

Cable speed (operator only) : As desired by means of the

HOIST thumb wheel on pendant
control.
Maintain hover until load is into cabin.

If the place is not suitable to complete the load recovery on board,
make transition to forward flight into wind, if possible, allowing
adequate hoist load clearance over obstacles.
Airspeed : As required for adequate

controllability, within load on
hoist limits. See Limitations.
Once a suitable place has been reached, establish a hover and

proceed to recover load on board or to lay it on ground.
CAUTION
Hoist operation (load raising or lowering) is permitted with

aircraft in stationary hover only.
Maintain hover until hoist operations are completed.
Right passenger door (if installed) : Close.

advisory message extinguises
on EDU1.
Note
During hoist operation, the operator shall record any shock
load to the cable; in this event, the cable must be replaced
prior to the next flight.

LITTER HOISTING
When the use of a litter is necessary and landing is possible the option
to land the helicopter for litter loading should be taken.
Litter hoisting can be hazardous and should be accomplished only
when a landing is not feasible. In addition to all other procedures
contained herein, the following shall apply to litter hoisting operations.
LITTER
WARNING
Hoisting or lowering an empty litter in open position is pro-
hibited. An empty litter suspended from hoist in open posi-
tion can oscillate uncontrollably in rotor wash and can fly
upward, striking fuselage or tail rotor.
Prior to hoisting or lowering an empty litter, litter shall be closed and
secured with straps. Litter should be suspended in a near-vertical
position and sling straps should be drawn tight.
Litter sling straps should be adjusted so that litter is 610 to 710 mm
(24 to 28 inches) below hoist hook.
Note
If litter is suspended too far below hook, litter can not be
loaded into helicopter with hoist hook at up limit.
CAUTION
A loaded litter can rotate around cable during hoisting.

Hoist operator may have to grasp litter sling straps to con-
trol rotation as litter approaches skid landing gear.
26


WARNING SYSTEM

HOIST CUT ARMD Hoist cable cut sys- No corrective action
tem armed. is required. Take
care to avoid acci-
dental jettison of
hoisted load.
HOIST CABL LKD Hoist electrical cir- See paragraph
cuit deactivated “Cable foul” in this
(pilot and operator’s section.
HOIST control
switches inopera-
tive) because of
cable foul detected
on hoist drum.

HOIST LOAD JETTISON

The external hoist installation is provided with an electrical cable cut
system operated by the pilot. If an emergency condition should require
the release of the hoisted load proceed as follows:

stick) : Lift the guard to arm the system.
HOIST CUT ARMD caution
message illuminates on EDU1.
Operate the switch.
In the event of failure of the electrical cable cut system, cut the cable
with the manual cable cutter accessible to the hoist operator.
Cut the cable as close to the hoist as possible.
HOIST MOTOR OVERTEMPERATURE

The hoist motor overtemperature is indicated by the flashing of the
indication on the cable payout display on the hoist pendant control.
In the event of a motor overtemperature, complete the hoist cycle and
wait for the motor to cool down (indication on hoist pendant control
display stops flashing) before resuming the hoist operation.
CAUTION
Prolonged operation of hoist with flashing indication on

hoist pendant control display will result in damaged or
“burned out” hoist motor.
26

CABLE FOUL
The external hoist installation is provided with a cable foul protection
system which prevents operation with a fouled cable.
When a cable foul develops on the hoist drum, the actuation of the
cable foul system interrupts the electrical circuit to the hoist motor.
INDICATIONS
EDU1 : HOIST CABL LKD caution

message displayed.
HOIST control switch (pilot) and

HOIST thumb wheel (operator) : Inoperative.
PROCEDURE
CAUTION
If for any reason the hoist stops during rising or lowering

operation, do not attempt to free it by actuating the control-
ler. Continued operation may cause total cable failure.
Proceed in forward flight with hoisted load suspended to a suitable
site, allowing adequate hoist load clearance over obstacles.
Airspeed : As required for adequate

controllability, within load on
hoist limits. See Limitations.
Once a suitable site has been reached establish hover, then slowly
descend to lay the load on ground.
Recover the cable on board manually then proceed to land.
Correct the cause of cable foul before restoring hoist to operational
conditions.

SYSTEM FAILURES
Failure of generator and d.c. bus

In case of failure of generator during hoist operation the pilot is
allowed to complete only the recovery cycle.
Refer to Section 3 of the basic Rotorcraft Flight Manual for
procedures.
Note
One hoist recovery cycle reduces the flight time on battery
power to 17 minutes.
No change.
26
Page 22 of 26 11-06-07
SECTION 7 - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The winch unit contains 50 usable meters (164 ft) of hoist cable.
Cargo hoisting and lowering can be controlled by the hoist operator
through the pendant control thumb wheel, providing variable cable
speeds on command, or by the pilot through the hoist control switch
on the cyclic stick at a fixed cable speed. The fixed speed control
mode of operation permits a 30 m/min (100 ft/min) cable speed
throughout the usable cable range with automatic slow down and stop
at the cable extremes. The maximum cable speed, when operated by
the crew member thumb wheel, is 43 m/min (140 ft/min) when raising
a load up to 204 kg (450 lbs) and 64 m/min (210 ft/min) when lowering
a 204 kg (450 lbs) load.
The hoist system is provided with a cable foul protection system that
stops the hoist if the cable is not properly stowed on the drum. The
protection system activates the HOIST CABL LKD caution message
on EDU1.
The hoist system is also provided with a hoist motor overtemperature
protection system that activates a malfunction annunciation on the
cable payout displays.
The radio-ICS system is an extension of the onboard
intercommunication system. It consists of two main components, a
Handhold Transceiver and an Interface Box with the relative wiring.
The Interface Box is connected to the helicopter ICS system.
The system is provided with the following features:
— it is activated by the pilot through the HOIST switch alongside the
hoist motor and controls;
— the pilot has the ability to isolate himself from the Hoist Operator-
Handhold Transceiver communications, using the ICS pushbutton
on the front console, in order to perform normal VHF radio opera-
tions;
— the hoist operator has the ability to isolate the crew communica-
tions from the Handhold Transceiver communications using the TX
ON/OFF pushbutton on the Interface Box.
11-06-07 Page 23 of 26
A SAS VG GYRO
115 VAC
ADI VG SAS 5 6
1
1
1
1
1
COMP
1 1
2
1
2
DC BUS
B CARGO
HOIST
HOOK
1 5 5 5
2
CARGO SAFETY PWR CABLE CABLE CTL
HOOK HOOK CUT 1 CUT 2
1 2 3 4
HEC
1
9
A C
2
ICS
B B
DN
UP
C 7 HO
IS
T
8
WIPER
EAPS CHIP OFF HOIST HOOK UTIL
OFF BURNER OFF HOOK OFF
ON ON ON ON UTIL ON
LT SYS
PASS WRN CABIN POS OVHD & CSL INST PNL
OFF OFF OFF
ON ON ON OFF BRT OFF BRT STOWED IN PASSENGER

COMPARTMENT RH SIDE
ICN-19-A-155003-G-A0126-11002-A-01-1
1. HOIST PWR circuit breaker
2. HOIST CABLE CUT 1 circuit breaker
3. HOIST CABLE CUT 2 circuit breaker
4. HOIST CTL circuit breaker
5. HOIST control switch
6. HOIST CABLE CUT switch
7. HOIST switch
8. Pendant (hoist remote control)
9. HEC ICS circuit breaker
26
Figure 7-1. Hoist Controls
Page 24 of 26 11-06-07
A
A
B
B
325
1894/2X
C9
FELC
O
CUTTER
CABLE
ICN-19-A-155003-G-A0126-71001-A-01-1
Figure 7-2. Radio-ICS Interface Box and Manual Cable Cutter

Positions (typical)
11-06-07 Page 25 of 26
26
Page 26 of 26 11-06-07
Optional Equipment Supplements Searchlight

dated 11 June 2007

SEARCHLIGHT
The searchlight installation P/N 109-0812-83 consists of a steerable

light installed at the centre of the fuselage under the baggage
compartment, or alternatively (P/N 109-0812-83-139), on the left side
of fuselage under the passenger compartment. The light can be
extended, stowed or directed as required by operating a switch on the
collective lever.
ISSUE 1 : 11 JUNE 2007

REVISION 1 : 14 DECEMBER 2012
Searchlight Optional Equipment Supplements

Optional EquipmentSupplements Searchlight
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
dated 11 June 2007
1 Revised pages Title page, A-1, B-1 i, EASA Approval
1 and 2 of 6. N° 10042719



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 1
A-1 1
A-2 0
B-1 1
B-2 0
i 1
ii 0
1 and 2 of 6 1
3 and 4 of 6 0
5 and 6 of 6 0
11-06-07 B-1
B-2 11-06-07
SEARCHLIGHT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS (IAS) .................................................1 of 6

CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITATIONS .......................................1 of 6
MISCELLANEOUS LIMITATIONS ..............................................1 of 6
SEARCHLIGHT OPERATION ................................................ 1 of 6
PRE-FLIGHT CHECKS ...............................................................2 of 6

PILOT’S DAILY PRE-FLIGHT CHECK ................................... 2 of 6
PILOT’S PRE-FLIGHT CHECK .............................................. 2 of 6
IN FLIGHT ...................................................................................2 of 6
SEARCHLIGHT OPERATING PROCEDURE ........................ 2 of 6

PROCEDURES 4 of 6

11-06-07 Page i
Rev. 1
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
7-1. Searchlight Controls......................................................... 5 of 6
Page ii 11-06-07

Maximum speed for searchlight
extension, orientation and retraction : 120 KIAS.
VNE with searchlight extended : No change with respect to the

basic RFM.

After searchlight installation the new empty weight and CG location
must be determined.
SEARCHLIGHT OPERATION
Use of searchlight P/N 109-0812-83-139 when any rearview mirror is

installed is only permitted with the lamp in stowed position.
EASA Approved 11-06-07 Page 1 of 6 6

Rev. 1
Searchlight Optional EquipmentSupplements
PRE-FLIGHT CHECKS
AREA N° 6 (Fuselage - RH side)
Searchlight : Condition and cleanliness.
(Every flight)
Searchlight : Condition and cleanliness.
IN FLIGHT
SEARCHLIGHT OPERATING PROCEDURE
Searchlight extension and orientation
EXT/RETR/L/R switch on
collective lever : EXT (to extend the light).
ON/OFF/STOW switch on
collective lever : ON (to switch the lamp on).
Note
With the switch in OFF position the light remains extin-
guished in the position where it has been left.

Rev. 1
EXT/RETR/L/R switch on
collective lever : Set as necessary.
Note
Moving switch to L or R position the searchlight rotates left
or right. It is possible to adjust the light in an intermediate
position, from stowed to extended, by temporarily moving
the switch to EXT or RETR position.
Searchlight stowing
ON/OFF/STOW switch on
collective lever : STOW then OFF.
Note
In STOW position the light is extinguished.


No change.
No change.

A
1
EEC
ON
L BOTH MEC
D T SRCH LT OFF
G
L
A
X EXT
A
I STOW INC
T T
OFF
L R N R
R I
START
DECR M
RETR
FLOATS 2
MAN
NOR
1. ON/OFF/STOW switch
IDLE
MAX
FLT
O
F
F
2. EXT/RETR/L/R switch
ICN-19-A-155004-G-A0126-71001-A-01-1
Figure 7-1. Searchlight Controls

11-06-07 Page 5 of 6 6
Page 6 of 6 11-06-07
Optional Equipment Supplements Snow Skis

dated 11 June 2007

SNOW SKIS
The snow skis installation P/N 109-0812-92 consists of two fiberglass

skis fixed to the landing gear skids.
Each ski is held in position by six clamps which allow the ski to rotate
around the landing gear skid axis, in order to adapt to ground surface
during landings.
Furthermore, each ski is provided with two stiffening structures in its
aftermost portion.
The attachment system of each ski to the landing gear skid also
include four mechanical stops to limit its rotation around the skid axis.

Snow Skis Optional Equipment Supplements

Optional EquipmentSupplements Snow Skis
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
dated 11 June 2007



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 0
A-1 and A-2 0
B-1 and B-2 0
i and ii 0
1 and 4 of 4 0
11-06-07 B-1
B-2 11-06-07
SNOW SKIS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page

GROUND SPEED LIMITATIONS ................................................1 of 4
SLOPE TAKE OFF AND LANDING LIMITATIONS ....................1 of 4

OPERATIONS ON SNOW / ICE COVERED SURFACES ..........3 of 4

PROCEDURES
AUTOROTATIVE LANDING ON SNOW COVERED

SURFACES .................................................................................4 of 4
11-06-07 Page i
Page ii 11-06-07

After snow skis installation the new empty weight and C.G. location
must be determinated.
GROUND SPEED LIMITATIONS

Maximum forward speed at touch down after an engine failure.
Snow/ice covered surfaces : 30 kts.
Other surfaces : 50 kts.
SLOPE TAKE OFF AND LANDING LIMITATIONS

Nose-up and side-up operations : 8 degrees.
Nose-down operations : 2 degrees.

Snow Skis Optional EquipmentSupplements
PRE-FLIGHT CHECKS
AREA No 2 (Fuselage - RH side)
Snow ski, attaching clamps, rotation

limiters : Cleanliness, condition and
security.
Note
Remove accumulated snow/ice. Check that the ski is not
frozen and stuck to the ground.
AREA No 6 (Fuselage - LH side)
Snow ski, attaching clamps, rotation

security.
Note
Page 2 of 4 11-06-07 EASA Approved 4

(Every flight)
Snow skis, attaching clamps, rotation

security.
Note
OPERATIONS ON SNOW / ICE COVERED SURFACES

Use caution when starting the engine with the helicopter on snow/ice
covered surfaces due to the possibility of helicopter drift before tail
rotor reaches effective RPM.
Use caution when taxiing on soft and/or uneven snow.
CAUTION
Adapt forward touchdown speed according to the condi-

tion of snow and ground.

Snow Skis Optional EquipmentSupplements

If any malfunction of the skis occurs in flight, reduce speed and land
as soon as practical.
AUTOROTATIVE LANDING ON SNOW COVERED

SURFACES
CAUTION
The conditions of snow and ground may alter significantly

the helicopter handling at landing. For this reason the for-
ward speed at touchdown must be limited as much as pos-
sible.
Proceed as per “AUTOROTATIVE LANDING” in the basic
Rotorcraft Flight Manual.
No change.

Optional Equipment Supplements Cargo Hook

dated 11 June 2007

CARGO HOOK
The cargo hook P/N 109-0810-31 consists of a support frame, a hook,

a rearview mirror P/N 109-0812-02, an electrical and manual
(emergency) release system, attaching hardware, an electronic hook
load measuring system and a digital readout indicator. A spring
system is attached to the cargo hook which provides the stowing when
the hook is not in use.
Note
The swiveling link is not supplied with the cargo hook;
however, it is recommended to use it between the suspen-
sion cable and the cargo hook

Cargo Hook Optional Equipment Supplements

Optional EquipmentSupplements Cargo Hook
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
dated 11 June 2007



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 0
A-1 and A-2 0
B-1 and B-2 0
i and iv 0
1 thru 29 of 32 0
30 thru 32 of 32 0
11-06-07 B-1
B-2 11-06-07
CARGO HOOK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
CARGO HOOK OPERATION ...................................................1 of 32

FLIGHT CREW ..........................................................................1 of 32
AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS (IAS) ...............................................1 of 32
WEIGHT LIMITATIONS.............................................................2 of 32
CARGO HOOK LIMITATIONS ..................................................2 of 32
PRE-FLIGHT CHECKS .............................................................7 of 32

PILOT’S PRE-FLIGHT CHECK ............................................ 9 of 32
SYSTEM CHECK ......................................................................9 of 32
TAKE-OFF ...............................................................................10 of 32
IN FLIGHT ...............................................................................10 of 32
APPROACH AND LANDING .................................................. 11 of 32
CARGO RELEASE ............................................................. 11 of 32
11-06-07 Page i
Page

PROCEDURES

EMERGENCY CARGO RELEASE..........................................12 of 32
OPERATION VS ALLOWABLE WIND ...................................12 of 32

HOVER CEILING OGE............................................................15 of 32
HEIGHT - VELOCITY DIAGRAM ............................................20 of 32
RATE OF CLIMB .....................................................................21 of 32
SECTION 6 - WEIGHT AND BALANCE
DATUM LINE LOCATION .......................................................30 of 32
Page ii 11-06-07
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
1-1. Longitudinal CG Limits (metric units)............................. 3 of 32

1-2. Longitudinal CG Limits (imperial units) .......................... 4 of 32
1-3. Lateral CG Limits (metric units) ..................................... 5 of 32
4-1. Wind/Ground Speed Azimuth Envelope ...................... 14 of 32
HOVER CEILING
(Heater Off).................................................................. 16 of 32
(Heater On).................................................................. 17 of 32
Power (MCP) (Heater Off) ........................................... 18 of 32
Power (MCP) (Heater On) ........................................... 19 of 32
RATE OF CLIMB
4-8. Maximum Continuous Power (MCP) (Heater Off)
4-12. Maximum Continuous Power (MCP) (Heater Off)
4-13. Maximum Continuous Power (MCP) - (Heater On)
6-1. Cargo Hook Station Diagram....................................... 30 of 32
7-1. Cargo Hook Controls and Indicators............................ 29 of 32
11-06-07 Page iii

LIST OF TABLES
Page
4-1. Hover ceiling - Correction table.................................... 15 of 32

4-2 Rate of climb - Correction table ................................... 21 of 32
Page iv 11-06-07
CARGO HOOK OPERATION

The cargo hook is approved as ”Class B rotorcraft-load combination”.
Class B rotorcraft-load combination means ”a load combination in
which the external load is jettisonable and is lifted free of land or water
during the rotorcraft operation”.
Operation of the helicopter with cargo on the hook shall be conducted
in accordance with day VFR.
Note
The external load operations must be authorized by the
competent Operational Authority.
FLIGHT CREW
When operating with cargo on the hook, only the personnel involved in
the mission is allowed on board.

VNE with external loads attached to cargo hook:
From sea level to 5000 ft : 100 KIAS
Above 5000 ft : Decrease 3 Kts every 1000 ft

from 100 KIAS.
CAUTION
Controllability and stability of the load may limit the air-

speed of the rotorcraft with an external load. Particular
rotorcraft-load combination flight characteristics may
reduce the limits above.

32
Cargo Hook Optional EquipmentSupplements
Note
Caution should be exercised, when carrying external
cargo, as the handling characteristics and the controllabil-
ity may be affected by the size, weight and shape of the
cargo load, as well as by the length of the sling.
WEIGHT LIMITATIONS
Maximum Gross Weight with external
load attached to cargo hook : 3150 kg (6944 lb)
Note
For maximum takeoff and landing weight refer to Section 1
of the basic Rotorcraft Flight Manual.
CARGO HOOK LIMITATIONS

Cargo hook loading limit:
From -1000 ft to 9000 ft : 1400 kg (3086 lb)
Above 9000 ft : decrease 50 kg (110 lb) every

1000 ft from 1400 kg (3086 lb)
WARNING
Flight with unballasted sling as an external load is prohib-
ited.

After cargo hook installation the new empty weight and C.G. location
must be determined.
Refer to Figures 1-1 and 1-2 for Longitudinal CG limits and Figures 1-3
and 1-4 for Lateral CG limits when flying with external load attached to
cargo hook.

3400
3410 3524
3200
3150
3000 3342
2850
2800
3580
2600
2450
2400
2200
2043
2000
1800 1812 Minimum

1725 flying
3457 weight
1600 3528
1400
3250 3300 3350 3400 3450 3500 3550 3600 3650 3700
Note
Longitudinal Station “0” is 1785 mm forward of the front jack point.
Figure 1-1. Longitudinal CG Limits (metric units)

32
7500
134.3 138.7
7000 6944
131.6
6500
6283
6000
140.9
5500
5401
5000
4500 4504
4000 3995 Minimum

3803 flying
weight
3500 136.1
138.9
3000
128 130 132 134 136 138 140 142 144 146
Note
Longitudinal Station “0” is 70.2 in forward of the front jack point.
Figure 1-2. Longitudinal CG Limits (imperial units)

3400
-48 48
3200
3150
3000
2800
2600
2450 2450
2400
2200
2000
1800 Minimum
1725 1725 flying
weight
1600
-60 60
1400
-100 -80 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
Note
The Lateral Station “0” is 450 mm inboard from each main jack point and
coincides with the helicopter longitudinal plane of symmetry.
Figure 1-3. Lateral CG Limits (metric units)

32
7500
-1.9 1.9
7000 6944
6500
6000
5500
5401 5401
5000
4500
4000
Minimum
3803 3803 flying
weight
3500
-2.4 2.4
3000
-4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4
Note
The Lateral Station “0” is 17.7 in inboard from each main jack point and
coincides with the helicopter longitudinal plane of symmetry.
Figure 1-4. Lateral CG Limits (imperial units)

PRE-FLIGHT CHECKS
AREA N°1 (Helicopter nose)
Rearview mirror : Condition, cleanliness and

security.
AREA N°2 (Fuselage - rh side)
Cargo hook : Condition and security.

For the following checks connect the d.c. supply.
Note
Ground personnel shall assist the pilot during the cargo
hook checks.
EDU1 : CARGO HOOK ARM caution

message out, check.
CARGO HOOK OPEN caution
message out, check.
CARGO HOOK pushbutton on

pilot cyclic stick : Lift the guard to arm the release
system.
EDU : CARGO HOOK ARM caution

message displayed.

32

pilot cyclic stick : Push. Verify the opening of the
cargo hook and that CARGO
HOOK OPEN caution message
is displayed on EDU1. Release
the switch and verify that the
cargo hook returns to closed
position and that CARGO
HOOK OPEN caution message
on EDU1 extinguishes.
CAUTION
CARGO HOOK pushbutton operation longer than 20 sec-

onds may cause damage to the solenoid of the release
system.
Note
The cargo hook is provided with a spring which keeps it
permanently in closed position even when the opening
system releases the lock device.
A force of approximately 5 kg must be applied to the cargo
hook to overcome the spring force and to verify the hook
opening.

pilot cyclic stick : Lower the guard to protect the
release pushbutton.

message extinguishes.
Repeat cargo hook checks by using CARGO HOOK pushbutton on

copilot cyclic stick (if installed).

EMER CARGO RELEASE PULL
handle (emergency) : Pull to full travel. Verify the

opening of the cargo hook and
that CARGO HOOK OPEN cau-
ion message is displayed on
EDU1. Release the handle and
verify that the cargo hook
returns to closed position, that
message on EDU1 extinguishes
and that the handle returns to
the full down position.
(Every flight)
Rearview mirror : Condition, cleanliness and

security.
Cargo hook : Condition and security.
SYSTEM CHECK
Hook load indicator : Set to zero.
Note
Adjust the hook load indicator after a 5 minutes warm up
with no load on the hook.

32
TAKE-OFF
Note
For cargo attachment to the hook an approved installation
has to be used.
WARNING
Discharge helicopter static electricity, before attaching
cargo, by touching the airframe with a ground wire or if a
metal sling is used, the hook-up ring can be struck against
the cargo hook.
If contact has been lost after initial grounding of the heli-
copter, it should be electrically regrounded and, if possible,
contact maintained until hook-up is completed.
Note
Attachment of cargo sling to the hook can be monitored by
means of the rearview mirror.
After cargo attachment slowly increase the collective pitch and ascend
vertically to take-up the slack of cargo sling.
Lift vertically cargo from surface and read the hook load indicator to
verify the cargo weight to be within the hook loading limitations.
Hover to check for satisfactory controllability and power within limits.
IN FLIGHT
Enter into slow forward speed and verify that uncontrollable or
hazardous flight conditions do not exist. Allow adequate sling load
clearance over obstacles. Increase forward speed and select an
operational airspeed at which no hazardous oscillation is encountered.

CARGO RELEASE
CARGO HOOK pushbutton

on cyclic stick : Lift the guard to arm the release
system.

message displayed.
Perform the approach to the cargo release area with care and at low
speed. Stabilize hover above release point, then slowly descend until
cargo lays down on ground.

on cyclic stick : Push to release cargo.
Verify that CARGO HOOK
OPEN caution message is dis-
played on EDU1.
Note
The load is released only when its weight overcomes the
spring-force of the hook.
Rearview mirror : Check load released.
Note
In case of non-release of cargo, the pilot should slowly
increase the collective pitch to ascend, as much as neces-
sary to tension the cable, before operating the CARGO
HOOK pushbutton again.
Note
In the event of an electrical failure pull to full travel the
mechanical manual release control handle (EMER
CARGO RELEASE PULL) to drop cargo.

32

WARNING SYSTEM

CARGO HOOK ARM Cargo release system No corrective action is
armed. required. Take care to
avoid accidental
release of cargo.
CARGO HOOK Cargo release system Verify the status of
OPEN (normal or emer- hook release pushbut-
gency) in operation or ton or emergency
hook jammed in open release handle and,
position. through the rearview
mirror, the presence
of cargo. If the release
system is not in oper-
ation take mainte-
nance actions before
attaching the cargo.
EMERGENCY CARGO RELEASE

In case that an emergency situation requires to release the cargo,
operate the electrical release system through the pushbutton on cyclic
stick.
In case this fails to operate, pull to full travel the handle of the
mechanical release system.


Note
Forward flight performance will be degraded due to the
load aerodynamic drag. The level of degradation will be
dependent on load size and shape.
There are no significant load effects on hover performance.

32
OPERATION VS ALLOWABLE WIND

Satisfactory stability and control in rearward and sideward flight are
guaranteed for hover out of ground effect up to takeoff power, from
-1,000 ft to 9,000 ft Hd, in the wind/ground speed azimuth envelope of
Figure 4-1.
350° 10°
DIRECTION DIRECTION
OF WIND up to 100 KIAS OF WIND
60°
GS/WIND
VELOCITY
20 25 30 (kts)
DIRECTION DIRECTION
OF WIND OF WIND
225° 135°
190°
Figure 4-1. Wind/Ground Speed Azimuth Envelope

HOVER CEILING OGE

Two set of Hover Ceiling charts are presented for Take-Off Power
(TOP) and Maximum Continuous Power (MCP) rating, both heater off
and on.
The Hover Ceiling Out of Ground Effect (OGE) charts provide the
maximum gross weight for hovering OGE (al least 60 ft skid height
AGL) as a function of Hp and OAT, with NR at 102% and zero wind.
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 10 0 10
0 15 10 35
10 35 20 40
20 40 35 55
35 50 45 75
40 65 - -
45 70 - -
75 80 - -

32

TAKE-OFF POWER
▲
ROTOR SPEED:102%
ZERO WIND
HEATER OFF ▲

43 47 51 55 59 63 67
15
45
14
40
D
13
tH
0f
-3 -35
00
12
-2 0
15
0 35
11 -1
0

10 0 30
9 10
8 25
20
MA
7
XO
20
AT
6
30
LIM
5 15
IT
PERFORMANCE ABOVE
10
3
40
ARE CALCULATED
2
5
1
0 OAT - [°C] 0
-1
50
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

(Heater Off)

TAKE-OFF POWER
ROTOR SPEED:102% HEATER ON

ZERO WIND

43 47 51 55 59 63 67
15
45
14
HD
ft
13 40
0
00
15
12 -
-3 35 35
-2 0
11 0
-1

0
10 30
0
8 25
10
7
20
20
5 PERFORMANCE ABOVE 15
ARE CALCULATED
4
10
3
2
5
1
0 OAT - [°C] 0
-1
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

(Heater On)
32

ROTOR SPEED:102% HEATER OFF

ZERO WIND

43 47 51 55 59 63 67
15
45
D
tH
14
0f
OAT - [°C]
00
13 40
15
12 PERFORMANCE ABOVE
35
11 -3 -35 ARE CALCULATED
-2 0
0

10 -1
0 30
9
0
8 25
10
7
20
6
20
5 15
30
4
10
3
MAX O
40
2
AT LIM
5
1
IT
0 0
50
-1
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

Power (MCP) (Heater Off)

ROTOR SPEED:102% HEATER ON

ZERO WIND

43 47 51 55 59 63 67
15
45
14
13 40
12
35
11
-3 -35
0

-2
10 0
30
9 -1
0
8 25
7
0
20
6
10
5 15
4
20
10
3
2
5
1
0 OAT - [°C] 0
-1
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

Power (MCP) (Heater On)
32

Operations with external load attached to the cargo hook could result
in an excursion inside the area of Height-Velocity diagram. Therefore
in such a circumstance a safe landing following an engine failure could
not be guaranteed.

RATE OF CLIMB
(TOP) rating and for Maximum Continuous Power (MCP) rating, with
NR at 102%, both heater off and on.
15,000 ft Hp.
0 0 0 0
0 5 0 10
0 15 0 20
0 25 20 25
15 55 45 50
45 70 55 80
55 80 75 130
60 115 - -
65 110 - -
80 115 - -

32
RATE OF CLIMB
TAKE-OFF POWER
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
Vy: 60 KIAS
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
GROSS WEIGHT
14 3000 kg
( 6614 lb)
13 40
12
35
11
20
10
0
-1
-20
-30
-35

0
10 30
9
MA
8 25
XO
30
AT
7
LIM
20
IT
5 15
4
40
10
3
2
5
1
0 0
50
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

RATE OF CLIMB
TAKE-OFF POWER
HEATER ON
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
GROSS WEIGHT
14 3000 kg
( 6614 lb)
13 40
12
35
11
-1
-20
-30
-35
10
0
20

0
10 30
9
8 25
7
20
6
5 15
4
10
3
2
5
1
0 0
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

32
RATE OF CLIMB
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
Vy: 60 KIAS
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
14 GROSS WEIGHT
3000 kg
13 ( 6614 lb) 40
12
35
11
-1
-20
-30
-35
10

0
10 30
9
20
8 25
30
7
20
6
5 15
40
4
MAX OA
10
3
2
T LIMIT
5
1
0 0
50
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
Figure 4-8. Maximum Continuous Power (MCP) (Heater Off)

RATE OF CLIMB
HEATER ON
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
GROSS WEIGHT
14 3000 kg
( 6614 lb)
13 40
12
35
11
-1
-20
-30
-35
0

0
10 30
9
8 25
10
20
7
20
6
5 15
4
10
3
2
5
1
0 0
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

32
RATE OF CLIMB
TAKE-OFF POWER
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
Vy: 60 KIAS
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
GROSS WEIGHT
14 3150 kg
( 6944 lb)
13 40
12
35
11
10
-1
-2
-3
-305
20

0
0
10 30
9
8 25
30
7
20
MA
6
XO
AT
5 15
LIM
4
IT
40
10
3
2
5
1
0 0
50
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

RATE OF CLIMB
TAKE-OFF POWER
HEATER ON
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
GROSS WEIGHT
14 3150 kg
( 6944 lb)
13 40
12
35
11
-1
-2
-3
-305
0

0
0
10 30
10
9
20
8 25
7
20
6
5 15
4
10
3
2
5
1
0 0
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

32
RATE OF CLIMB
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
Vy: 60 KIAS
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
14 GROSS WEIGHT
3150 kg
( 6944 lb) 40
13
12
35
11
-1
-2
-3
-305
0

0
0
10 30
10
8 25
7
20
20
6
30
5 15
4
10
3
MAX OA
40
2
5
T LIMIT
0 0
50
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
Figure 4-12. Maximum Continuous Power (MCP) (Heater Off)

RATE OF CLIMB
HEATER ON
RATE OF CLIMB [m/s]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
15
45
GROSS WEIGHT
14 3150 kg
( 6944 lb)
13 40
12
35
11
-1
-2
-3
-305

0
0
10 30
9
0
8 25
10
7
20
6
20
5 15
4
10
3
2
5
1
0 0
-1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
Figure 4-13. Maximum Continuous Power (MCP) - (Heater On)

32
DATUM LINE LOCATION

Figure 6-1 presents the cargo hook station data to aid in weight and
balance computations.
STA 0 STA 3380
CARGO HOOK
STA 3330
ICN-19-A-155006-G-A0126-61001-A-01-1
Figure 6-1. Cargo Hook Station Diagram

Page 30 of 32 11-06-07
SAS VG GYRO
115 VAC
ADI A B 2
1 1 1 1
CARGO
1 1 COMP
1
HOOK
7«1«2 7«1«2
CARGO SAFETY PWR
HOOK HOOK
B B C
4
Hook Load
x10
CAL
DAMP
0 LB KG
Reset
UN-ZERO ZERO
D
C
1. CARGO HOOK circuit breaker

2. Cargo release toggle switch D
3. Cargo release handle
4. Hook load indicator. 3
ICN-19-A-155006-G-A0126-71001-A-01-1
Figure 7-1. Cargo Hook Controls and Indicators

32

Optional Equipment Supplements Dual Cargo Hook

dated 11 June 2007

DUAL CARGO HOOK

Note
This Supplement must be used in conjunction with Supple-
ment 6.
The Dual Cargo Hook consists of Cargo Hook P/N 109-0810-31 (see
Supplement 6), and Safety Hook P/N 109-0811-75.
The Safety Hook P/N 109-0811-75 consists of a hook, attached to the
support frame of the cargo hook, the safety cable
P/N 109-0811-86-159 to connect the suspended load to the cargo and
to the safety hook, an independent (from the cargo hook) manual
(emergency) release system and attaching hardware. The electrical
release system is common to both hooks.
The safety hook can not be installed as a stand alone device (i.e.
without the cargo hook). When both are installed the load must be
suspended to the cargo hook while the second hook, through the
safety cable, is only for safety in case the first one should fail.
Note
The swiveling link is not supplied with the cargo hook;
however, it is recommended to use it between the suspen-
sion cable and the cargo

Dual Cargo Hook Optional Equipment Supplements

Optional EquipmentSupplements Dual Cargo Hook
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
dated 11 June 2007



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 0
A-1 and A-2 0
B-1 and B-2 0
i and iv 0
1 and 16 of 22 0
17 and 22 of 22 0
11-06-07 B-1
B-2 11-06-07
DUAL CARGO HOOK

Page
DUAL CARGO HOOK OPERATION ........................................1 of 28

WEIGHT LIMITATIONS.............................................................2 of 28
CARGO HOOK LIMITATIONS ..................................................2 of 28
PRE-FLIGHT CHECK................................................................7 of 28
SYSTEM CHECK ....................................................................10 of 28
TAKE-OFF ...............................................................................10 of 28
IN FLIGHT ............................................................................... 11 of 28
APPROACH AND LANDING .................................................. 11 of 28
CARGO RELEASE ............................................................. 11 of 28
11-06-07 Page i
Page


EMERGENCY CARGO RELEASE..........................................14 of 28
FAILURE OF CARGO HOOK .................................................15 of 28
IMPOSSIBILITY TO RELEASE THE CARGO .................... 15 of 28
UNFORESEEN RELEASE OF CARGO IN FLIGHT ........... 15 of 28
FAILURE OF SAFETY HOOK.................................................16 of 28
IMPOSSIBILITY TO RELEASE THE CARGO .................... 16 of 28
UNFORESEEN OPENING OF SAFETY HOOK
IN FLIGHT........................................................................... 16 of 28
DATUM LINE LOCATIONS.....................................................18 of 28
Page ii 11-06-07
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
1-1. Longitudinal CG Limits (metric units)............................. 3 of 28

1-3. Lateral CG Limits (metric units) ..................................... 5 of 28
1-4. Lateral CG Limits (imperial units) .................................. 6 of 28
2-1. Placards and Correct Installation of the Cable
P/N 109-0811-86-159 .................................................. 13 of 28
6-1. Cargo Hook and Safety Hook Stations Diagram ......... 18 of 28
7-1. External Load Rigging ................................................. 19 of 28
7-2. Dual Cargo Hook Controls and Indicators ................... 20 of 28
11-06-07 Page iii

Page iv 11-06-07
DUAL CARGO HOOK OPERATION

The dual cargo hook is approved as ”Class B rotorcraft-load
combination”. Class B rotorcraft-load combination means ”a load
combination in which the external load is jettisonable and is lifted free
of land or water during the rotorcraft operation”.
The operation must be authorized by the competent authority in
accordance with the applicable National Operating Regulation.
The load must be secured to the cargo hook through the safety cable
and connected to the safety hook. The function of the safety hook is to
serve as a back-up in the event of failure of the cargo hook.
CAUTION
Simultaneous operation with individual loads, attached

separately to the two hooks, is prohibited.
Note
When the safety hook is utilized it is necessary the use of
cable P/N 109-0811-86-159 to connect the safety hook
with the cargo hook.
22

Dual Cargo Hook Optional EquipmentSupplements
WEIGHT LIMITATIONS
Maximum Gross Weight with external
load attached to cargo hook : 2850 kg (6283 lb)
CARGO HOOK LIMITATIONS

Cargo hook loading limit : 500 kg (1102 lb)
CAUTION
When the safety hook is used the load must be attached to

cargo hook which is provided with a load indicator, and
however must not exceed 500 Kg (1102 lb).
WARNING
Flight with unballasted sling as an external load is prohib-
ited.

After cargo hook installation the new empty weight and CG location
must be determined.
Refer to Figures 1-1 and 1-2 for Longitudinal CG limits and Figures 1-3
and 1-4 for Lateral CG limits when flying with external load attached to
cargo hook.
Page 2 of 22 11-06-07
3200
3000
3342 3580
2850 2850
2800
2600
2400
2200
2043
2000
1800 1812
Minimum
1725 flying
3457 weight
1600 3528
1400
3250 3350 3450 3550 3650 3750
Note
Longitudinal Station “0” is 1785 mm forward of the front jack point.
Figure 1-1. Longitudinal CG Limits (metric units) 22

7000
131.6 140.9
6500
6283 6283
6000
5500
5000
4500 4504
4000 3995
Minimum
3803 flying
weight
136.1
3500
138.9
3000
128 130 132 134 136 138 140 142 144 146
Note
Longitudinal Station “0” is 70.2 in forward of the front jack point.
Figure 1-2. Longitudinal CG Limits (imperial units)

3200
3000 -53 53
2850
2800
2600
2450 2450
2400
2200
2000
1800
Minimum
1725 1725 flying
weight
1600
-60 60
1400
-100 -80 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
Note
Lateral Station “0” is 450 mm inboard from each main jack point and coin-
Figure 1-3. Lateral CG Limits (metric units) 22

7000
-2.1 2.1
6500
6283
6000
5500
5401 5401
5000
4500
4000
Minimum
3803 3803 flying
weight
3500
-2.4 2.4
3000
-4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4
Note
Lateral Station “0” is 17.7 in inboard from each main jack point and coin-
Figure 1-4. Lateral CG Limits (imperial units)

PRE-FLIGHT CHECK
Note
The following pre-flight checks complete those scheduled
for cargo hook in Supplement 6.
Safety cable and harnesses : Condition and security. Check

for presence and condition of
placards on the safety cable.
(see Figure 2-1).
AREA N°2 (Fuselage - rh side)
Cargo and safety hooks : Condition and security.

For the following checks connect the d.c. supply.
Note
Ground personnel shall assist the pilot during the cargo
hook checks.
EDU1 : CARGO HOOK ARM and

message out, check.
SFTY HOOK ARM and SFTY
HOOK OPEN caution mes-
sages out, check.
22


on pilot cyclic stick : Lift the guard to arm the release
system.
EDU1 : CARGO HOOK ARM and SFTY

HOOK ARM caution messages
displayed.

on pilot cyclic stick : Push. Verify the opening of both
cargo hooks and that CARGO
HOOK OPEN and SFTY HOOK
OPEN caution messages illumi-
nate on EDU1. Release the
switch and verify that both
cargo hooks return to closed
position and that CARGO
HOOK OPEN and SFTY HOOK
OPEN caution messages on
EDU1 extinguish.
Note
CARGO HOOK pushbutton operation longer than 20 sec-
onds may cause damage to the solenoid of the release
system.
Note
Both hooks are provided with a spring which keeps them
permanently in closed position even when the opening
system releases the lock-device.
A force of approximately 5 kg must be applied to each
hook to overcome the spring force and to verify the hook
opening.

on pilot cyclic stick : Lower the guard to protect the
release pushbutton.


out.
Repeat hooks checks by using CARGO HOOK pushbutton on copilot

cyclic stick (if installed).
CARGO HOOK emergency handle

(EMER CARGO RELEASE PULL) : Pull to full travel.
Verify opening of the cargo
hook and that CARGO HOOK
played on EDU1. Release the
handle and verify that the cargo
hook returns to closed position,
that CARGO HOOK OPEN cau-
tion message on EDU1 extin-
guishes and that the handle
returns to the full down position.
SAFETY HOOK emergency handle

(EMER CARGO RELEASE PULL) : Pull to full travel.
Verify opening of the safety
hook and that SFTY HOOK
played on EDU1. Release the
handle and verify that the safety
hook returns to closed position,
that SFTY HOOK OPEN cau-
tion message on EDU1 extin-
guishes and that the handle
returns to the full down position.
(Every flight)
Cargo and safety hooks : Condition and security.
22

SYSTEM CHECK
Hook load indicator
(primary hook only) : Set to zero.
Note
Adjust the hook load indicator after a 5 minutes warm up
with no load on the hook.
TAKE-OFF
CAUTION
The cargo must be secured to cargo hook through the

cargo hook cable, while the safety hook must be used to
attach the safety hook cable. (refer to Figure 2-1).
WARNING
Discharge helicopter static electricity, before attaching
cargo, by touching the airframe with a ground wire or if a
metal sling is used, the hook-up ring can be struck against
the cargo hook. If contact has been lost after initial ground-
ing of the helicopter, it should be electrically regrounded
and, if possible, contact maintained until hook-up is com-
pleted.
Note
Attachment of cargo sling to the hook can be observed by
After cargo attachment slowly increase the collective pitch and ascend
vertically to take-up the slack of cargo sling.
Lift vertically cargo from surface and read the hook load indicator to
verify the cargo weight to be within the hook loading limitations.
Hover to check for satisfactory controllability and power within limits.

IN FLIGHT
Enter into slow forward speed and verify that uncontrollable or
hazardous flight conditions do not exist. Allow adequate sling load
clearance over obstacles. Increase forward speed and select an
operational airspeed at which no hazardous oscillation is encountered.
Note
Check periodically the attachment of cargo to the hooks by
CARGO RELEASE

cyclic stick : Lift the guard to arm the release
system.

displayed.
Perform the approach to the cargo release area with care and at low
speed.
Stabilize hover above release point, then slowly descend until cargo
lays down on ground.

on cyclic stick : Push to release cargo.
Verify the CARGO HOOK
OPEN and SFTY HOOK OPEN
caution messages displayed on
EDU1.
Note
The load is released only when its weight overcomes the
spring force of the hooks.
22

Rearview mirror : Check load released.
Note
In case of non-release of cargo, the pilot should slowly
increase the collective pitch to ascend, as much as neces-
sary to tension the cable, before operating the CARGO
HOOK pushbutton again.
Note
In the event of an electrical failure of one or both cargo
hooks, pull to full travel the mechanical manual release
control handle EMER CARGO RELEASE PULL of safety
hook then the mechanical manual release control handle
EMER CARGO RELEASE PULL of the cargo hook to
release cargo.

A B
SAFETY HOOK
A CABLE
CARGO HOOK CABLE

B MAX LOAD 500 KG
ICN-19-A-155007-G-A0126-11001-A-01-1
Figure 2-1. Placards and Correct Installation of the Cable

P/N 109-0811-86-159 22


WARNING SYSTEM
SFTY HOOK Safety hook release No corrective action is

ARM system armed. required.
Verify the status of

hook release pushbut-
ton or safety hook
emergency release
Safety hook release
handle and, through
system (normal or
the rearview mirror, the
SFTY HOOK emergency) in opera-
correct attaching of the
OPEN tion or safety hook
safety hook cable. If
jammed in open posi-
the release system is
tion.
not in operation take
maintenance actions
before attaching the
cargo.
EMERGENCY CARGO RELEASE

In case that an emergency situation requires to release the cargo,
operate the electrical release system through the pushbutton on cyclic
stick. In case this fails to operate, pull to full travel the mechanical
manual release control handle EMER CARGO RELEASE PULL of
safety hook then the mechanical manual release control handle
EMER CARGO RELEASE PULL of cargo hook to release load.

FAILURE OF CARGO HOOK

A failure of cargo hook may result in the impossibility to release the
cargo or, on the contrary, in an unforeseen release of cargo in flight.
IMPOSSIBILITY TO RELEASE THE CARGO
In case of unsuccessful release of cargo through the electrical release

system proceed as per ”EMERGENCY CARGO RELEASE”. If also
the mechanical manual release fails, approach to a suitable landing
area with care and at low speed stabilize the helicopter in hovering.
Slowly descend until cargo lays down on ground, move backward and
sideway to keep the cable in sight while laying it down, then land.
UNFORESEEN RELEASE OF CARGO IN FLIGHT
In case of loss of the load from cargo hook (load transfer to safety
hook):
EDU1 : CARGO HOOK OPEN caution

message displayed temporarily.
Hook load indicator : Check for zero indication.
Rearview mirror : Check for load suspended to

safety hook.
Lay down the cargo as soon as possible.
22

FAILURE OF SAFETY HOOK

A failure of safety hook may result in the impossibility to release the
cargo or in an unforeseen opening of safety hook in flight.
IMPOSSIBILITY TO RELEASE THE CARGO
In case of unsuccessful release of cargo through the electrical release

system proceed as per ”EMERGENCY CARGO RELEASE”. If also
the mechanical manual release fails, approach to a suitable landing
area with care and at low speed and stabilize the helicopter in
hovering. Slowly descend until cargo lays down on ground, move
backward and sideway to keep the cable in sight while laying it down,
then land.
UNFORESEEN OPENING OF SAFETY HOOK IN FLIGHT
In case of opening of safety hook with consequent detachment of

safety cable:
EDU1 : SFTY HOOK OPEN caution

message displayed temporarily.
HOOK load indicator : Check for positive load

indication.
Rearview mirror : Check for load suspended to

cargo hook.
Lay down the cargo as soon as possible.


Refer to basic Rotorcraft Flight Manual.
22

DATUM LINE LOCATIONS

Figure 6-1 presents the cargo hook and safety hook stations data to
aid in weight and balance computations.
STA 0 STA 3380
SAFETY HOOK CARGO HOOK

P/N 109-0811-75 P/N 109-0810-31
STA 3003 STA 3330
ICN-19-A-155007-G-A0126-61001-A-01-1
Figure 6-1. Cargo Hook and Safety Hook Stations Diagram

Page 18 of 22 11-06-07
A
SAFETY CABLE
SAFETY HOOK CARGO HOOK
529 mm
693 mm
ICN-19-A-155007-G-A0126-71001-A-01-1
Figure 7-1. External Load Rigging 22
11-06-07 Page 19 of 22
SAS VG GYRO
115 VAC
ADI A B 3
1 1 1 1
CARGO
1 1 COMP
1
HOOK
7«1«
2 7
«1«
2
CARGO SAFETY PWR

HOOK HOOK
B B C
6
Hook Load
x10
CAL
DAMP
0 LB KG
Reset
UN-ZERO ZERO
D C
1.
2.
CARGO HOOK circuit breaker
SAFETY HOOK circuit breaker
D 4
3. Cargo release toggle switch

4. Cargo hook release handle
5. Safety hook release handle D
FW
6. Hook load indicator
ICN-19-A-155007-G-A0126-71002-A-01-1
Figure 7-2. Dual Cargo Hook Controls and Indicators

Page 20 of 22 11-06-07
22
11-06-07 Page 21 of 22
Page 22 of 22 11-06-07
Optional Equipment Supplements Dual Controls

dated 11 June 2007

DUAL CONTROLS
The dual controls P/N 109-0810-01 consist mainly of a cyclic stick, a

collective lever and a set of pedals. Installation of the dual controls
converts the forward LH crew seat into a station for an additional pilot.
The additional pilot controls are similar to those of the pilot controls
except for the collective lever switch box that is equipped with the NR
TRIM selector switch only. The engine throttle on the collective lever is
not provided with the MAN/NOR selector switch and the IDLE stop
disengagement device.

Dual Controls Optional Equipment Supplements

Optional EquipmentSupplements Dual Controls
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
dated 11 June 2007



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 0
A-1 and A-2 0
B-1 and B-2 0
i and ii 0
1 thru 6 of 6 0
11-06-07 B-1
B-2 11-06-07
DUAL CONTROLS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
FLIGHT CREW ............................................................................1 of 6

CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITATIONS ........................................1 of 6

ENGINE PRE-START CHECK ....................................................2 of 6
ENGINE START ..........................................................................2 of 6
DRY MOTORING RUN ................................................................3 of 6
IN FLIGHT ...................................................................................3 of 6
APPROACH AND LANDING ......................................................3 of 6
SHUTDOWN................................................................................3 of 6
11-06-07 Page i
Page

PROCEDURES
ENGINE FAILURES.....................................................................4 of 6
FAILURE OF ENGINE ............................................................ 4 of 6
ENGINE RESTART IN FLIGHT .............................................. 4 of 6
MALFUNCTION OF THE FUEL CONTROL SYSTEM ........... 4 of 6
ENGINE RESTART IN FLIGHT WITH MANUAL
OVERRIDE SYSTEM (MAN) .................................................. 4 of 6
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL (EEC)
MALFUNCTIONS.................................................................... 5 of 6
ENGINE HOT START ............................................................. 5 of 6
ENGINE DROOP COMPENSATION BINDING ...................... 5 of 6
TAIL ROTOR FAILURES.............................................................5 of 6
FIRE .............................................................................................6 of 6
ENGINE FIRE ON GROUND.................................................. 6 of 6
ENGINE FIRE DURING FLIGHT ............................................ 6 of 6
Page ii 11-06-07
FLIGHT CREW
The left crew seat may be used for an additional pilot.

After dual controls installation the new empty weight and CG location
must be determined.

Dual Controls Optional EquipmentSupplements
PRE-FLIGHT CHECKS
AREA N° 7 (Cabin interior)
Copilot flight controls : Condition and security.

Note
The copilot engine throttle on collective lever is not pro-
vided with the MAN/NOR selector switch and the IDLE
stop disengagement device.
Note
The copilot collective switch box is not provided with the
EEC/MEC switch.
ENGINE START
Note
START pushbutton.
Note
EEC/MEC switch.

DRY MONITORING RUN

Note
START pushbutton.
IN FLIGHT
Note
landing lights switch.

Note
SHUTDOWN
Note
The copilot engine throttle is not provided with the IDLE
Note


ENGINE FAILURES
FAILURES OF ENGINE
Note
Note
START pushbutton.
MALFUNCTION OF THE FUEL CONTROL SYSTEM
Note
vided with the MAN/NOR selector switch.
ENGINE RESTART IN FLIGHT WITH MANUAL OVVERRIDE

SYSTEM (MAN)
Note
vided with the MAN/NOR selector switch and the IDLE
Note
START pushbutton.
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL (EEC) MALFUNCTIONS
Note
EEC/MEC switch.
ENGINE HOT START
Note
START pushbutton.
ENGINE DROOP COMPENSATION BINDING
Note
EEC/MEC switch.
TAIL ROTOR FAILURES
Complete loss of tail rotor control in cruise
Note

FIRE
ENGINE FIRE ON GROUND
Note
Note
No change.

Optional Equipment Supplements Supplementary
Document No. 109G0040A017 Fuel Tanks

dated 11 June 2007

SUPPLEMENTARY FUEL TANKS
The supplementary fuel tanks installation P/N 109-0811-49 provides

an additional 265 liters capacity. It consists of two tank cells (RH cell of
105 liters and LH cell of 160 liters) installed behind the passenger
seat. However the installation can be arranged as follows:
— both LH and RH tank cells installed, or
— only RH tank cell installed.
The fuel transfer from the supplementary fuel tank cells to the main
fuel tank cells is by gravity. The two tank cells are separated by
panels; each cell is provided with a fuel level probe.

Supplementary Optional Equipment Supplements
Fuel Tanks Document No. 109G0040A017

Optional EquipmentSupplements Supplementary
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
dated 11 June 2007



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 0
A-1 and A-2 0
B-1 and B-2 0
i and iv 0
1 and 2 of 10 0
3 and 10 of 10 0
11-06-07 B-1
B-2 11-06-07
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITATIONS ......................................1 of 10
ENGINE START ................................................................... 1 of 10

PROCEDURES 2 of 10
11-06-07 Page i
Page
WEIGHTS — ARMS AND MOMENTS ......................................3 of 10

LONGITUDINAL MOMENTS ................................................ 3 of 10
LATERAL MOMENTS........................................................... 6 of 10
SECTION 8 - HANDLING AND SERVICING
SERVICING ...............................................................................9 of 10
SUPPLEMENTARY FUEL TANKS ....................................... 9 of 10
Page ii 11-06-07
LIST OF TABLES
Page
LONGITUDINAL MOMENTS
6-1. Usable fuel — Main fuel tanks plus RH and LH
supplementary tanks (for JP5 / JET A / JET A-1) .......... 3 of 10
6-2. Usable fuel — Main fuel tanks plus RH
supplementary tank only (for JP5 / JET A / JET A-1) .... 5 of 10
LATERAL MOMENTS
6-3. Usable fuel — Main fuel tanks plus RH and LH
supplementary tanks (for JP5 / JET A / JET A-1) .......... 6 of 10
6-4. Usable fuel — Main fuel tanks plus RH
supplementary tank only (for JP5 / JET A / JET A-1 ..... 8 of 10
8-1. Supplementary fuel tanks servicing ............................... 9 of 10
11-06-07 Page iii

Page iv 11-06-07

After supplementary fuel tank installation, the new empty weight and
CG location must be determined.
Note
In some loading conditions the longitudinal limitations (aft
limit) can be exceeded. Refer to Section 6 for loading
instructions.
ENGINE START
EDU2 : check fuel quantity indication.
CAUTION
When only RH tank cell is installed and fuel system is fully

serviced, a difference of fuel quantity indication, equivalent
to the fuel contained into the RH tank cell, is normal. Such
difference decreases with the consumption up to zero
when about 110 kg of fuel is reached in each main tank.

Supplementary Optional EquipmentSupplements

No change.
No change.

10
WEIGHTS — ARMS AND MOMENTS
Table 6-1. Usable fuel — Main fuel tanks plus RH and LH

supplementary tanks (for JP5 / JET A / JET A-1)
CAPACITY
WEIGHT ARM MOMENT
(l)
(kg) (mm) (kgmm)
(0.8 kg/l)
20.0 25.0 3324 66480
40.0 50.0 3327 133080
60.0 75.0 3329 199740
80.0 100.0 3331 266480
100.0 125.0 3399 339900
120.0 150.0 3461 415320
140.0 175.0 3505 490700
160.0 200.0 3539 566240
180.0 225.0 3543 637740
200.0 250.0 3551 710200
220.0 275.0 3571 785620
240.0 300.0 3614 867360
260.0 325.0 3641 946660
280.0 350.0 3668 1027040
300.0 375.0 3691 1107300
320.0 400.0 3711 1187520
340.0 425.0 3729 1267860
360.0 450.0 3746 1348560
380.0 475.0 3760 1428800
400.0 500.0 3773 1509200
420.0 525.0 3785 1589700
440.0 550.0 3796 1670240
11-06-07 Page 3 of 10

supplementary tanks (for JP5 / JET A / JET A-1) (Cont.d)
CAPACITY
WEIGHT ARM MOMENT
(l)
(kg) (mm) (kgmm)
(0.8 kg/l)
460.0 575.0 3806 1750760
480.0 600.0 3815 1831200
500.0 625.0 3823 1911500
520.0 650.0 3831 1992120
540.0 675.0 3838 2072520
560.0 700.0 3845 2153200
580.0 725.0 3851 2233580
600.0 750.0 3857 2314200
620.0 775.0 3863 2395060
640.0 800.0 3868 2475520
660.0 825.0 3873 2556180
680.0 850.0 3883 2640440
688.0 860.0 3887 2674256
Page 4 of 10 11-06-07
10
Table 6-2. Usable fuel — Main fuel tanks plus RH supplementary

tank only (for JP5 / JET A / JET A-1)
CAPACITY
WEIGHT ARM MOMENT
(l)
(kg) (mm) (kgmm)
(0.8 kg/l)
20.0 25.0 3324 66480
40.0 50.0 3327 133080
60.0 75.0 3329 199740
80.0 100.0 3331 266480
100.0 125.0 3399 339900
120.0 150.0 3461 415320
140.0 175.0 3505 490700
160.0 200.0 3539 566240
180.0 225.0 3543 637740
200.0 250.0 3551 710200
220.0 275.0 3571 785620
240.0 300.0 3614 867360
260.0 325.0 3645 947700
280.0 350.0 3671 1027880
300.0 375.0 3695 1108500
320.0 400.0 3715 1188800
340.0 425.0 3733 1269220
360.0 450.0 3750 1350000
380.0 475.0 3774 1434120
400.0 500.0 3778 1511200
420.0 525.0 3796 1594320
440.0 550.0 3816 1679040
460.0 575.0 3834 1763640
480.0 600.0 3851 1848480
500.0 625.0 3866 1933000
520.0 650.0 3880 2017600
540.0 675.0 3893 2102220
560.0 700.0 3906 2187360
11-06-07 Page 5 of 10
LATERAL MOMENTS

supplementary tanks (for JP5 / JET A / JET A-1)
Capacity
Weight BL Moment
l
(kg) (mm) (kgmm)
(0.8 kg/l)
20.0 25.0 -330 -6600
40.0 50.0 -330 -13200
60.0 75.00 -330 -19800
80.0 100.0 -330 -26400
100.0 125.0 -330 -33000
120.0 150.0 -330 -39600
140.0 175.0 -236 -33040
160.0 200.0 -165 -26400
180.0 225.0 -110 -19800
200.0 250.0 -66 -13200
220.0 275.0 -30 -6600
240.0 300.0 0 0
260.0 325.0 0 0
280.0 350.0 0 0
300.0 375.0 0 0
320.0 400.0 0 0
340.0 425.0 0 0
360.0 450.0 0 0
380.0 475.0 0 0
400.0 500.0 0 0
420.0 525.0 0 0
440.0 550.0 0 0
460.0 575.0 0 0
480.0 600.0 0 0
500.0 625.0 0 0
520.0 650.0 0 0
540.0 675.0 0 0
560.0 700.0 0 0
580.0 725.0 0 0
600.0 750.0 0 0
Page 6 of 10 11-06-07
10

supplementary tanks (for JP5 / JET A / JET A-1) (Cont.d)
Capacity
Weight BL Moment
l
(kg) (mm) (kgmm)
(0.8 kg/l)
620.0 775.0 0 0
640.0 800.0 0 0
660.0 825.0 0 0
680.0 850.0 0 0
688.0 860.0 0 0
11-06-07 Page 7 of 10
Table 6-4. Usable fuel — Main fuel tanks plus RH supplementary

tank only (for JP5 / JET A / JET A-1)
Capacity
Weight Arm Moment
l
(kg) (mm) (kgmm)
(0.8 kg/l)
20.0 25.0 -330 -6600
40.0 50.0 -330 -13200
60.0 75.0 -330 -19800
80.0 100.0 -330 -26400
100.0 125.0 -330 -33000
120.0 150.0 -330 -39600
140.0 175.0 -236 -33040
160.0 200.0 -165 -26400
180.0 225.0 -110 -19800
200.0 250.0 -66 -13200
220.0 275.0 -30 -6600
240.0 300.0 0 0
260.0 325.0 15 3900
280.0 350.0 28 7840
300.0 375.0 40 12000
320.0 400.0 49 15680
340.0 425.0 58 19720
360.0 450.0 66 23760
380.0 475.0 73 27740
400.0 500.0 79 31600
420.0 525.0 79 33180
440.0 550.0 75 33000
460.0 575.0 72 33120
480.0 600.0 69 33120
500.0 625.0 66 33000
520.0 650.0 64 33280
540.0 675.0 61 32940
560.0 700.0 59 33040
Page 8 of 10 11-06-07
10
SECTION 8 - HANDLING
AND SERVICING
SERVICING
Table 8-1. Supplementary fuel tanks servicing
RH FUEL CELL LH FUEL CELL

CAPACITY 105 LITERS 160 LITERS
USABLE 105 LITERS 160 LITERS
11-06-07 Page 9 of 10
Page 10 of 10 11-06-07
10
Optional Equipment Supplements Rotor Brake

dated 11 June 2007

ROTOR BRAKE
The Rotor Brake P/N 109-0811-87 consists of a cockpit lever

commanded by the pilot that, through a mechanical cable, moves a
hydraulic pump. This pump delivers hydraulic pressure through a
flexible hose to a calliper acting on a disk secured to a dedicated pad
on the main gear box.
The rotor brake system permits a rapid deceleration of the rotor after
the engine shutdown.
The rotor brake operation is indicated by the activation of the RTR
BRK ON warning message on EDU1 while any malfunction of the
warning system is indicated by the activation of the ROTOR BRK
caution message on EDU1.

REVISION 1: 24 FEBRUARY 2010
Rotor Brake Optional Equipment Supplements

Optional EquipmentSupplements Rotor Brake
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
dated 11 June 2007
and 1 of 6. N° 10033985



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 1
A-1 1
A-2 0
B-1 1
B-2 0
i and iv 0
1 of 6 1
2 thru 6 of 6 0
11-06-07 B-1
B-2 11-06-07
ROTOR BRAKE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page

ROTOR BRAKE LIMITATIONS ..................................................1 of 6
PLACARDS .................................................................................1 of 6

STARTING PROCEDURE...........................................................3 of 6
ENGINE START ..................................................................... 3 of 6
SHUTDOWN ................................................................................3 of 6
POST FLIGHT CHECK ...............................................................3 of 6
11-06-07 Page i
Page

PROCEDURES
WARNING MESSAGE (RED) ................................................. 4 of 6

CAUTION MESSAGE (YELLOW)........................................... 5 of 6
Page ii 11-06-07
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
1-1. Placard............................................................................. 1 of 6
11-06-07 Page iii

Page iv 11-06-07

After rotor brake installation the new empty weight and C.G. location
must be determined .
ROTOR BRAKE LIMITATIONS

The rotor brake application is limited to ground operations and shall be
applied after engine shutdown and rotor RPM (NR) below 40%.
Engine starting with rotor brake on is prohibited.
PLACARDS
A DO NOT APPLY ROTOR

BRAKE ABOVE 40%
ROTOR RPM
ICN-19-A-155010-G-A0126-11001-B-01-1
Figure 1-1. Placard

Rev. 1
Rotor Brake Optional EquipmentSupplements
PRE-FLIGHT CHECKS
AREA N° 6 (Fuselage - LH side)
Rotor brake pump, flexible hose,

calliper : Check for condition and leaks.
Transmission oil : Correct level. Door secured.
Note
If rotor brake has been used, the oil level indication could
be lower than the actual level.
When the oil level is below the minimum level mark, the
determination of the correct amount of oil, required to top
up the transmission, can be made only after a shutdown
without operating the rotor brake.
(Every flight)
Transmission oil : Correct level. Door secured.
Note
If rotor brake has been used, the oil level indication could
be lower than the actual level.
When the oil level is below the minimum level mark, the
determination of the correct amount of oil, required to top
up the transmission, can be made only after a shutdown
without operating the rotor brake.
6

Rotor brake lever : Move from OFF to ON. Check
for freedom of movement.
EDU 1 : Verify that the RTR BRK ON
warning message activates.
Rotor brake lever : Select OFF. Check locked and
warning message on EDU1
extinguished.
Note
The ROTOR BRK caution message can be temporarily
displayed on EDU1 during the rotor brake lever travel.
STARTING PROCEDURE
ENGINE START
CAUTION
The rotor brake must be disengaged before starting.
SHUTDOWN
Rotor brake lever : ON and locked below 40% rotor
RPM. RTR BRK ON warning
message displayed on EDU 1.
CAUTION
In case of use of rotor brake outside the limitations any fur-

ther use of the system is prohibited until maintenance
checks have been carried out.
POST FLIGHT CHECK

Rotor brake lever : OFF and locked.


WARNING MESSAGE (RED)
RTR BRK ON Rotor brake in operation Check rotor brake

lever position.
In flight:
- if the lever is in the
OFF position land
immediately.
- if the lever is not in
the OFF position,
set it to OFF and
land immediately.
On ground:
- if the lever is in the
OFF position, shut
down the engine
immediately.
- if the lever is not in
the OFF position,
set it to OFF and
shut down the
engine immediately.
6
CAUTION MESSAGE (YELLOW)
ROTOR BRK Rotor brake warning Proceed with flight with-

system degraded. out operating the rotor
brake and correct mal-
function before next
flight.
Refer to Maintenance
Manual for proper
action.
No change.

6
Optional Equipment Supplements Emergency Medical
Document No. 109G0040A017 Transportation

dated 11 June 2007

E.M.T.
EMERGENCY MEDICAL
TRANSPORTATION
The Emergency Medical Transportation P/N 109-0812-34 provides the

possibility to convert the Utility Interior Arrangement P/N 109-0812-30-
101 configured helicopters into an E.M.T. interior. This interior,
obtained by removing the seats cushions and by folding the seat back
panel to provide the supporting structure at which a standard litter can
be fitted, allows the transportation, in an emergency situation, of an
injured person.
The litter is positioned on the left hand side of passengers
compartment. The E.M.T. interior provides also seats for up to four (4)
passengers into the passengers compartment.

Emergency Medical Optional Equipment Supplements
Transportation Document No. 109G0040A017

Optional EquipmentSupplements Emergency Medical
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
dated 11 June 2007



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 0
A-1 and A-2 0
B-1 and B-2 0
i and iv 0
1 thru 3 of 6 0
4 thru 6 of 6 0
11-06-07 B-1
B-2 11-06-07
E.M.T.
EMERGENCY MEDICAL
TRANSPORTATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
TYPE OF OPERATION ...............................................................1 of 6

REQUIRED EQUIPMENT............................................................1 of 6
FLIGHT CREW ............................................................................1 of 6
FLIGHT WITH PASSENGER CABIN DOORS OPEN OR
REMOVED.............................................................................. 1 of 6

PILOT PRE-FLIGHT CHECK.................................................. 2 of 6
LITTER OPERATIONS................................................................2 of 6
LITTER LOADING .................................................................. 2 of 6
LITTER UNLOADING ............................................................. 3 of 6
11-06-07 Page i
Page

PROCEDURES
EVACUATION THROUGH EMERGENCY EXITS.......................3 of 6
LITTER ARM........................................................................... 4 of 6
FORWARD SEATS ARM........................................................ 4 of 6
AFT SEATS ARM.................................................................... 4 of 6
Page ii 11-06-07
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
7-1. E.M.T. Interior Arrangement ............................................ 5 of 6
11-06-07 Page iii

Page iv 11-06-07
TYPE OF OPERATION
The helicopter in EMT configuration permits rescue and transportation
of injured people.
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT
The E.M.T. requires the installation of the Utility Interior Arrangement
P/N 109-0812-30-101.
FLIGHT CREW
The minimum flight crew consists of one pilot and one attendant; both
of whom shall be trained in and capable of assisting in litter patient
emergency evacuation procedures.
NUMBER OF SEATS
Seven (7) - including the pilot and the litter patient.
FLIGHT WITH PASSENGER CABIN DOORS OPEN OR REMOVED
Operation with passenger cabin doors open or removed is prohibited

when patient is on board.

After E.M.T. interior installation the new empty weight and CG location
must be determined.

Emergency Medical Optional EquipmentSupplements
PRE-FLIGHT CHECKS
E.M.T. interior : Check for condition.
Cabin seats and litter : Check for condition and straps

fastened if unoccupied.
PILOT PRE-FLIGHT CHECK
(Every flight)
E.M.T. interior : Check for condition.
Cabin seats and litter : Check for condition and straps

LITTER OPERATIONS
LITTER LOADING
— secure patient to the litter using the three straps provided;

— unlock and lower the back of the central aft seat;
— load the litter from the left door;
— secure litter to the inboard locks;
— raise the back of the central aft seat and lock.

LITTER UNLOADING
— unlock and lower the back of the central aft seat;

— unlock the litter from the locks;
— unload the litter from the left door.

EVACUATION THROUGH EMERGENCY EXITS

Unstrap the patient and evacuate either through the LH or RH
emergency exits.
No change.

LITTER ARM
Longitudinal : 3050 mm (120 inches) from

STA 0.
Lateral (left) : 410 mm (16.1 inches) from the

helicopter plane of symmetry.
FORWARD SEATS ARM
Longitudinal : 2455 mm (96.6 inches) from

STA 0.
Lateral, inboard seat : BL 0.
Lateral, outboard seat : 410 mm (16.1 inches) from the

AFT SEATS ARM

STA 0.
Lateral, outboard seat : 410 mm (16.1 inches) from the

Page 4 of 6 11-06-07
SEATS SEATS
LITTER
ICN-19-A-155011-G-A0126-71001-A-01-1
Figure 7-1. E.M.T. Interior Arrangement

11-06-07 Page 5 of 6 6
Page 6 of 6 11-06-07
Document No. 109G0040A017 Service

dated 11 June 2007

E.M.S.
EMERGENCY MEDICAL SERVICE
The Emergency Medical Service P/N 109-0811-70, for emergency,

rescue and ambulance operation, may be equipped as follows:
— -147 consists of a litter, a medical storage chest and three seats:
two in the cabin aft position, fixed, facing forward and one, swivel-
ling type, that can either be installed facing aft, with laterally sliding
capability, or facing forward in the central position. The E.M.S. is
completed with panels, at the upper side of lateral and aft walls, for
medical devices and lights. The litter, when installed, is equipped
with three straps and is mounted longitudinally in the left hand side
of the cabin.
— -153 consists of a second litter, installed on the right hand side of
the cabin, in conjunction with E.M.S. P/N 109-0811-70-147.
— -157 is the same as -147 except for its compatibility with the RH
Supplementary fuel tank installation P/N 109-0811-49-201.

Service Document No. 109G0040A017
The E.M.S. includes an intercommunication system for the patient at-

tendants. A specific swivel based seat in the copilot position is provid-
ed. The seat may be positioned forward facing to be used by a copilot
or it may be swiveled to face into the cabin to be used by a medical at-
tendant.
CAUTION
All medical equipment incorporating electronic devices

must satisfy the electromagnetic compatibility require-
ments.
Note
For E.M.S. P/N 109-0811-70, the electromagnetic compat-
ibility has been verified with the following equipment:
— Lifepak 12 defibrillator plus monitor P/N VLP 12-02-000412
— HEART START P/N M5518A Model BVS1207503DCN
power supplier for Lifepak 12 defibrillator
— HEART START 4000 defibrillator plus monitor P/N M5500B
— Oxylog 2000 pulmonary ventilator P/N 8411790
— IVAC P7000 syringe infusion pump P/N 7001FAUUN2
— MED SYSTEM III syringe infusion pump P/N 2866AXC 1EE
— LSU Laerdal suction unit P/N 78000
— OXIPAC 2500 pulse oximeter P/N 2M8G473
Optional EquipmentSupplements Emergency Medical
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
dated 11 June 2007



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 0
A-1 and A-2 0
B-1 and B-2 0
i and iv 0
1 thru 3 of 8 0
4 thru 8 of 8 0
11-06-07 B-1
B-2 11-06-07
E.M.S.
EMERGENCY MEDICAL SERVICE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page

FLIGHT CREW ............................................................................1 of 8
NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS........................................................1 of 8
FLIGHT WITH PASSENGER CABIN DOOR
OPEN OR REMOVED ............................................................ 1 of 8
DEFIBRILLATOR OPERATING LIMITATIONS
(IF INSTALLED)...................................................................... 1 of 8

LITTER OPERATIONS................................................................2 of 8
LITTER(S) LOADING.............................................................. 2 of 8
LITTER(S) UNLOADING ........................................................ 3 of 8
11-06-07 Page i
Page

PROCEDURES
EVACUATION THROUGH EMERGENCY EXITS.......................3 of 8
LITTER ARM........................................................................... 4 of 8
LITTER ARM (-153 ONLY) ..................................................... 4 of 8
FORWARD SEAT ARM (-147 AND -157)............................... 4 of 8
FORWARD SEAT ARM (-153 ONLY)..................................... 5 of 8
AFT SEAT ARM (-147 AND -157)........................................... 5 of 8
AFT SEAT ARM (-153 ONLY)................................................. 5 of 8
Page ii 11-06-07
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
7-1. E.M.S. Interior Arrangement ............................................ 6 of 8
11-06-07 Page iii

Page iv 11-06-07
TYPE OF OPERATION
The helicopter in E.M.S. configuration permits rescue and ambulance
operation under day and night VFR operation, in non-icing conditions.
FLIGHT CREW
The minimum flight crew consists of one pilot and one attendant, both
of whom shall be trained in and capable of assisting in litter patient
emergency evacuation procedures.
NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS
Six (6) - including the pilot and litter patient(s).
FLIGHT WITH PASSENGER CABIN DOOR OPEN OR REMOVED
Operation with passenger cabin doors open or removed is prohibited

when patient is on board.

After E.M.S. installation the new empty weight and CG location must
be determined.
DEFIBRILLATOR OPERATING LIMITATIONS (IF INSTALLED)
The use of handle type electrodes is prohibited in flight.

PRE-FLIGHT CHECKS
Cabin seats and litter(s) : Check for condition and straps

(Every flight)
Cabin seats and litter(s) : Check for condition and straps

LITTER OPERATIONS
LITTER(S) LOADING
— Secure patient(s) to the litter using the three straps provided;

— unlock and raise the central aft seat;
— load left litter from LH door and right litter (if installed) from RH
door, and ensure the patient is head forward oriented;
— secure litter(s) to the locks.

LITTER(S) UNLOADING
— Unlock and raise the central aft seat;

— unlock the litter(s);
— unload the left litter from LH door and right litter (if installed) from
RH door.

EVACUATION THROUGH EMERGENCY EXITS

Unstrap the patient(s) and evacuate either through the LH or RH
emergency exit.
No change.

LITTER ARM

STA 0.
Lateral (left) : 410 mm (16.1 inches) from the

LITTER ARM (-153 ONLY)

STA 0.
Lateral (right) : 410 mm (16.1 inches) from the

FORWARD SEAT ARM (-147 AND -157)
Forward position

STA 0.
Lateral : 0 to 410 mm (15.1 inches)

(right) from helicopter plane of
symmetry.
Central position

STA 0.
Lateral : BL 0.
Page 4 of 8 11-06-07
FORWARD SEAT ARM (-153 ONLY)

STA 0.
Lateral : BL 0.
AFT SEAT ARM (-147 AND -157)

STA 0.
Lateral, outboard seat : 410 mm (16.1 inches) (right)

from the helicopter plane of
symmetry.
AFT SEAT ARM (-153 ONLY)

STA 0.
Lateral : BL 0.
11-06-07 Page 5 of 8

SWIVEL
COPILOT SEAT
1 SEAT
1 SEAT
1 LITTER 1 LITTER
2 SEATS
E.M.S. P/N 109-0811-70-147
SWIVEL
COPILOT SEAT
1 LITTER 1 SEAT
1 SEAT 1 LITTER
E.M.S. P/N 109-0811-70-153

ICN-19-A-155012-G-A0126-71001-A-01-1
Figure 7-1. (sheet 1 of 2). E.M.S. Interior Arrangement 8
Page 6 of 8 11-06-07
SWIVEL
COPILOT SEAT
1 SEAT
1 SEAT
1 LITTER 1 LITTER
2 SEATS
SUPPLEMENTARY FUEL TANK
E.M.S. P/N 109-0811-70-157

ICN-19-A-155012-G-A0126-71002-A-01-1
Figure 7-1. (sheet 2 of 2). E.M.S. Interior Arrangement

11-06-07 Page 7 of 8
Page 8 of 8 11-06-07
Optional Equipment Supplements GPS/COMM System
Document No. 109G0040A017 Garmin GNC 250 XL

dated 11 June 2007

GPS/COMM SYSTEM
GARMIN GNC 250 XL
The GPS/COMM Garmin GNC 250 XL system P/N 109-0772-18

consists of a GPS antenna fitted on the top of the upper vertical fin, a
VHF-AM antenna located on fuselage underside and a receiver
installed in the front console of the cockpit. A built-in battery pack
integral with the receiver will continue to power the GPS/COMM for up
to two hours in the event of an aircraft power failure.
The GPS/COMM provides both navigational data and communication
capabilities (VHF 2). As a navigational source it provides position,
course, speed, status and flight planning information. As a
communication source it operates in the VHF band from 118.000 to
136.975 MHz, in 25 kHz steps (760 channels).

GPS/COMM System Optional Equipment Supplements
Garmin GNC 250 XL Document No. 109G0040A017

Optional EquipmentSupplements Dual Controls
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
dated 11 June 2007



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 0
A-1 and A-2 0
B-1 and B-2 0
i and ii 0
1 thru 4 of 4 0
11-06-07 B-1
B-2 11-06-07
GPS/COMM SYSTEM
GARMIN GNC 250 XL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
SYSTEM CHECK ........................................................................1 of 4

BEFORE TAKE-OFF ...................................................................2 of 4
IN FLIGHT ...................................................................................2 of 4

PROCEDURES
ELECTRICAL POWER FAILURE ........................................... 3 of 4
11-06-07 Page i
GPS/COMM System Optional Equipment Supplements
Page ii 11-06-07

After GPS/COMM installation the new empty weight and CG location
must be determined.
SYSTEM CHECK
Note
For a correct and complete use of GPS/COMM Garmin
GNC 250 XL, refer to Garmin GNC 250 XL Pilot’s Guide,
publication No 190-00067-60 Rev. A or latest.
Power/volume knob (on bottom

left of receiver) : Turn clockwise to mid-range.
Welcome page : Displayed; self test in progress.
Database page : Displayed; press ENT key to

acknowledge information.
Satellite status page : Displayed.
After a successful self-test:
Message page : ”Ready for navigation” appears.
On completion of self-test:
Power/volume knob (on bottom

left of receiver) : As desired.
4
GPS/COMM System Optional EquipmentSupplements
BEFORE TAKE-OFF
GPS/COMM receiver : Set as required.
IN FLIGHT
GPS/COMM receiver : Set as required for enroute or
direct to navigation/
communication frequencies.
Note
To automatically tune emergency channel frequency
(121.50 MHz), press and hold the <> key for more than
two seconds.


In the event of an electrical failure with consequent power loss, the

GPS/COMM will automatically revert to its built-in battery pack. To
continue navigation/communication with the GPS/COMM, the pilot
must press any key when the power down page appears.
The GPS/COMM will continue to operate for appproximately two
hours.
Note
The helicopter battery will supply the GPS/COMM (VHF
No. 2) for the following duration:
- 15 minutes RX;
- 3 minutes TX.
No change.
4
GPS/COMM System Optional EquipmentSupplements

Optional Equipment Supplements Oxygen System

dated 11 June 2007

OXYGEN SYSTEM
The helicopter in E.M.S. configuration can be provided with the

oxygen system P/N 109-0811-76 that can contain up to 2200 liters of
compressed oxygen supplied by a bottle of 16.5 liters, installed in the
baggage compartment.
The oxygen is provided at a pressure of 70 psi and may be shut-off by
means of a knob mounted on the left hand side of the pilot overhead
panel.
Note
The oxygen system must be used in conjunction with
E.M.S. P/N 109-0811-70.

Oxygen System Optional Equipment Supplements

Optional EquipmentSupplements Oxygen System
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
dated 11 June 2007



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 0
A-1 and A-2 0
B-1 and B-2 0
i and iv 0
1 thru 4 of 8 0
5 thru 8 of 8 0
11-06-07 B-1
B-2 11-06-07
OXYGEN SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page

BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIMITATIONS ......................... 1 of 8

ENGINE PRE-FLIGHT CHECK...................................................3 of 8
OXYGEN SYSTEM OPERATIONS .............................................3 of 8

PROCEDURES
WARNING SYSTEM....................................................................4 of 8
CAUTION MESSAGES (YELLOW) ........................................ 4 of 8
11-06-07 Page i
Page
ALLOWABLE BAGGAGE LOAD ...............................................5 of 8
Page ii 11-06-07
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
6-1. Baggage Loading Zones.................................................. 6 of 8

7-1. Oxygen Bottle .................................................................. 7 of 8
7-2. Oxygen Manual Shut-Off Knob........................................ 7 of 8
11-06-07 Page iii

LIST OF TABLES
Page
6-1. Baggage moment............................................................. 5 of 8

6-2. Example of baggage loading ........................................... 6 of 8
Page iv 11-06-07
TYPE OF OPERATION
The helicopter with the oxygen system and E.M.S. permits rescue and
ambulance operation under day and night VFR operation, in non-icing
conditions.

After oxygen system installation the new empty weight and CG
Smoking is prohibited with the oxygen system installed.
Maximum load : 138 kg (304 lb).

Oxygen System Optional EquipmentSupplements
PRE-FLIGHT CHECKS
Utility access door to the oxygen

bottle socket : Secured.
OXY H.P. RELIEF green

indicator plug : Check in position.
Note
If the OXY H.P. RELIEF green indicator plug is not in posi-
tion, the oxygen bottle is discharged.
Baggage compartment : Check the oxygen bottle fairing

is properly secured.
8
(Every flight)
Utility access door to the oxygen

bottle socket : Secured.
OXY H.P. RELIEF green

indicator plug : Check in position.
Note
If the OXY H.P. RELIEF green indicator plug is not in posi-
tion, the oxygen bottle is discharged.
Baggage compartment : Check the oxygen bottle fairing

is properly secured.
ENGINE PRE-FLIGHT CHECK

OXYGEN MANUAL SHUT-OFF
knob : Check in closed position (IN).
EDU1 : OXYGEN OPEN advisory mes-

sage out.
OXYGEN SYSTEM OPERATIONS

OXYGEN MANUAL
SHUT-OFF knob : Open (OUT).
EDU1 : OXYGEN OPEN advisory mes-

sage displayed.


WARNING SYSTEM
Close utility door

correctly before
The utility access
flight. If the message
door to the oxygen
UTIL DOOR illuminates in flight
bottle socket is not
reduce speed below
correctly closed.
70 KIAS and land as
soon as practicable.
In emergency, pilot(s) must close the shut-off valve of the oxygen

supply system through the OXYGEN MANUAL SHUT-OFF knob on
the overhead panel (OXYGEN OPEN advisory message extin-
guished on EDU1).
No change.
8

ALLOWABLE BAGGAGE LOAD
The baggage compartment is divided in five zones. In Figure 6-1, the
maximum baggage load for each zone is presented. The maximum
allowable baggage load is 138 kg.
The following table defines the baggage moments for each zone. The
maximum allowable baggage moment is 676000 kgmm.
Table 6-1. Baggage moment
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5

Arm 4880 Arm 5240 Arm 5560 Arm 5960 Arm 6430
Baggage
Baggage moment (kgmm)
load (kg)
10 48800 52400 55600 59600 64300
20 97600 104800 111200 119200 128600
30 146400 157200 166800 178800 192900
40 195200 209600 222400 238400 257200
50 244000 262000 278000 298000 321500
60 292800 314400 333600 357600 385800
70 341600 366800 389200 417200 450100
80 390400 419200 444800 476800 514400
90 439200 471600 500400 536400 578700
100 488000 524000 556000 596000 643000
105 512400 550200 583800 625800 675150
110 536800 576400 611600 655600
113 551440 592120 628280 673480
120 585600 628800 667200
121 590480 634040 672760
125 610000 655000
129 629520 675960
135 658800
138 673440
11-06-07 Page 5 of 8
An example of baggage loading is provided below; the total baggage

moment shall be less than 676000 kgmm.
Table 6-2. Example of baggage loading
Weight Moment
(kg) (kgmm)
ZONE 1 50 244000
ZONE 2 40 209600
ZONE 3 20 111200
ZONE 4 10 59600
ZONE 5 — —
TOTAL 120 624400
The total baggage load and moment calculated above are less than
the maximum allowable.
STA 4760
STA 4460
STA 5045
STA 5372
STA 5767
STA 6249
STA 6633
(Max. load 138 kg)
(Max. load 105 kg)

(Max. load 129 kg)
(Max. load 121 kg)
(Max. load 113 kg)

AVIONIC BAY
ZONE 1
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
ZONE 5
ICN-19-A-155014-G-A0126-61001-A-01-1
Figure 6-1. Baggage Loading Zones
8
Page 6 of 8 11-06-07
OXYGEN BOTTLE
ICN-19-A-155014-G-A0126-71001-A-01-1
Figure 7-1. Oxygen Bottle
A
A
OX
YG
E N
MA
NU
-P A L S
US H
H- UT
-O
FF
ICN-19-A-155014-G-A0126-71002-A-01-1
Figure 7-2. Oxygen Manual Shut-Off Knob
11-06-07 Page 7 of 8
8
Page 8 of 8 11-06-07
Optional Equipment Supplements Pulsed Chip
Document No. 109G0040A017 Detector

dated 11 June 2007

PULSED CHIP DETECTOR
The Pulsed Chip Detector system P/N 109-0813-78 enables the pilot
to burn the particles collected by the chip detectors of the lubricating
system located inside the main transmission, the tail rotor gearbox
and the reduction gearbox of the engine.
The presence of particles on the chip detectors is indicated by the
activation of the XMSN OIL CHIPS, T/R BOX CHIPS and ENG RGB
CHIPS caution lights.
The Pulsed Chip Detector is activated by means of the CHIP
BURNER switch located on the overhead panel.

Pulsed Chip Optional Equipment Supplements
Detector Document No. 109G0040A017

Optional EquipmentSupplements Pulsed Chip
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
dated 11 June 2007



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 0
A-1 and A-2 0
B-1 and B-2 0
i and ii 0
1 thru 4 of 4 0
11-06-07 B-1
B-2 11-06-07
PULSED CHIP DETECTOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
SECTION 1 - LIMITATIONS 1 of 4
SECTION 2 - NORMAL PROCEDURES 1 of 4

PROCEDURES
WARNING SYSTEM....................................................................2 of 4
CAUTION MESSAGES (YELLOW) ............................................2 of 4
PULSED CHIP DETECTOR ACTIVATION .................................4 of 4
11-06-07 Page i
Page ii 11-06-07
No change.
No change.

Pulsed Chip Optional EquipmentSupplements

WARNING SYSTEM

ENG RGB CHIPS Presence of metal Activate CHIP
particles in engine BURNER switch
reduction gearbox oil. momentarily and
release. It is permitted
to activate the CHIP
BURNER up to 3
times to clear a chip. If
the message does not
extinguish, reduce
power and land as
soon as possible.
Maintenance action is
required before next
flight.


XMSN OIL CHIPS Presence of metal Activate CHIP
particles in main trans- BURNER switch
mission oil. momentarily and
release.It is permitted
BURNER up to 3
extinguish, reduce
power and land as
soon as possible.
flight.
T/R BOX CHIPS Presence of metal Activate CHIP
particles in tail rotor BURNER switch
gearbox oil. momentarily and
release. It is permitted
BURNER up to 3
extinguish, reduce
power and land as
soon as possible.
flight.

Pulsed Chip Optional EquipmentSupplements
PULSED CHIP DETECTOR ACTIVATION

A maximum of 3 chips for each detector can be cleared per flight. On
the 4th activation of the same chip caution light land as soon as
possible. Make an appropriate log book entry for each message
activation.
CAUTION
The use of engine or main transmission pulsed chip detec-

tor when the relative oil pressure is below the limits is pro-
hibited.
Note
The pulsed chip detector shall not be used to suppress a
chip detector caution light when the aircraft is on the
ground.
No change.

Optional Equipment Supplements Battery in Baggage
Document No. 109G0040A017 Compartment
EASA Approval Letter No. 10034526

dated 18 April 2011
The information contained herein supplements the informa-

tion of the basic Rotorcraft Flight Manual.
For limitations, procedures and performance data not con-
tained in this supplement, consult the basic Rotorcraft Flight
Manual.
BATTERY IN
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
The battery installation P/N 109G2406R01 consists of the battery

relocation from the nose compartment to the baggage compartment
and a ballast installation in lieu of the battery in the nose compartment.
The installation includes a dedicated access door and the external
power receptacle on the right side of the fuselage.
ISSUE 1: 18 APRIL 2011

Battery in Baggage Optional Equipment Supplements
Compartment Document No. 109G0040A017

Optional EquipmentSupplements Battery in Baggage
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
— Issue 1 EASA Approval
N° 10034526
dated 18 April 2011



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 0
A-1 and A-2 0
B-1 and B-2 0
i and ii 0
1 thru 4 of 10 0
5 thru 10 of 10 0
18-04-11 B-1
B-2 18-04-11
BATTERY IN
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITATIONS ........................................1 of 8

NOSE COMPARTMENT LIMITATIONS ................................. 1 of 8
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIMITATIONS ......................... 1 of 8
PLACARDS .................................................................................2 of 8
PRE-FLIGHT CHECK..................................................................3 of 8

PROCEDURES 4 of 8
18-04-11 Page i
Page
ALLOWABLE BALLAST LOAD IN THE NOSE .........................5 of 8

ALLOWABLE BAGGAGE LOAD................................................6 of 8
Page ii 18-04-11
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
1-1. Placards......................................................................... 2 of 10
6-1. Baggage Loading Zones................................................ 7 of 10
7-1. Battery in Baggage Compartment - Component
Location ......................................................................... 9 of 10
18-04-11 Page iii

LIST OF TABLES
Page
6-1. Ballast moment ................................................................ 5 of 8

6-2. Baggage moment............................................................. 6 of 8
6-3. Example of baggage loading ........................................... 7 of 8
Page iv 18-04-11

After the battery relocation, in some loading conditions the longitudinal
CG limitation can be exceeded, verify if ballast is necessary to remain
in the approved longitudinal CG limits.
NOSE COMPARTMENT LIMITATIONS
Maximum ballast load .................................................... : 35 kg (77 lb).
Maximum load............................................................. : 120 kg (110 lb)
Maximum unit load........................................ : 500 kg/m2 (102 lb/sq ft)
Note
Refer to Section 6, Weight and Balance, for load distribu-
tion.

Battery in Baggage Optional EquipmentSupplements
PLACARDS
A
A NOSE COMPARTMENT
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE BALLAST LOAD 35 KG (77 LB)
B BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE BAGGAGE LOAD
ZONE 1 2 3 4 5
KG (LB) 120 ( 264 ) 110 ( 242 ) 102 ( 224 ) 93 (205) 84 (185)
MAXIMUM TOTAL LOAD 120 KG ( 264 LB )

MAX UNIT FLOOR LOADING 500 KG/M2( 102 LB/SQ.FT. )
ALL CARGO MUST BE SECURED
MAX LOAD PER TIE DOWN RING 91KG ( 200 LB )
ICN-19-A-155016-G-A0126-01001-A-01-1

Area N°1 (Helicopter Nose)

Nose compartment access door : Open.
Ballast : Check secured.
Nose compartment access door : Secured; fastener security pin
out.
Area N°2 (Fuselage - RH side)

Battery compartment access door : Open.
Battery : Secured; connectors secured.
Battery compartment access door : Secured; door latched.
Area N°6 (Fuselage - LH side)

Relay box circuit breakers : IN.
(in battery compartment)


No change.
No change.

ALLOWABLE BALLAST LOAD IN THE NOSE

The maximum allowable ballast load in the nose compartment is
35 kg.
The Table 6-1 defines the longitudinal and lateraral ballast moments
for the nose comparment.
.
Table 6-1. Ballast moment
NOSE COMPARTMENT
STA 200 mm BL 57 mm
Ballast load
(kg) Longitudinal moment Lateral moment
(kg mm) (kg mm)
10 2000 570
15 3000 855
20 4000 1140
25 5000 1425
30 6000 1710
35 7000 1995
18-04-11 Page 5 of 10

maximum baggage load for each zone is presented.
The maximum allowable baggage load is 120 kg.
The Table 6-2 defines the longitudinal baggage moments for each
zone.
The maximum allowable longitudinal baggage moment is 585600 kg mm.
The Table 6-3 provides an example of baggage loading in conjunction
with Figure 6-1.
The total baggage longitudinal moment shall be less than 585600 kg mm.

Baggage STA 4880 mm STA 5240 mm STA 5560 mm STA 5960 mm STA 6430 mm
load (kg)
Baggage moment (kg mm)
10 48800 52400 55600 59600 64300
20 97600 104800 111200 119200 128600
30 146400 157200 166800 178800 192900
40 195200 209600 222400 238400 257200
50 244000 262000 278000 298000 321500
60 292800 314400 333600 357600 385800
70 341600 366800 389200 417200 450100
75 366000 393000 417000 447000 482250
78 380640 408720 433680 464880 501540
80 390400 419200 444800 476800 514400
84 409920 440160 467040 500640 540120
85 414800 445400 472600 506600
90 439200 471600 500400 536400
93 453840 487320 517080 554280
100 488000 524000 556000
102 497760 534480 567120
105 512400 550200
110 536800 576400
120 585600
Page 6 of 10 18-04-11

Weight Moment
(kg) (kg mm)
Zone 1 50 244000
Zone 2 40 209600
Zone 3 23 127880
Zone 4 — —
Zone 5 — —
Total 113 581480
STA 4760
STA 4460
STA 5045
STA 5372
STA 5767
STA 6249
STA 6633
(Max. load 93 kg)
(Max. load 84 kg)

(Max. load 120 kg)
(Max. load 110 kg)
(Max. load 102 kg)

AVIONIC BAY
ZONE 4
ZONE 5
ZONE 1
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ICN-19-A-155016-G-A0126-01002-A-01-1
Figure 6-1. Baggage Loading Zone
18-04-11 Page 7 of 10

The Battery relocation retrofit kit is made by all the equipment part of
the basic electrical installation located in the baggage compartment in
lieu of in the nose compartment as per standard configuration. The
only purpose of this modification is to move the helicopter CG location
in a rear position, but there are no changes in terms of normal and
emergency procedures and performances.
The battery access door is in the right side of the helicopter together
with the external power receptacle access door; also the relay box is
moved in the rear avionic bay, visible through a dedicated window in
the avionic bay panel (refer to figure 7-1). The DC generation system
schematic diagram remain the same of the basic installation (refer to
figure 7-14 of the Section 7).
Page 8 of 10 18-04-11
.
BATTERY
RELAY
MOUNT
EXTERNAL POWER
RECEPTACLE
QUICK-DISCONNECT
SWITCH
CONNECTOR
(Actuated by access door)
BATTERY
BREATHER
TUBE BREATHER
TUBE
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR ICN-19-A-155016-G-00001-01003-A-01-1
Figure 7-1. Battery in Baggage Compartment - Component Location
18-04-11 Page 9 of 10
Page 10 of 10 18-04-11
Optional Equipment Supplements Low Temperature
Document No. 109G0040A017 Operations
EASA Approval N° 10031176

dated 26 July 2010

the basic Rotorcraft Flight Manual
LOW TEMPERATURE OPERATIONS
The contents of this Supplement include the information to be

complied with for operating the AW119 MKII helicopter in Low
Temperature (-25 °C to -35 °C range) ambient conditions.
ISSUE 1: 26 JULY 2010

REVISION 2: 20 APRIL 2012
Low Temperature Optional Equipment Supplements
Operations Document No. 109G0040A017

Optional EquipmentSupplements Low Temperature
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
N° 10031176
dated 26 July 2010
1 Revised pages Title page, A-1, B-1, i EASA Approval
and 2 of 8. N° 10033985
and 6 of 8. N° 10039252
dated 20 April 2012



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 2
A-1 2
A-2 0
B-1 2
B-2 0
i 1
i and ii 0
1 of 8 0
2 of 8 1
3 thru 5 of 8 0
6 of 8 2
7 thru 8 of 8 0
26-07-10 B-1
B-2 26-07-10
LOW TEMPERATURE OPERATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page

AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS...........................................................1 of 8
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS .........................1 of 8
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM LIMITATIONS.........................................2 of 8
APPROVED FLUIDS .............................................................. 2 of 8
PLACARDS .................................................................................5 of 8
COLD WEATHER OPERATIONS...............................................6 of 8

STARTING PROCEDURE...........................................................6 of 8
ENGINE START ..................................................................... 6 of 8

PROCEDURES 7 of 8
26-07-10 Page i
Rev. 1
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
1-1. Airspeed Limitation - VNE (power on/off) ......................... 3 of 18

1-2. Placards in Clear View of the Pilot................................. 5 of 18
Page ii 26-07-10
TYPE OF OPERATION
The AW119 MKII is approved for low temperature operations (-25 °C
to -35 °C range) provided that the following equipments are fitted:
— Bleed Air Heater P/N 109-0811-60;
— Pilot collective control stick P/N 109-0010-81-201;
— Co-pilot collective control stick P/N 109-0010-81-205 (only if the
Dual Controls kit P/N 109-0810-01 is installed);
— 28 Ah Marathon battery (P/N 31995-002);
— Vne placard P/N 109-0740L37-115.
AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS
VNE (Power-ON/OFF) ................................................ : See Figure 1-1.
Minimum airspeed in autorotation

(without close external references) ................................... : no change.
Maximum airspeed with torque between

100 and 108.5% (take-off power range)............................ : no change.
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS
Minimum ambient temperature ................: -35 °C (refer to Figure 1-1).

Low Temperature Optional EquipmentSupplements
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
APPROVED FLUIDS
The following hydraulic fluid is approved:
MIL-PRF-5606.

Rev. 1
20000
19000
18000
17000
16000 00
150
15000
MAXIMUM OAT +50 C

00
14000 140
00
13000 130
OA
00
12000 120
TL
00
110
NSITY ALTITUDE - FEET
IM
11000
00
IT
[ft]
10000 100
0
9000 900
0
8000 800
MINIMUM OAT -25 C
0
7000 700
0
6000 600
0
5000 500
DENSITY
OAT LIMIT
FEET
0
4000 400
0
3000 300
2000 0
200
1000 100
0
0 0
ET
-1000 - FE -10
00
E
-2000 UD
LTIT
-3000 EA
SUR
-4000 ES
-5000 PR
-6000
-7000
-8000
-9000
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE - °C INDICATED AIRSPEED - KNOTS
109G0290T208/2 Rev. A ICN-19-A-155018-A0126-00002-A-01-1
Figure 1-1. Airspeed Limitation - VNE (power on/off)

Supplement 18 A119-RFM-A

PLACARDS
A
A
Vne AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS - KIAS
Hp ft
-1000 3000 6000 9000 12000 15000
OAT °C TO SL
50 152 - - - - -
40 152 150 - - - -
30 152 152 143 134 - -
20 152 152 146 137 128 119
10 152 152 149 140 131 121
0 152 152 152 143 133 124
-10 152 152 152 146 136 127
-20 152 152 152 149 139 130
-30 152 152 152 150 141 133
-35 152 152 152 150 144 135
ICN-19-A-155018-G-A0126-00001-A-01-1
Figure 1-2. Placard in Clear View of the Pilot

COLD WEATHER OPERATIONS

Store the battery in a warm place during prolonged helicopter
inactivity.
STARTING PROCEDURE
Collective control : Flat pitch, check.
ENGINE START
CAUTION
During cold starting conditions, the transmission oil pres-

sure can temporarily rise up to 100 psi; leave the engine
throttle at IDLE until the pressure returns in the continuous
operation range as oil temperature increases.
Note
If GPS/COMM system GNC250XL or GPS/NAV/COMM
system GNS430AW is installed, wait for warm-up period
after light-up.
CAUTION
For ambient temperatures below -25 °C let hydraulic fluids

to warm-up, leaving the engine throttle at IDLE, for a period
of 1 minute for every Celsius degree of OAT below -25 °C.

Rev. 2

No change.

No change.


Optional Equipment Supplements Digital AWG
Document No. 109G0040A017 with DH Tone
EASA Approval with Letter N° 10031065

dated 26 July 2010

DIGITAL AWG WITH DH TONE
The digital Aural Warning Generator (AWG) Installation Kit P/N

109-B811-08-103 provides precursor tones and synthesized voice
warning messages through the ICS system.
The digital AWG includes a new audio tone associated to the Radio
Altimeter Decision Height (DH) setting, the audio tone advises the pilot
when the helicopter passes the DH previously set on the Radio
Altimeter Indicator (if installed).
ISSUE 1: 26 JULY 2010

REVISION 1: 14 DECEMBER 2012
Digital AWG Optional Equipment Supplements
with DH Tone Document No. 109G0040A017

Optional EquipmentSupplements Digital AWG
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
N° 10031065
dated 26 July 2010
1 Revised pages A-1, B-1 and 1 of 4. Approved under the
Authority of DOA
N° EASA 21J.005



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 1
A-1 1
A-2 0
B-1 1
B-2 0
i and ii 0
1 of 4 1
2 thru 4 of 4 0
26-07-10 B-1
B-2 26-07-10
DIGITAL AWG WITH DH TONE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page

SYSTEMS CHECK ......................................................................2 of 4
MISCELLANEOUS ................................................................. 2 of 4
TAKE-OFF AND LANDING.........................................................2 of 4

PROCEDURES 3 of 4
26-07-10 Page i
Page ii 26-07-10
No change.
Aural Warning Generator test : Set AWG switch on TEST and

maintain. Check the aural mes-
sage “TEST OK” and, after
approximately 3 seconds, the
AWG FAIL caution message
activates and the vocal alarm
operates in the following
sequence:
“ROTOR LOW”
“ENGINE OUT”
“ENGINE FIRE”
“WARNING”
“ROTOR HIGH”
Audio Tone DH (Decision Height)
“ONE HUNDRED FIFTY FEET”.

Approved under DOA Rev. 1
Digital AWG Optional EquipmentSupplements
SYSTEMS CHECK
MISCELLANEOUS
Radio Altimeter (if installed):

Indication : Zero altitude.
OFF flag : Retracted.
TEST switch : Press and maintain.
DH light : Out.
Needle : 100 ft.
TEST switch : Release.
DH light : On and Audio Tone DH.
TAKE-OFF AND LANDING

To avoid possible overlap with normal ATC communications, during
take-off and landing:
DH knob : Set below Zero.


No change.
No change.

Digital AWG Optional EquipmentSupplements

Optional Equipment Supplements GPS/NAV/COMM System
Document No. 109G0040A017 Garmin GNS430AW

dated 20 April 2012

GPS/NAV/COMM SYSTEM
GARMIN GNS430AW
The GPS/NAV/COMM Garmin GNS430AW system P/N 109-0772-18

consists of a GPS antenna fitted on the top of the upper vertical fin, a
VHF-AM antenna located on fuselage underside, two VOR/ILS
antennas located on the tail boom sides and a receiver installed in the
front console of the cockpit.
The GPS/NAV/COMM provides both navigational data and
communication capabilities (VHF 2). As a navigational source it
provides position, course, speed, status and flight planning
information. As a communication source it operates in the VHF band
from 118.000 to 136.975 MHz.
ISSUE 1: 20 APRIL 2012

GPS/NAV/COMM System Optional Equipment Supplements
Garmin GNS430AW Document No. 109G0040A017

Optional EquipmentSupplements GPS/NAV/COMM System
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
N° 10039252
dated 20 April 2012



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 0
A-1 and A-2 0
B-1 and B-2 0
i thru iv 0
1 thru 4 of 8 0
PART II — Manufacturer’s Data
5 thru 8 of 8 0
20-04-12 B-1
B-2 20-04-12
GPS/NAV/COMM SYSTEM
GARMIN GNS430AW
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page

SYSTEM CHECK ........................................................................1 of 8

IN FLIGHT ...................................................................................3 of 8

PROCEDURES
SYSTEM FAILURE......................................................................4 of 8
NAV SECTION FAILURE ....................................................... 4 of 8
ELECTRICAL POWER FAILURE ........................................... 4 of 8
20-04-12 Page i
Page
SECTION 6 - WEIGHT AND BALANCE 5 of 8
GENERAL....................................................................................5 of 8
GNS430AW KEY AND KNOB FUNCTIONS ...............................5 of 8
Page ii 20-04-12
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
7-1. GNS430AW Control Panel .............................................. 6 of 8
20-04-12 Page iii

LIST OF TABLES
Page
7-1. GNS430AW Key and Knob Functions ............................. 6 of 8
Page iv 20-04-12

After installation of the GPS/NAV/COMM Garmin GNS430AW system,
the new empty weight and CG location must be determined.
B-RNAV information provided by the GPS section of the GNS430AW
system may be utilized for advisory information only.
Note
The accuracy of the information provided by the GPS data
base can not be guaranteed. The Pilot should verify each
selected waypoint for accuracy by reference to approved
and valid documents.
SYSTEM CHECK
C PWR/VOL/SQ knob
(on top left corner of receiver) : Turn clockwise to power on the
unit and set the desired radio
volume.
Welcome page : Briefly displayed during unit self

test, followed sequentially by the
Unit Type Page and SW Versions
Page.
8
GPS/NAV/COMM System Optional EquipmentSupplements
Depending on unit configuration, the following pages might be

sequentially displayed:
— Weather Page;
— Traffic Page;
— Aviation Data Page;
— Land/Terrain/Obstacles Database Page;
— Situational Awareness Page.
After a successful self-test:
Database Confirmation Page : Displayed, showing effective

and expiration date of Jeppesen
database on the NavData card .
ENT key : Press to aknowledge the Data-

base page and proceed to Panel
Self-test Page .
Instrument Panel Self-test Page : Compare on screen indications

with information depicted on
connected instruments and/or
external annunciators.
ENT key : Press again to display Satellite

Status Page.
BEFORE TAKE-OFF
GPS/NAV/COMM receiver : Set as required.

IN FLIGHT
GPS/NAV/COMM receiver : Set as required for enroute or
direct to navigation/
communication frequencies.
Note
To quickly tune and activate the emergency channel fre-
quency (121.50 MHz), press and hold the key (top left
corner) for approximately two seconds.
8

SYSTEM FAILURE
NAV SECTION FAILURE
In case of failure of the VOR/ILS section of GNS430AW, the NAV and/

or GS failure flags will appear on the HSI.
Note
The helicopter battery will supply the GPS/NAV/COMM
(VHF No. 2) for the following duration:
- 15 minutes RX;
- 3 minutes TX.
No change.

No change.
GENERAL
Note
For a correct and complete use of GPS/NAV/COMM
Garmin GNS430AW, refer to 109-00356-00 400W Series
Pilot’s Guide & Reference.
The GPS/NAV/COMM provides both navigational data and

communication capabilities (VHF 2). As a navigational source it
provides position, course, speed, status and flight planning
information. As a communication source it operates in the VHF band
from 118.000 to 136.975 MHz, in 25 KHz or 8.33 KHz spacing for 760
or 2280 channels configuration respectively.
The system includes a control panel (see Figure 7-1) mount unity type
located in the front console of the cockpit that integrates the following
sections:
— a GPS;
— a VHF/AM transceiver;
— a NAV VOR/LOC/GS with the system tuned in on a LOC frequency
the corresponding GS frequency is automatically selected.
8
20-04-12 Page 5 of 8
GNS430AW KEY AND KNOB FUNCTIONS
1 4 8 7
9
6
11
3 5 13 14 15 16 17 10 12
ICN-19-A-155020-G-A0126-01001-A-01-1
Figure 7-1. GNS430AW Control Panel
Table 7-1 GNS430AW Key and Knob Functions

Ref. Key/Knobs Function
1 PWR VOL/ The COM power/volume knob controls unit power
PUSH SQ and communications radio volume. Press momen-
tarily to disable automatic squelch control.
2 VOL/ The VLOC volume knob controls audio volume for
PUSH ID the selected VOR/ Localizer frequency. Press
momentarily to enable/disable the ident tone.
3 PUSH The large left knob (COM/VLOC) is used to tune
C/V the megahertz (MHz) value (to the left of the deci-
mal point) of the standby frequency for the commu-
nications transceiver (COM) or the VLOC receiver,
whichever is currently selected by the tuning cursor.
The small left knob (COM/VLOC) is used to tune the
kilohertz (kHz) value (to the right of the decimal point)
of the standby frequency for the communications
transceiver (COM) or the VLOC receiver, whichever
is currently selected by the tuning cursor. Press this
knob momentarily to toggle the tuning cursor
between the COM and VLOC frequency fields.
Page 6 of 8 20-04-12

4 C The COM flip-flop key is used to swap the active
and standby COM frequencies. Press and hold to
⇑ select emergency channel (121.500 MHz).
⇓
5 V The VLOC flip-flop key is used to swap the active
⇑ and standby VLOC Frequencies.
⇓
6 Data Card slot; to use the left for loading the data-
base.
7 RNG The range key (RNG) allows you to select the
desired map scale. Use the up arrow side of the key
to zoom out to a larger area, or the down arrow side
to zoom in to a smaller area.
8 The direct-to key provides access to the direct-to
function, which allows you to enter a destination
waypoint and establishes a direct course to the
selected destination.
9 MENU The MENU key displays a context-sensitive list of
options. This options list allows you to access addi-
tional features or make settings changes which
relate to the currently displayed page.
10 CLR The clear key (CLR) is used to erase information or
cancel an entry. Press and hold this key to immedi-
ately display the Default Navigation Page, regard-
less of which page is currently displayed.
11 ENT The enter key (ENT) is used to approve an opera-
tion or complete data entry. It is also used to confirm
information, such as during power on.
12 PUSH CSRS The large right knob is used to select between the
various page groups: NAV, WPT, AUX or NRST.
With the on-screen cursor enabled, the large right
knob allows you to move the cursor about the page.
The small right knob (CRSR) is used to select

between the various pages within one of the groups
listed above. Press this knob momentarily to display
the on-screen cursor. The cursor allows you to enter
data and/or make a selection from a list of options.
8
20-04-12 Page 7 of 8

13 CDI The CDI key is used to toggle which navigation
source (GPS or VLOC) provides output to an exter-
nal HSI or CDI.
14 OBS The OBS key is used to select manual or automatic
sequencing of waypoints. Pressing the OBS key
selects OBS mode, which will retain the current
"active to" waypoint as navigation reference even
after passing the waypoint (i.e., prevents sequenc-
ing to the next waypoint). Pressing the OBS key
again will return to normal operation, with automatic
sequencing of waypoints.
Whenever OBS mode is selected, may set the
desired course to/from a waypoint using the OBS
Page, or an external OBS selector on HSI or CDI.
15 MSG The message key (MSG) is used to view system
messages and important warnings and require-
ments.
16 FLP The flight plan key (FPL) allows to create, edit, acti-
vate and invert flight plans, as well as access
approaches, departures and arrivals. A closest point
to flight plan feature is also available from the flight
plan key.
17 PROC The procedures key (PROC) allows to select and
remove approaches, departures and arrivals from
flight plan. When using a flight plan, available proce-
dures for departure and/or arrival airport are offered
automatically. Otherwise, may select the desired air-
port, then the desired procedure.
Page 8 of 8 20-04-12
Optional Equipment Supplements Operator Seat


OPERATOR SEAT
The operator seat, installation P/N 109G2520F24, consists of a

swivelling and crashworthy seat secured to the longitudinal rails at the
centre of passenger cabin floor. The operator seat replaces the
forward seat row of the basic helicopter configuration.
ISSUE 1: 14 DECEMBER 2012

REVISION 1: 2 APRIL 2020
Operator Seat Optional Equipment Supplements

Optional EquipmentSupplements Operator Seat
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
N° 10042717
and 1 of 8. N° 10072479
dated 02 April 2020



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 1
A-1 1
A-2 0
B-1 1
B-2 0
i thru iv 0
1 of 8 1
2 thru 4 of 8 0
5 thru 8 of 8 0
14-12-12 B-1
B-2 14-12-12
OPERATOR SEAT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page

OPERATOR SEAT LIMITATIONS.......................................... 1 of 8
PLACARDS .................................................................................1 of 8
PRE-FLIGHT CHECK..................................................................2 of 8
IN FLIGHT ...................................................................................2 of 8
APPROACH AND LANDING ......................................................3 of 8

PROCEDURES
EMERGENCY LANDING ............................................................4 of 8
14-12-12 Page i
Page
DATUM LINE LOCATIONS .........................................................5 of 8

WEIGHTS, ARMS AND MOMENTS............................................6 of 8
LONGITUDINAL MOMENTS .................................................. 6 of 8
GENERAL....................................................................................7 of 8
Page ii 14-12-12
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
6-1. Helicopter Stations Diagram - Operator Seat .................. 5 of 8

7-1. Operator Seat - Component Location.............................. 8 of 8
14-12-12 Page iii

Page iv 14-12-12
NUMBER OF SEATS
Three (3) - Including pilots
The use of the aft forward-facing passenger row seats is prohibited.

After the operator seat installation the new empty weight and CG
OPERATOR SEAT LIMITATIONS
During take-off, landing and whenever the pilot judges necessary for
the safety, the operator seat must be locked in forward facing
direction, in its rearmost position and with the armrests stowed.
PLACARDS
DURING TAKE-OFF, LANDING AND EMERGENCY CONDITIONS, THE

OPERATOR SEAT MUST BE LOCKED IN FORWARD FACING DIRECTION,
IN ITS REARMOST POSITION AND WITH THE ARMRESTS STOWED.
In clear view of the operator
8
Rev. 1
Operator Seat Optional EquipmentSupplements
PRE-FLIGHT CHECK
Operator’s seat : Check swivel mechanism for

correct operation.
Seat locked in forward facing
position.
Safety belts fastened.
BEFORE TAKE-OFF
Operator’s seat : Locked in forward facing
direction, in its rearmost
position and with the armrests
stowed.
CAUTION
If the operator seat is occupied, the shoulder harness must

be locked in fully retracted position.
IN FLIGHT
Operator’s seat : Swivelled and locked as
desired.


Operator’s seat : Locked in forward facing
direction, in its rearmost
position and with the armrests
stowed.
CAUTION
If the operator seat is occupied, the shoulder harness must

be locked in fully retracted position.
8

EMERGENCY LANDING
Operator’s seat : Aligned in forward facing
position and locked, armrests
stowed, shoulder harness
locked in full retracted position.
No change.


Figure 6-1 presents fuselage stations (STA) data to aid in weight and
balance computations.
For the calculation of the operator seat moment refer to the
“LONGITUDINAL MOMENTS” paragraph of this suplement.
OPERATOR SEAT
STA from 2639 to 2843
BL 0
STA 0
BL 0
ICN-19-A-155021-G-A0126-01001-A-01-1
Figure 6-1 Helicopter Stations Diagram - Operator Seat

8
14-12-12 Page 5 of 8
WEIGHTS, ARMS AND MOMENTS
Weight (STA 2741 mm) (*)

(kg) Moment (kg mm)
60 164460
65 178165
70 191870
75 205575
80 219280
85 232985
90 246690
95 260395
100 274100
105 287805
110 301510
115 315215
120 328920
(*) Adjustable from 2639 to 2843 mm.
Page 6 of 8 14-12-12
GENERAL
The operator seat installed in the passenger compartment furnishing
includes:
— Operator seat
— Longitudinal rails
A typical installation of the operator seat is shown in Figure 7-1.
The seat is equipped with a 5-point safety-belt system, two retractable
armrests, a manual lock device for the shoulder harnesses and a
recliner lever.
When the operator seat is installed, the aft facing seats row must be
removed.
8
14-12-12 Page 7 of 8
Operator
seat
Longitudinal
rail
ICN-19-A-155021-G-00005-10001-A-01-1
Figure 7-1. Operator Seat - Component Location
Page 8 of 8 14-12-12
Optional Equipment Supplements HF System
Document No. 109G0040A017 Type KHF1050
EASA Approval N° 10042643, REV. 1


HF SYSTEM - TYPE KHF1050
The HF system, type KHF1050 P/N 109G2310F13, is used for long

distance communications in the 2 to 29.999 MHz frequency range in 1
KHz increments. The system, connected to the I.C.S., provides two-
way voice radio communications in USB (voice and data) and AM
mode.
The system mainly consists of:
— a control panel;
— a transceiver;
— a power amplifier;
— an antenna coupler;
— an antenna installed on the tail boom.

HF System Optional Equipment Supplements
Type KHF1050 Document No. 109G0040A017

Optional EquipmentSupplements HF System
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
N° 10042643, REV. 1



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 0
A-1 and A-2 0
B-1 and B-2 0
i thru iv 0
1 thru 5 of 12 0
6 thru 12 of 12 0
14-12-12 B-1
B-2 14-12-12
HF SYSTEM - TYPE KHF1050
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
TYPE OF OPERATION .............................................................1 of 12

MISCELLANEOUS LIMITATIONS ............................................1 of 12
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIMITATIONS ....................... 1 of 12
PLACARDS ...............................................................................2 of 12
SYSTEM CHECK ......................................................................3 of 12
IN FLIGHT .................................................................................3 of 12

PROCEDURES 4 of 12
Page
14-12-12 Page i
GENERAL..................................................................................6 of 12
HF RADIO SYSTEM CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS ............. 9 of 12
Page ii 14-12-12
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
1-1. Placards in Baggage Compartment............................... 2 of 12

7-1. HF Radio System - Component Location (Sheet 1 of 2).... 7 of 12
7-1. HF Radio System - Component Location (Sheet 2 of 2).... 8 of 12
7-2. HF Radio System - Schematic Diagram ...................... 10 of 12
7-3. HF Radio System - Controls and Displays .................. 11 of 12
14-12-12 Page iii

Page iv 14-12-12
TYPE OF OPERATION
The HF System type KHF1050 must not be used during approach and
landing.

After HF System type KHF1050 installation the new empty weight and
CG location must be determined.
Maximum load..................................... ......................... 108 kg (238 lb)
12
HF System Optional EquipmentSupplements
PLACARDS
A BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE BAGGAGE LOAD

ZONE 1 2 3
KG (LB) 108 ( 238 ) 100 ( 220) 90 ( 198 )
MAXIMUM TOTAL LOAD 108 KG ( 238 LB )

MAX UNIT FLOOR LOADING 500 KG/M2 ( 102 LB/SQ.FT. )
ALL CARGO MUST BE SECURED
ICN-19-A-155022-G-A0126-01001-A-01-1
Figure 1-1. Placards in Baggage Compartment

PRE-FLIGHT CHECK
AREA N° 3 (Tail boom - RH side)
Antenna : Condition.
SYSTEMS CHECK
HF System type KHF1050
control panel : Press PUSH PWR button to
switch on the system and start
the built-in test. Verify no fail
messages are present.
IN FLIGHT
HF System type KHF1050
control panel : As desired.
ICS control panel : As desired.
12
SECTION 3 - EMERGENCY AND MAL-

FUNCTION PROCEDURES
No change.
No change.

No change.
12
14-12-12 Page 5 of 12
GENERAL
The HF radio system consists of five units: a KAC 1052 Antenna Coupler,
a KPA 1052 Power Amplifier, a KRX 1053 Reciver/Exciter, a control
Panel and a wire antenna. The Coupler, the power amplifier and the
receiver/exciter are installed in the avionic bay (baggage compartment).
The control panel is located in the instrument panel. The antenna is
installed under tail boom.
The radio system is a solid-state high frequency (HF) single sideband
(SSB) transceiver system providing voice and data communication. The
HF band covers from 2 MHz to 30 MHz.
The HF system is powered by the 28 Vdc No 1 bus bar through the HF
PWR and HF CTL circuit breakers.
The main components of the HF radio system are shown in Figure 7-1.
Refer to Figure 7-2 for the schematic diagram of HF radio system.
Page 6 of 12 14-12-12
A
ANTENNA
A CIRCUIT
BREAKER B
CONTROL
PANEL
ICN-19-A-155022-G-00005-10001-A-01-1
Figure 7-1. HF Radio System - Component Location

(Sheet 1 of 2)
12
14-12-12 Page 7 of 12
A B RECEIVER/EXCITER
COUPLER POWER
AMPLIFIER
ICN-19-A-155022-G-00005-10002-A-01-1
Figure 7-1. HF Radio System - Component Location

(Sheet 2 of 2)
Page 8 of 12 14-12-12
WIRE
ANTENNA
CONTROL
AND DISPLAY
PANEL
ENT
ANTENNA
COUPLER
POWER
AMPLIFIER
UNIT
RECEIVER/
EXCITER
UNIT
28 V DC BUS 1
HF
CPLR 28 V DC BUS 1
HF
PWR
ICN-19-A-155022-G-00005-10004-A-01-1
Figure 7-2. HF Radio System - Schematic Diagram

12
14-12-12 Page 9 of 12
HF RADIO SYSTEM CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS

Page 10 of 12 14-12-12
10
3
7
8
ICN-19-A-155022-G-00005-10003-A-01-1
Figure 7-3. HF Radio System - Controls and Displays

12
14-12-12 Page 11 of 12
Key to Figure 7-2

Ref. Control/ Display Function
1 Display Shows frequencies, modes, channels and
other data.
2 TEST button Press to start the built-in functional test.
3 FUNC button Press to enter and select sub-functions.
4 TX light The light is on when the system transmits.
5 Outer selector knob Rotate to select frequency, channel numbers
and other options.
6 Inner selector knob Rotate to select frequency, channel numbers
and other options.
7 Enter button Press to store data into the system memory.
8 ON/OFF knob Press to switch the system ON or OFF.
Turn to adjust the volume.
9 Function selector knob Rotate to select one of the following options:
FREQ. The upper row of the display shows
the receive frequency. The indication RX is
also displayed.
CHAN. Allows the selection of one of the
100 programmable channels available.
MOD. Allows the selection of one of the fol-
lowing emission modes: Upper Sideband
Voice (USB V), Upper Sideband Data (USB
D), AM Voice (AM).
SQL. Allows the selection of one of the fol-
lowing squelch types: Syllabic Squelch High
(SBH), Syllabic Squelch Low (SBL), Signal/
noise Squelch High (SQH), Signal Level
Squelch (SQL). The value of the active
squelch is displayed in the right bottom row
of the display.
OPT. Allows the selection of one of the fol-
lowing options: clarifier, maritime radiotele-
phone network channel operation, transmit
power selection.
10 EMER button Press to get access to the selection of the
emergency channels.
Page 12 of 12 14-12-12
Optional Equipment Supplements CVDR
EASA Approval N° 10042641, REV. 1


COCKPIT VOICE DATA RECORDER

(CVDR)
The Cockpit Voice Data Recorder system (CVDR) P/N 109G3130F01

allows recording of several helicopter parameters and audio signals in
a solid state, non volatile memory. The CVDR system mainly consists
of:
— a CVDR unit, located in the baggage compartment;
— a CVDR control panel, located on the overhead console;
— FDR FAULT / CVR FAULT indicator, located on the upper LH sec-
tion of the instrument panel;
— a cockpit microphone, located on the windshield central post;
— an impact switch, located in the baggage compartment.
The unit provides comprehensive Built-In Test (BIT) functions. The
Flight Data Recorder (FDR) and the Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR)
functions are separately monitored. Failure of the FDR and/or of the
CVR functions cause the illumination of the associated caution
message on the instrument panel.

CVDR Optional Equipment Supplements

Optional EquipmentSupplements CVDR
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
N° 10042641, REV. 1



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 0
A-1 and A-2 0
B-1 and B-2 0
i thru iv 0
1 thru 4 of 10 0
5 thru 10 of 10 0
14-12-12 B-1
B-2 14-12-12
COCKPIT VOICE DATA RECORDER

(CVDR)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page

PROCEDURES
WARNING SYSTEM..................................................................4 of 10
CAUTION LIGHTS (YELLOW) ............................................. 4 of 10
14-12-12 Page i
Page
GENERAL..................................................................................5 of 10
CVDR SYSTEM CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ............... 9 of 10
Page ii 14-12-12
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
7-1. Cockpit Voice Data Recorder - Model FA23XX

MADRAS ........................................................................ 6 of 10
14-12-12 Page iii

Page iv 14-12-12

After the CVDR system installation the new empty weight and CG
10
CVDR Optional EquipmentSupplements
PRE-FLIGHT CHECK
CVDR Test
BATT : ON.
FDR FAULT and CVR FAULT lights : 5 seconds after GEN BUS
power-up, check both lights
extinguished.
CVDR test : Press and hold the TEST switch

on CVDR control panel for at
least five seconds;
Check TEST green lamp stays
on (TEST lamp stays on as long
as the TEST button is pressed).
BATT : OFF.

(Every flight)
BATT : ON.
FDR FAULT and CVR FAULT lights : 5 seconds after GEN BUS
power-up, check both lights
extinguished.
CVDR test : Press and hold the TEST switch

on CVDR control panel for at
least five seconds;
Check TEST green lamp stays
on (TEST lamp stays on as long
as the TEST button is pressed).
BATT : OFF.
10

WARNING SYSTEM
CAUTION LIGHTS (YELLOW)
Caution wording Fault condition Corrective action

CVR FAULT Failure of the cockpit Proceed with flight.
voice recorder.
FDR FAULT Failure of the flight Proceed with flight.

data recorder.
No change.

No change.
GENERAL
The Cockpit Voice Data Recorder (CVDR) System Model FA23XX
MADRAS consists of:
— a Recorder Unit;
— a Control Unit;
— an Area Microphone;
— a Mounting Tray.
The CVDR is housed in ARINC 404A, 1/2-ATR short case (refer to
Figure 7-1).
10
14-12-12 Page 5 of 10
A
E
A
MICROPHONE C
B
D
ACCELEROMETER
E CVDR CONTROL PANEL

IMPACT
B SWITCH
5 4 3 2
FDR/CVR
FAULT INDICATOR
DAS
SECTION
D C
1
CSMU
ULD
GSE CONNECTOR CVDR

(behind the cover) UNIT
ICN-19-A-155023-G-00005-10001-A-01-1
Figure 7-1. Cockpit Voice Data Recorder -

Model FA23XX MADRAS
Page 6 of 10 14-12-12
The chassis and Crash Survivable Memory Unit (CSMU) are painted
international orange. Two reflective stripes are located on the CSMU.
The CSMU contains the solid state flash memory used as the
recording medium. The micro Data Acquisition Section (DAS) input is
self-contained in the rear chassis assembly.
An Underwater Locator Device (ULD) is mounted horizontally on the
front of the CSMU and is also used as the recorder’s carrying handle.
The Ground Support Equipment (GSE) connector is located on the
front of the MADRAS. This connector provides the interface from the
recorder to GSE for checkout of the recorder, or to transfer data to a
readout devices.
The CVDR is a “On Condition Line Replaceble Unit” (LRU) that
simultaneously records both cockpit voice and flight data.
The CVDR recording starts when the electrical system is powered on.
The Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR) function simultaneously records
four separate channels of cockpit audio, converts the audio to a digital
format, and stores the data in a solid state memory.
The CVDR-MADRAS records a minimum of 120 minutes of high
quality audio from the following four cockpit audio inputs:
— Channel 1: Pilot’s Audio;
— Channel 2: Co-Pilot’s Audio;
— Channel 3: Operator’s Audio;
— Channel 4: Cockpit Area Microphone (CAM) Audio.
The Flight Data Recorder (FDR) function receives flight data at 256
words-per-second (wps). The flight data is stored in flash memory
segregated from the cockpit voice data. The CVDR is capable of
storing a minimum of 25 hours of flight data. Flight data stored in 25-
hour configuration CVDRs can be downloaded in approximately five
minutes.
Previously recorded voice information cannot be read from the CVDR
while it is installed in the aircraft. However, the flight data may be
monitored real time, or copied out to the Ground Station Equipment.
10
14-12-12 Page 7 of 10
The following information and data are provided to CVDR unit:

— A collection of Engines’ and Helicopter’s parameters,
WARNING/CAUTION/ADVISORY messages by mean of serial
con-nection between the Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) of the Inte-
grated Display System (IDS) and the CVDR unit;
— Flight controls position by means of synchro-transmitters located
on flight controls rods underneath pilot’s seats;
— Helicopter’s center of gravity accelerations by means of acceler-
ometer located in the rear avionic bay;
— Airspeed and altitude by means of serial connection between the
Air Data Unit (ADU) and the CVDR;
— Pilot/co-pilot’s and operator’s ICS communications, cockpit and
passengers cabins audio signals by means of an area microphone
located in the cockpit’s front window central post (left side).
Page 8 of 10 14-12-12
CVDR SYSTEM CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS

Operator’s interface with CVDR unit is obtained by means of a control
panel located in cockpit roof, in the vicinity of overhead panel.
The control panel is shown in Figure 7-1.
Key to Figure 7-1
Ref. Control/ Display Function
1 FDR/CVR fault indicator FDR FAULT
OFF - The system is operative (goes off
within 5 seconds)
ON - The indicator comes on within 5 sec-
onds if no data is received from the DAS
section.
CVR FAULT
OFF - The system is operative (goes off
within 5 seconds)
ON - If the indicator comes on within 60 sec-
onds, a possible CVDR system hardware
problem exists.
2 ERASE push-button Is used to activate the bulk erase function.
Press and hold this push-button for a mini-
mum of 2 seconds.
3 Headset jack Lets connection of the headset.
4 TEST led The led is green when the TEST push-but-
ton is pressed. If the test fails the led does
not come on.
5 TEST push-button When pushed, performs the CVR test by
injecting a tone into the four audio channels.
If the test fails, the TEST led does not come
on.
10
14-12-12 Page 9 of 10
Page 10 of 10 14-12-12
Optional Equipment Supplements SWE400
Document No. 109G0040A017 Camera


Note
The "No Hazard" certification demands that the replace-
ment of any equipment subject to this supplement is not
allowed without the approval of the Manufacturer and of
the competent Authority.
Changes to helicopter configuration (installation of approved
equipments) are allowed only upon removal of the equipment
subject of this supplement or after specific approval of the
Manufacturer and of the competent Authority.
SWE400 CAMERA
The SWE400 camera system P/N 109G9300F04 is a Quad Camera
platform installed on a gyro stabilized camera gimbal attached to a
structural frame installed on the left hand side of the helicopter forward
fuselage and connected to the fuselage via the standardized
Emergency Floats attachment hard points.
The SWE400 system consists of the following Line Replaceable Units
(LRU):
— Turret Camera Unit (TCU);
— Hand Control Unit (HCU);
— Interface Unit (IFU);
— Monitor.
Copy assigned to helicopter S/N:14707, 14732, 14735.

REVISION 1: 24 JANUARY 2014
SWE400 Optional Equipment Supplements
Camera Document No. 109G0040A017

LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
N° 10047601
1 Revised pages Title page, A-1 and Approved under the
B-1. Authority of DOA
N° EASA 21J.005
dated 24 January 2014



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 1
A-1 1
A-2 0
B-1 1
B-2 0
i thru iv 0
1 thru 6 of 14 0
7 thru 14 of 14 0
23-12-13 B-1
B-2 23-12-13
SWE400 CAMERA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
FLIGHT CREW ..........................................................................1 of 14

NUMBER OF SEATS ................................................................1 of 14
AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS (IAS)................................................1 of 14
MISCELLANEOUS LIMITATIONS ............................................1 of 14
SWE 400 CAMERA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS ....................... 1 of 14
PLACARDS ...............................................................................2 of 14
ENGINE PRE-START CHECK ..................................................4 of 14
SYSTEMS CHECK ....................................................................5 of 14
HOVER TAXIING AND TAKE-OFF ...........................................5 of 14
IN FLIGHT .................................................................................5 of 14
APPROACH AND LANDING ....................................................6 of 14
23-12-13 Page i
Page

PROCEDURES 6 of 14
Page ii 23-12-13
Page
GENERAL .................................................................................7 of 14
SWE400 SYSTEM CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS ....................9 of 14
TURRET CONTROLS ........................................................ 10 of 14
TV CAMERA CONTROL FUNCTIONS .............................. 12 of 14
IR CAMERA CONTROL FUNCTIONS ............................... 12 of 14
UV CAMERA CONTROL FUNCTIONS .............................. 14 of 14
DSLR CAMERA CONTROL FUNCTIONS (HCU) .............. 14 of 14
23-12-13 Page iii

LIST OF FIGURES
Page
1-1. Cockpit Placards ............................................................. 2 of 14

7-1. SWE400 Camera System - Component Location.......... 8 of 14
7-2. SWE400 Camera System - HCU ................................... 9 of 14
Page iv 23-12-13
FLIGHT CREW
The minimum flight crew consists of one pilot who shall operate the
helicopter from the right crew seat.
The SWE400 camera system must be operated by an operator in the
passenger cabin.
NUMBER OF SEATS
Five (Pilot included).

Maximum airspeed
with Turret Camera Unit operative or in stowed position ....... : 138 KIAS
SWE 400 CAMERA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
Ambient Air Temperature Range

with Turret Camera Unit operative or stowed............ : -20 °C to 50 °C
Taxiing, takeoff and landing with the Turret Camera Unit in unstowed
position is prohibited.
14
SWE400 Optional EquipmentSupplements
PLACARDS
CAUTION
THE TURRET CAMERA UNIT MUST
BE IN STOWED POSITION DURING
TAXIING, TAKE-OFF AND LANDING
B
SWE 400 CAMERA
MAXIMUM AIRSPEED
138 KIAS
ICN-19-A-155024-G-A0126-01001-A-01-1
Figure 1-1. Cockpit Placards

PRE-FLIGHT CHECK
Mount Assembly and

Turret Camera Unit (TCU) : Security and wiring properly
connected.
Check TCU in stowed position
and lens for condition.
Passenger cabin
(under aft facing seat row)
Interface Unit (IFU) : Security and wiring properly

connected.
Hand Control Unit (HCU)

and monitor : Check condition, wiring properly
connected stowed and secured.
14
(Every flight)
(AREA N° 6 (Fuselage - LH side)
Mount Assembly and

Turret Camera Unit (TCU) : Security and wiring properly
connected.
Check TCU in stowed position
and lens for condition.
Passenger cabin
(under aft facing seat row)
Interface Unit (IFU) : Security and wiring properly

connected.
Hand Control Unit (HCU)

and monitor : Check condition, wiring properly
connected stowed and secured.
CAUTION
The SWE400 system must be switched OFF at engine

starting to eliminate any system damage from voltage tran-
sients.
CAMERA breaker : Check IN.
Hand Control Unit (Operator's check) : Check that the system is OFF.

SYSTEMS CHECK
Operator in passenger cabin:
Monitor and Hand Control Unit (HCU) : Remove from storage.

Position the monitor on the first
row seats and secure.
HCU : Switch the system ON.
Monitor : Turn on and verify that the

camera moved to CAGE
position, initializes and properly
displays the image of the
selected video mode.
HCU : Operate the joystick to verify

that the TCU may be
commanded in the azimuth and
elevation axes.
Null out drift components, if any,
by pushing the appropriate trim
adjust button.
Stow the TCU.
Monitor and HCU : Stow and secure.
HOVER TAXIING AND TAKE-OFF

Turret Camera Unit (TCU) : Confirm in stowed position.
Monitor and HCU : Confirm stowed and secured.
IN FLIGHT
SWE 400 system : As required.
14

HCU : Set the TCU in stowed position.
Shut the system down.
Monitor and HCU : Stow and secure.

CAUTION
In any emergency condition the Monitor and the Hand

Control Unit must be stowed and secured before landing.
No change.

No change.
GENERAL
The SWE400 camera system P/N 109G9300F04 contains the
following cameras:
— High Resolution Thermal camera with radiometric capabilities;
— High Definition Video Camera;
— Bi-Spectral UV Camera;
— Digital SLR Frame Camera.
The SWE400 system consists of the following Line Replaceable Units

(LRU):
— Turret Camera Unit (TCU);
— Hand Control Unit (HCU);
— InterFace Unit (IFU);
— Monitor.
The SWE400 camera system is operated by an operator seated at the
second passenger seat row.
The HCU and the monitor are stowed in housing provided under the
passenger aft facing seat row. (refer to Figure 7-1)
14
23-12-13 Page 7 of 14
3 4 5
ICN-19-A-155024-G-A0126-01002-A-01-1
1. Turret Camera Unit (TCU)

2. CAMERA Breaker
3. InterFace Unit (IFU)
4. Hand Control Unit (HCU)
5. Monitor
Figure 7-1. SWE400 Camera System - Component Location
Page 8 of 14 23-12-13
SWE400 SYSTEM CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS

The operator’s interface with the SWE400 camera system is obtained
by means of a Hand Control Unit (HCU) located under the passenger
aft facing seat row.
The HCU is shown in Figure 7-2.
ICN-19-A-155024-G-A0126-01003-A-01-1
Figure 7-2. SWE400 Camera System - HCU
14
23-12-13 Page 9 of 14
TURRET CONTROLS
Power ON/OFF Switch

This power select switch is used to control power distribution. When
this switch is in the OFF position, all power is removed from the
system and the TCU. When the switch is placed in ON mode, the TCU
is steerable, all electronics are powered and video is present.
Joystick
A Joystick mounted on the HCU controls the position of the TCU. This
control translates the direction and amount of applied movement into a
command used to steer the TCU. When a small amount of movement
is applied to the Gimbal Joystick, the TCU will respond by moving
slowly in the commanded direction. A large movement will command
the TCU to rotate in the commanded axis at a faster speed.
Cage
The Cage position is a user configurable position that places the Line
Of Sight (LOS) of the Turret at a predetermined azimuth and elevation
position (generally 0°azimuth, 0° elevation). This provides the
operator with a known start position to operate from.
Any Joystick input will disable the Cage position Mode.
— To configure and store the Cage position, use the joystick and nav-
igate to the desired Cage angle. The angle will be stored when
Cage button is hold and Ok button is pressed.
Stow (Menu + Cage)

The Stow Command is used to protect the optics of the system when
the system is not currently in use. This position is generally pointed in
the aft position, with the elevation axis full up.
— To Enter Stow position use Menu + Cage button.
— To Disable Stow position use Menu + Cage button again.
Page 10 of 14 23-12-13
Azimuth and Elevation Trim Adjust (Menu + arrows)

The Azimuth and Elevation Trim Adjust commands are used to trim
out any drift component that may exist in either of the axes. When a
drift component exists in either axis, pushing the appropriate trim
adjust button will null out the drift component.
It may be necessary to null out the drift component upon start up and
then again after the system operating temperature stabilizes.
Note that Drift components only can be “nulled out” in Joystick mode.
Joystick Gain
By adjusting on the dial you can increase or decrease the gain
between joystick and TCU.
Invert Joystick (Menu + Video)

The Joystick elevation movement can be inverted by using Menu +
Video button. This change can only be made when TV mode is chosen.
Video
The Video button enables TV, IR or UV Modes. Controls with multiple
functions are activated depending on which mode is selected.
14
23-12-13 Page 11 of 14
TV CAMERA CONTROL FUNCTIONS
Focus (Focus Wheel)

The focus knob has multiple functions. Rotating the Focus knob
moves the TV focus far or near.
By pressing the knob you enter Auto Focus mode. The AF mode is
disabled when rotating the knob again.
Zoom
It is a two way switch for zoom capability. The switch will control the
optical continuous zoom features of the TV camera.
TV Digital Zoom (Menu + Zoom)

Digital zoom is enabled or disabled by pressing Menu and Zoom
button (Forward to enable and backwards to disable).
Iris
Use the Up/Down Arrow Buttons to adjust the IRIS.
Gain
Use the Left/Right Arrow Buttons to adjust the GAIN.
Auto Exposure (OK)

The Auto Exposure command will set the camera to Auto Exposure
mode. It means both Auto Iris and Auto Gain.
IR CAMERA CONTROL FUNCTIONS
Focus
The focus knob has multiple functions. Rotating the Focus knob
moves the IR focus far or near.
By pressing the knob you enter Auto Focus mode. The AF mode is
disabled when rotating the knob again.
Page 12 of 14 23-12-13
Zoom
It is a two way switch for zoom capability. The switch will control the
digital continuous zoom features of the IR camera.
Palette (Function + Video)

The Palette command changes the IR camera colors, there are
several different palettes.
Level
Use the Up/Down Arrow Buttons to adjust the temperature Level in the
picture.
Span
Use the Left/Right Arrow Buttons to adjust the temperature Span in the
picture.
Auto Adjust (OK)

The Auto Adjust command will toggle the camera to auto adjust or
manual mode.
NUC (Menu + OK)

When using this command the camera will perform a Non Uniformity
Correction (NUC).
Save IR Image (AUX)

Use Aux button to store thermal Images to the computer if used.
Ensure proper connections:

- Ethernet Connection from Gimbal to Computer.
- Communication Cable between IFU and Computer.
14
23-12-13 Page 13 of 14
UV CAMERA CONTROL FUNCTIONS
Gain (Left/Right Arrows)

Increase or decrease Gain level by pressing Right or Left arrows.
Blob Counter mode (OK)

Choose Blob counting mode by pressing the OK button.
Zoom Mode (Menu+Zoom)

Enable Digital Zoom mode by pressing Menu button + Zoom Forward.
Disable Zoom Mode by pressing Menu + Zoom Backward.
UC Color (Menu+Video)
Switch the color of the UV blobs.
DSLR CAMERA CONTROL FUNCTIONS (HCU)
Trigger
The Trigger button will send a store command to the DSLR camera.
Each time the button is pressed another picture will be stored inside
the camera.
Make sure to have the Nikon GPS Antenna connected; each picture
will have the GPS position in the Meta Tag Data.
Focus
The Focus button will send an AF command to the DSLR camera.
DSLR Camera Settings and Downloads.

Parameters and settings for the DSLR camera can be controlled from
a Laptop using the USB connection and the Nikon Remote Software.
Same interface is used to download images after the inspection.
Page 14 of 14 23-12-13
Optional Equipment Supplements Rearview Mirrors
Approved with NDC-109G2590-002

dated 23 May2019
under the authority of DOA ref EASA.21J.005

REARVIEW MIRRORS
The Rearview Mirrors installation P/N 109G2590F01 consists of two

mirrors installed on supports fitted on the right and left hands side of
the helicopter nose.
ISSUE 1: 23 MAY 2019

Rearview Mirrors Optional Equipment Supplements

Optional EquipmentSupplements Rearview Mirrors
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT APPROVAL
No.
— Issue 1 Approved with
NDC-109G2590-002
dated 23 May 2019
under the authority of
DOA ref EASA.21J.005



Revision Revision
Page Page
N° N°
Title page 0
A-1 and A-2 0
B-1 and B-2 0
i thru iv 0
1 and 2 of 4 0
3 and 4 of 4 0
23-05-19 B-1
B-2 23-05-19
REARVIEW MIRRORS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
PRE-FLIGHT CHECKS .............................................................. 1 of 4

PILOT’S PRE-FLIGHT CHECK ............................................. 1 of 4

MALFUNCTION PROCEDURES 2 of 4
23-05-19 Page i
Page
GENERAL................................................................................... 3 of 4
Page ii 23-05-19
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
7-1 Rearview Mirrors Installation .......................................... 4 of 4
23-05-19 Page iii

Page iv 23-05-19
No change.
PRE-FLIGHT CHECKS
(Every flight)
1. Rearview Mirror : - Condition, cleanliness and

secure.
1. Rearview Mirror : - Condition, cleanliness and

secure.

Rearview Mirrors Optional EquipmentSupplements

No change.
No change.
4

No change.
GENERAL
The rearview mirrors installation consists of two metallic tubular
frames used to fit the two rearview mirrors.
Each frame is connected to the external surface of the helicopter by
mean of three constraints. The frames are located in the helicopter
nose fuselage in order to have the mirror in the pilot and copilot field of
views (Figure 7-1).
23-05-19 Page 3 of 4
Rearview Mirrors Optional EquipmentSupplements
A
VIEW LOOKING INBORD RIGHT SIDE
1
1
ICN-19-A-155000-G-00005-01001-A-01-1
Figure 7-1. Rearview Mirrors Installation

4
Page 4 of 4 23-05-19
AW119 MKII RFM Part II
PART II
MANUFACTURER’S DATA
Document No. 109G0040A017 Revisions
LIST OF REVISIONS
REVISION
SUBJECT DATE
No.
— First Issue 11 June 2007
1 — Not affected
2 Revised pages C-1, 7-i and 7-ii. 26 July 2010
Added pages 7-14A thru 7-14D.
3 — Not affected
4 Revised pages C-1, 6-i, 6-8, 6-9, 6-11 thru 24 February 2011
13, 6-15 thru 6-17 and entirely Section 9.
3 — Not affected
4 — Not affected
5 — Not affected
6 — Not affected
7 — Not affected
8 — Not affected
9 Revised pages C-1, 7-ii, 7-3, 7-4, 7-4A and 14 December 2012
7-4B .
11-06-07 C-1
Revisions Document No. 109G0040A017
C-2 11-06-07
Document No. 109G0040A017 Weight and Balance
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
GENERAL ....................................................................................... 6-1

DATUM LINE LOCATIONS ............................................................. 6-2
DOORS OPEN OR REMOVED ....................................................... 6-3
WEIGHTS - ARMS AND MOMENTS .............................................. 6-4
LONGITUDINAL MOMENTS ...................................................... 6-4
LATERAL MOMENTS................................................................. 6-7
ALLOWABLE BAGGAGE LOAD ................................................... 6-8
LATERAL ARMS....................................................................... 6-10
COMPUTATION OF LOADING ..................................................... 6-11
LONGITUDINAL LOADING SAMPLES .................................... 6-11
LATERAL LOADING SAMPLE ................................................. 6-12
WEIGHT AND BALANCE DETERMINATION............................... 6-14
WEIGHT AND BALANCE DATA RESPONSIBILITY ................ 6-14
HELICOPTER WEIGHING ....................................................... 6-14
USE OF CHARTS AND FORMS................................................... 6-15
USE OF CHART A.................................................................... 6-15
USE OF CHART B.................................................................... 6-15
USE OF CHART C.................................................................... 6-16
11-06-07 Page 6-i

Weight and Balance Document No. 109G0040A017
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
6-1. Stations and Butt Lines ........................................................6-2

6-2. Baggage Loading Zone........................................................6-9
Page 6-ii 11-06-07

LIST OF TABLES
Page
6-1. Weight and moment adjustment .......................................... 6-3

6-2. Pilots and Passengers ......................................................... 6-4
6-3. Usable fuel - Main fuel tank (for JP5 / JET A / JET A-1)...... 6-5
6-4. Unusable fuel for (JP5 / JET A / JET A-1) ........................... 6-6
6-5. Engine oil (Arm 4673) .......................................................... 6-6
6-6. Undrainable engine oil (Arm 4673) ...................................... 6-6
6-7. Main transmission oil (Arm 3355) ........................................ 6-6
6-8. Usable fuel - Main fuel tank (for JP5 / JET A / JET A-1)...... 6-7
6-9. Baggage moment ................................................................ 6-8
6-10. Example of baggage loading ............................................... 6-9
6-11. Lateral arms....................................................................... 6-10
6-12. Longitudinal loading sample a) .......................................... 6-11
6-13. Longitudinal loading sample b) .......................................... 6-12
6-14. Longitudinal loading sample c) .......................................... 6-12
6-15. Lateral loading sample....................................................... 6-13
11-06-07 Page 6-iii

Page 6-iv 11-06-07

SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
Note
In accordance with EASA procedures, the detail weight
and balance data of this Section are not subject to EASA
approval.
The loading instructions of this Section, however, have
been accepted by EASA as satisfying all requirements for
instructions on loading of the rotorcraft within approved
limits of weight and center of gravity, and on maintaining
the loading within such limits.
GENERAL
This Section provides information for the weight and balance
computation of the AW119 MKII helicopter.
It is the pilot’s responsibility to ensure that the helicopter is properly
loaded to maintain for the duration of the flight the Center of Gravity
(CG) within the limitations defined in Section 1 of the Rotorcraft Flight
Manual.
WARNING
Operation outside of prescribed weight and balance
limitation could result in an accident and serious or fatal
injury.
Figures, charts and examples are provided to assist the pilot in
computing the proper loading conditions.
11-06-07 Page 6-1


Figure 6-1 presents fuselage stations and butt lines data to aid in
weight and balance computations.
STA 0 STA 3380
BAGG.
REF. TO FIG. 6-2
AFT JACK
FORWARD
POINTS
JACK POINT
STA 4475
STA 1785
FUEL CG BL 450
BL 0
LOCATION BL -450
VARIABLE WITH
QUANTITY
STANDARD VERSION
PILOTS AND PASSENGERS STATION
+
BL
0
-
STA 0
STA 1585 * STA 3200

BL 350 ** BL 430
BL -325 ***
STA 2455
BL 430
* ADJUSTABLE FROM 1565 TO 1630

** PILOT
*** COPILOT/PASSENGER
ICN-19-A-156000-G-A0126-00001-A-01-1
Figure 6-1. Stations and Butt Lines

Page 6-2 11-06-07
DOORS OPEN OR REMOVED

Opening or removing doors results in center of gravity changes. Door
removal or opening is limited to passenger doors. The table below lists
weight and moment adjustments which shall be made in determining
the gross weight and CG when doors are opened or removed.
Table 6-1. Weight and Moment Adjustment
Weight Arm Moment

Door configuration change change
(kg) (mm) (kg mm)
Right sliding door removed -8.000 2650 -21200
Left sliding door removed -8.000 2650 -21200
Right sliding door fully open – 3650 +8000
Left sliding door fully open – 3650 +8000
11-06-07 Page 6-3

WEIGHTS - ARM AND MOMENTS
Table 6-2. Pilots and Passengers
Pilot (*) Passengers Passengers

Copilot or 3 places 3 places
Passenger central seat aft seat
Weight aft facing
(kg)
(Arm 1585) (Arm 2455) (Arm 3200)
Moment Moment Moment
(kg mm) (kg mm) (kg mm)
60 95100 147300 192000
65 103025 159575 208000
70 110950 171850 224000
75 118875 184125 240000
80 126800 196400 256000
85 134725 208675 272000
90 142650 220950 288000
95 150575 233225 304000
100 158500 245500 320000
120 198125 294600 384000
140 221900 343700 448000
160 253600 392800 512000
180 285300 441900 576000
200 31700 49100 640000
220 540100 704000
240 589200 768000
260 638300 832000
280 687400 896000
300 736500 960000
320 785600 1024000
(*) Adjustable from 1565 to 1630 mm
Page 6-4 11-06-07

Table 6-3. Usable fuel - Main fuel tank (for JP5 / JET A / JET A-1)
Weight Capacity l Arm Moment

(kg) (0.8 kg/l) (mm) (kg mm)
20.0 25.0 3324 66480
40.0 50.0 3327 133080
60.0 75.0 3329 199740
80.0 100.0 3331 266480
100.0 125.0 3399 339900
120.0 150.0 3461 415320
140.0 175.0 3505 490700
160.0 200.0 3539 566240
180.0 225.0 3543 637740
200.0 250.0 3551 710200
220.0 275.0 3571 785620
240.0 300.0 3614 867360
260.0 325.0 3662 952120
280.0 350.0 3703 1036840
300.0 375.0 3739 1121700
320.0 400.0 3770 1206400
340.0 425.0 3797 1290980
360.0 450.0 3821 1375560
380.0 475.0 3843 1460340
400.0 500.0 3863 1545200
420.0 525.0 3880 1629600
440.0 550.0 3897 1714680
460.0 575.0 3911 1799060
476.0 595.0 3912 1862112
11-06-07 Page 6-5

Table 6-4. Unusable fuel for (JP5 / JET A / JET A-1)
Weight l Arm Moment

(kg) (0.8 kg/l) (mm) (kg mm)
8 10 3320 26560
Table 6-5. Engine oil (Arm 4673)
Weight Liter Moment

(kg) (l) (kg mm)
10.2 10.45 47665
Table 6-6. Undrainable engine oil (Arm 4673)
Weight Liter Moment

(kg) (l) (kg mm)
1.6 1.64 7477
Table 6-7. Main transmission oil (Arm 3355)
Weight Liter Moment

(kg) (l) (kg mm)
10 10.3 33550
Page 6-6 11-06-07

LATERAL MOMENTS
Table 6-8. Usable fuel - Main fuel tank (for JP5 / JET A / JET A-1)
Weight Capacity l BL Moment

(kg) (0.8 kg/l) (mm) (kg mm)
20.0 25.0 -330 -6600
40.0 50.0 -330 -13200
60.0 75.0 -330 -19800
80.0 100.0 -330 -26400
100.0 125.0 -330 -33000
120.0 150.0 -330 -39600
140.0 175.0 -236 -33040
160.0 200.0 -165 -26400
180.0 225.0 -110 -19800
200.0 250.0 -66 -13200
220.0 275.0 -30 -6600
240.0 300.0 0 0
260.0 325.0 0 0
280.0 350.0 0 0
300.0 375.0 0 0
320.0 400.0 0 0
340.0 425.0 0 0
360.0 450.0 0 0
380.0 475.0 0 0
400.0 500.0 0 0
420.0 525.0 0 0
440.0 550.0 0 0
460.0 575.0 0 0
476.0 595.0 0 0
11-06-07 Page 6-7


maximum baggage load for each zone is presented. The maximum
allowable baggage load is 150 kg.
The following table defines the baggage moments for each zone. The
maximum allowable baggage moment is 734000 kg mm.

Arm 4880 Arm 5240 Arm 5560 Arm 5960 Arm 6430
Baggage
Baggage moment (kg mm)
load (kg)
10 48800 52400 55600 59600 64300
20 97600 104800 111200 119200 128600
30 146400 157200 166800 178800 192900
40 195200 209600 222400 238400 257200
50 244000 262000 278000 298000 321500
60 292800 314400 333600 357600 385800
70 341600 366800 389200 417200 450100
80 390400 419200 444800 476800 514400
90 439200 471600 500400 536400 578700
100 488000 524000 556000 596000 643000
105 512400 550200 583800 625800 675150
108 527040 564920 600480 643680 694440
110 536800 576400 611600 655600
115 561200 602600 639400 685400
120 585600 628800 667200 715200
123 600240 644520 683880 733080
130 634400 681200 722800
132 644160 691680 733920
135 658800 707400
140 683200 733600
150 732000
Page 6-8 11-06-07

Rev. 4
An example of baggage loading is provided below; the total baggage

moment shall be less than 734000 kg mm.

Weight Moment
(kg) (kgmm)
Zone 1 50 244000
Zone 2 40 209600
Zone 3 20 111200
Zone 4 10 59600
Zone 5 — —
Total 120 624400
STA 4760
STA 4460
STA 5045
STA 5372
STA 5767
STA 6249
STA 6633
(Max. load 150 kg)
(Max. load 108 kg)

(Max. load 140 kg)
(Max. load 132 kg)
(Max. load 123 kg)

AVIONIC BAY
ZONE 1
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
ZONE 5
ICN-19-A-156000-G-A0126-00002-A-01-1
Figure 6-2. Baggage Loading Zone

11-06-07 Page 6-9
Rev. 4
LATERAL ARMS
Table 6-11. Lateral arms
Butt line (Arm)

Item
(mm)
Pilot +350
Copilot/passenger -325
Passengers See Figure 6-1
Baggage 0
Engine oil 0
Transmission oil 0
Page 6-10 11-06-07

COMPUTATION OF LOADING
LONGITUDINAL LOADING SAMPLES
The empty weight and moment of the A119 helicopter can be found in
Chart B (Helicopter Weighing Record). The values in Chart B are
obtained by weighing the aircraft and computing the empty weight,
moment and CG therefrom.
Subsequently as items of equipment are added or removed, entries
shall be made in Chart C (Basic Weight and Balance Record) and the
new empty weight and moment computed.
The empty weight includes fixed ballast, hydraulic fluid, transmission
oil, engine oil and unusable fuel.
Three sample loadings are shown below (in the sample loading the
empty weight and CG arm are assumed to be 1541 kg and 3703 mm).
Table 6-12. Longitudinal loading sample a)
a) Weight CG Arm Moment

Item
(kg) (mm) (kg mm)
Empty Weight 1541 3703 5706323
Pilots (2) 160 1585 253600
Passenger (1 right) 80 2455 196400
Passenger (1 center) 80 2455 196400
Passenger (1 left) 80 2455 196400
Baggage 50 5240 262000
Fuel (JET A-1) 100 3399 339900
Take-off weight 2091 3420 7151023
11-06-07 Page 6-11

Rev. 4
Table 6-13. Longitudinal loading sample b)
b) Weight CG Arm Moment

Item
(kg) (mm) (kg mm)
Empty Weight 1541 3703 5706323
Pilot 70 1585 110950
Passengers (3) front 250 2455 613750
Passengers (3) rear 220 3200 704000
Baggage 90 5240 471600
Fuel (JP-5) 370 3832 1417840
Take-off weight 2541 3552 9024463
Table 6-14. Longitudinal loading sample c)
c) Weight CG Arm Moment

Item
(kg) (mm) (kg mm)
Empty weight 1541 3703 5706323
Pilots (2) 150 1585 237750
Passengers (3) front 220 2455 540100
Passengers (3) rear 200 3200 640000
Baggage 125 5240 655000
Fuel (JET A-1) 476 3912 1862112
Take-off weight 2712 3555 9641285
Empty weight 1541 3703 5706323
The weight - CG combination in the three examples above fall within

the approved limits
Page 6-12 11-06-07

Rev. 4
LATERAL LOADING SAMPLE
The empty weight CG is assumed to be at station ”- 4 mm“ unless a

different entry has been made in Chart C. With the empty CG at
station ”- 4 mm“ the approved lateral loading limits will not be
exceeded if passengers are seated with the sequence shown in the
example given below.
Table 6-15. Lateral loading sample
Weight CG Arm Moment

Item
(kg) (mm) (kgmm)
Empty Weight 1541 -4 -6124
Pilot 80 350 28000
Pass (1) right 80 430 34400
Pass (1) center 80 0 0
Pass (1) left 80 -430 -34400
Fuel (JET A-1) 240 0 0
Take-off weight 2101 10 21836
The weight-CG combination computed above falls within the approved

limits.
11-06-07 Page 6-13

Rev. 4
WEIGHT AND BALANCE DETERMINATION

Instructions for weight and balance determination are herewith
enclosed with instructions for use of charts to enable the operator to
obtain all necessary data as to basic helicopter configuration, empty
weight and center of gravity. These charts will also provide for
continuous control of weight and balance of the helicopter.
This system of weight and balance computation requires the use of
charts and forms. They are identified as follows:
a. Chart A - Equipment List.
b. Chart B - Helicopter Weighing Record.
c. Chart C - Basic Weight and Balance Record.
d. Chart D - Data for Helicopter Weight and Balance Computation
e. Chart E - Weight and Balance Computation
WEIGHT AND BALANCE DATA RESPONSIBILITY
The aircraft manufacturer inserts all helicopter identifying data on the

various charts. This record constitutes the basic weight and balance
data of the helicopter, to which the Rotorcraft Flight Manual was
assigned, for the condition shown on Chart A. The operator shall keep
this data up-to-date by recording all changes made to the
configuration of the helicopter.
HELICOPTER WEIGHING
The helicopter must be weighed:
a. When major modifications or repairs are made, or optional equip-

ment are installed/removed.
b. When the basic weight data is suspected to be in error.
c. At time of major overhaul.
d. In accordance with EASA instructions.
Page 6-14 11-06-07

USE OF CHARTS AND FORMS
USE OF CHART A
The Chart A gives the weight, arm and moment of all the basic and
optional equipment. The manufacturer of the helicopter places check
marks in the ”Basic Configuration” column to identify which items are
installed in the helicopter during the weighing. A check (V) in the
columns headed ”In Helicopter” indicates the presence of the item in
the helicopter, and a zero (0) indicates its absence. The next columns
of Chart A will permit inspection of the helicopter for equipment
actually installed. When making an inventory, note whether any items
have been installed or removed and if so enter corresponding weight
and moment change on Chart C.
Subsequent check list inventories shall be carried out in the following
cases:
a. When the helicopter undergoes modification, major repair or over-

haul.
b. When changes in equipment are made for a different type of oper-

ation.
c. When the helicopter is reweighed.
USE OF CHART B
a. Enter the actual scale readings in the first column of sheet 1. Sub-
tract tare, if any, from the scale readings to obtain the net weight.
b. Multiply the net weights by their respective arms.
c. Add the net weight and moments.
d. Divide the total moment by the net weight to obtain “as weighed“
CG position. Transfer the “TOTAL“ (as weighed) weight arm and
moment to the sheet 2 of Chart B.
e. Subtract the total weight and moment of equipment weighed but

not part of the basic helicopter (list these items in column one).
11-06-07 Page 6-15

Rev. 4
f. Add the weight and moment of unusable fuel.
g. Add the total weight and moment of the basic items not in helicop-
ter when weighed (list these in column two). Added items shall be
marked on Chart A.
h. Enter the new basic weight and moment on Chart C.
USE OF CHART C
Chart C is a continuous history of the basic weight and moment

resulting from modifications and equipment which alter the current
weight and balance status of the basic helicopter. Make additions or
subtractions to the basic weight and moment in Chart C as follows:
a. When the helicopter undergoes modification, major repair or over-

haul.
b. When changes in equipment are made for a different type of oper-

ation
When the helicopter is reweighed.
Note
If any equipment is not listed on Chart A, determine its
weight and arm, and list corresponding data on Charts A
and C.
USE OF CHART D
Chart D provides information necessary for weight and balance com-

putation.
Page 6-16 11-06-07

Rev. 4
USE OF CHART E
Chart E serves as a work sheet and records the calculations and any
corrections that must be made to ensure that helicopter will be within
weight and CG limits.
Note
A Chart E shall be filled prior to any flight.
a. Enter the helicopter basic weight and moment. Obtain these values
from the last entry on Chart E.
b. Enter the weight of all applicable items in the marked “Weight”.

Obtain the corresponding arms from Chart D and calculate the
moments.
c. Add weights and add moments. Divide total moment by total weight
to obtain CG arm.
d. Ascertain that CG is within allowable limits.
e. Should corrections be required, readjust ballast to return CG within

allowable limits.
11-06-07 Page 6-17

Rev. 4
Page 6-18 11-06-07

WEIGHT AND BALANCE
ICN-19-A-156000-G-A0126-00003-A-01-1
HELICOPTER AW119 MKII
SERIAL NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REGISTRATION MARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-06-07 Page 6-19

Page 6-20 11-06-07

RECORD OF CHECKING
For all pages of Chart A: Page 1 of 1 (Date and Signature)
Means installed on the helicopter
Means not installed on the helicopter CHART A - EQUIPMENT LIST

Report 109G0840W030
MODEL: AW119 MKII REGISTRATION MARKS S/N
Chart C entry
Chart C entry
Chart C entry
configuration
In helicopter
In helicopter
In helicopter
POWER PLANT SYSTEM
Basic
ITEM WEIGHT ARM MOMENT
Q.ty
NUMBER (Kg) (mm) (Kg mm)
P/N DENOMINATION
11-06-07 Page 6-21

Page 6-22 11-06-07

CHART B - HELICOPTER WEIGHING RECORD Sheet 1 of 2
MODEL: S/N: REGISTRATION MARKS:
DATE: PLACE: SIGNATURE:
Reason for weighing:
Scale type:
STA BL
NET LONGITUDINAL LATERAL
JACKPOINTS SCALE READING TARE
WEIGHT MOMENT MOMENT
(1) (2)
(Kg) (Kg) (Kg) (mm) (Kg mm) (mm) (Kg mm)
FORWARD 1785 0
LH AFTERWARD 4475 -450
RH AFTERWARD 4475 450
TOTAL ( as weighed ) ( to Sht. 2 of 2)
Note 1
The forward lower Central Cabin is provided by two FWD jack points, only one FWD jack point is
assured by using a proper tool which collect both jacking points.
The Station Reference Datum ( STA 0 ) is located 1785 mm forward the FWD jack points. Therefore
the STA are positive.
E = Distance from the reference datum (STA 0) to the FWD jackpoint Station of 1785 mm.
F = Distance from the reference datum (STA 0) to the LH and RH aft jackpoints Station of 4475 mm.
Note 2
The Butt Line Reference Datum ( BL 0 ) is located on the fuselage Center Line.
AW119 MKII RFM
Therefore the BL are negative on the Left Hand side and positive on the Right Hand side.
DATUM
F
11-06-07
ICN-19-A-156000-G-A0126-00004-A-01-1
Page 6-23
Section 6
Weight and Balance
Page 6-24 11-06-07

CHART B - HELICOPTER WEIGHING RECORD Sheet 2 of 2
NET WEIGHT STA LONG. MOMENT BL LAT. MOMENT
DESCRIPTION
(Kg) (mm) (Kg mm) (mm) (Kg mm)
TOTAL ( as weighed ) ( from Sht. 1 of 2 )
SUBTRACT ( from Tab. 1 )
ADD ( from Tab. 2 )
BASIC AIRCRAFT ( to Chart C )
TABLE 1 ITEMS WEIGHED BUT NOT PART OF BASIC WEIGHT
WEIGHT STA LONG. MOMENT BL LAT. MOMENT

DENOMINATION

AW119 MKII RFM
TOTAL
TABLE 2 BASIC ITEMS NOT INSTALLED WHEN WEIGHED
WEIGHT STA LONG. MOMENT BL LAT. MOMENT

DENOMINATION
TOTAL
Weight and Balance
11-06-07
Reasons of the weighing: Type Scales:
NOTE:
Section 6
Page 6-25
Remove the weight of the mission equipment items, which are pointed out in Chart A
Page 6-26 11-06-07

CHART C - BASIC WEIGHT AND BALANCE RECORD Page N°

MODEL S/N REGISTRATION MARKS
Item n° LOADING CHANGE BASIC WEIGHT, MOMENT & CG
see
DATE Chart A DENOMINATION WGT STA LONG BL LATERAL LONG STA LATERAL BL
WGT
IN OUT (3) CG MOMENT CG MOMENT MOMENT CG MOMENT CG SIGNAT.
( Kg )
( Kg ) ( mm ) ( Kg mm ) ( mm ) ( Kg mm ) ( Kg mm) ( mm ) ( Kg mm ) ( mm )
(1) (2)
Note 1 IN = installed component Note 2 OUT = removed component

Note 3 Weight of an installed component is positive (+) Weight of a removed component is negative (-)
11-06-07 Page 6-27

Page 6-28 11-06-07

CHART D - DATA FOR HELICOPTER WEIGHT & BALANCE COMPUTATION
MODEL AW119 MKII
JACKPOINTS LOCATION
RIGHT AFT
FORWARD
BL 450 mm
HELICOPTER CENTER LINE
BL -450 mm
STA STA LEFT AFT

1785 mm 4475 mm

ICN-19-A-156000-G-A0126-00005-A-01-1
AW119 MKII RFM

Longitudinal sta 0 (datum) is 1785 mm forward of the front jackpoint.
Weight and Balance

11-06-07
Section 6
Page 6-29
Page 6-30 11-06-07

CHART E - WEIGHT & BALANCE COMPUTATION FORM
MODEL S/N REGISTRATION MARKS DATE PLACE COMPUTED
BY
WEIGHT STA LONG.MOMENT BL LAT.MOMENT

Ref. ITEM
1 HELICOPTER BASIC (Ref. To Chart C)
2 PILOT
3 COPILOT
4 PASSENGER
5 PASSENGER
6 PASSENGER
7 PASSENGER
8 PASSENGER
9 PASSENGER
10 LOOSE EQUIPMENT LOAD

11 CABIN LOAD
AW119 MKII RFM

12 BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT LOAD
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21 DRY WEIGHT
22 FUEL (at Take-off)
23 GROSS WEIGHT (at Take-off)
24 FUEL (at Landing)
25 GROSS WEIGHT (at Landing)
26 BALLAST (if required)
LIMITATIONS REMARKS
Weight and Balance
11-06-07
Section 6
Page 6-31
Refer to Section 1
Page 6-32 11-06-07

SECTION 7
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................. 7-1

HELICOPTER DESCRIPTION ........................................................ 7-1
MAJOR ZONES............................................................................... 7-2
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONSOLES ...................................... 7-3
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM ................................................. 7-7
ADVISORY MESSAGES AND STATUS INDICATIONS ............ 7-9
POWER PLANT ............................................................................ 7-11
ENGINE OIL SYSTEM .................................................................. 7-13
ENGINE MONITORING SYSTEM .............................................. 7-14A
SYSTEM OPERATION .......................................................... 7-14B
FUEL SYSTEM.............................................................................. 7-15
FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEMS ..................................................... 7-17
HYDRAULIC POWER ................................................................... 7-21
N.1 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM....................................................... 7-21
N.2 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM....................................................... 7-21
ELECTRICAL POWER.................................................................. 7-23
DC ELECTRICAL SYSTEM...................................................... 7-23
AC ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ...................................................... 7-24
HELIPILOT SYSTEM .................................................................... 7-26
LIGHTING SYSTEMS.................................................................... 7-28
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT ......................................................... 7-30
FIRST AID KIT (IF INSTALLED)............................................... 7-30
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER (IF INSTALLED) .............. 7-30
11-06-07 Page 7-i

Rev. 2
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
7-1. Airframe Major Zones ..........................................................7-2

7-2. (sheet 1 of 2) Instrument Panel (typical) ..............................7-3
7-2. (sheet 2 of 2) Instrument Panel (alternative)........................7-4
7-3. (sheet 1 of 2) Front Console (typical)................................ 7-4A
7-3. (sheet 2 of 2) Front Console (alternative) ......................... 7-4B
7-4. Central Console (typical)......................................................7-5
7-5. Overhead Console (typical) .................................................7-6
7-6. Advisory Lights Message and Status Indications.................7-9
7-7. Pratt & Whitney Canada PT6B-37A Build Spec.1242 Engine .7-12
7-8. Engine Oil System Schematic............................................7-14
7-8A. Engine Monitoring System - Controls and Indicators...... 7-14D
7-9. Fuel System Schematic .....................................................7-16
7-10. Flight Controls System.......................................................7-18
7-11. Collective Grip Assembly (typical) .....................................7-19
7-12. Cyclic Grip Assembly (typical) ...........................................7-20
7-13. Hydraulic Power Schematic ...............................................7-22
7-14. Electrical Power Schematic ...............................................7-25
7-15. Helipilot System Schematic ...............................................7-27
7-16. Lighting Systems................................................................7-29
7-17. Emergency Equipment.......................................................7-31
Page 7-ii 11-06-07

Rev. 9
LIST OF TABLES
Page
7-1. List of advisory messages and status indication................ 7-10
11-06-07 Page 7-iii

Page 7-iv 11-06-07

Document No. 109G0040A017 System Description
SECTION 7
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
INTRODUCTION
This section provides a general description of the AW119 MKII
helicopter systems.
HELICOPTER DESCRIPTION
The AW119 MKII helicopter is a high-speed, high performance, multi-
purpose helicopter powered by a single Pratt & Whitney Canada
PT6B-37A Build Specification 1242 turboshaft engine, with four-
bladed fully articulated main rotor, two-bladed tail rotor and a fixed
landing gear skid.
The airframe consists of two major assemblies: the forward fuselage
and the aft fuselage (tail boom).
The forward fuselage comprises the nose section, the cabin and the
rear section. The nose section houses the electrical and electronic
equipment.
The cabin includes the crew compartment (cockpit) and the passenger
compartment. Seating is provided for the pilot (right side) and a
passenger (or copilot) in the cockpit, and up to six passengers in the
relevant compartment.
The rear section accommodates the fuel tanks, the electrical and
electronic equipment compartment and the baggage compartment.
The landing gear skid is secured to the undersides of the cabin and
rear sections.
The upper deck, located above and aft of the cabin area,
accommodates the hydraulic system reservoirs and filter groups, the
main transmission, the oil cooler and the engine.
The tail boom is bolted to the forward fuselage and supports the tail
rotor and the relevant drive system. The tail boom includes the
stabilizers, the upper and lower vertical fins, the tail skid and the tail
cone.
11-06-07 Page 7-1

System Description Document No. 109G0040A017
MAJOR ZONES
Refer to Figure 7-1 for the airframe major zones.
1 2 3 4
11 10 9 8 7 6 5
ICN-19-A-157000-G-A0126-00001-A-01-1
1. Main rotor
2. Upper deck
3. Tail rotor
4. Tail cone
5. Tail boom
6. Fuselage rear section
7. Fuel tank compartment
8. Avionic equipment compartment
9. Cabin
10. Skid landing gear
11. Nose compartment
Figure 7-1. Airframe Major Zones

Page 7-2 11-06-07
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONSOLES

Refer to Figure 7-2 for instrument panel, to Figure 7-3 for front
console, to Figure 7-4 for central console and to Figure 7-5 for
overhead console.
12 3 1 2 4 5
7 10 11 8
13 6
ICN-19-A-157000-G-A0126-00002-A-01-1
1. Master Caution Light (MCL)

2. Master Warning Light (MWL)
3. Airspeed indicator
4. Attitude Director Indicator (ADI)
5. Encoder altimeter
6. Dual tachometer
7. Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
8. Integrated Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
9. Magnetic compass
10. Radar altimeter
11. Clock
12. EDU 1 (primary)
13. EDU 2 (secondary)
Figure 7-2. (sheet 1 of 2) Instrument Panel (Typical)
11-06-07 Page 7-3

Rev. 9
22 15 12 3 1 2 4 16
14 18
19
13 29 6 7 10
26 28 15
25 27 12 3 1 2 4 14
16
24 17
18
5
9
23
8
19
22 21 13 20 6 7 10
ICN-19-A-157000-G-00005-10001-A-01-1
14. ICS/ON 22. ELT remote switch

15. RAD MSTR/ON 23. IFF control panel
16. SPKR/ON 24. V/UHF control panel
17. XMTR/ON 25. IDS FAN
18. RCVRS/ON 26. FDR/CVR FAULT
19. Digital clock 27. V/UHF CODE ERASE
20. Radio magnetic indicator (RMI) 28. IBF
21. HF control panel 29. HOOK Load indicator
Figure 7-2. (sheet 2 of 2) Instrument Panel (Alternative)
Page 7-4 11-06-07

Rev. 9
1
ICS CREW 2
ACTV STBY GARMIN GNC 250 ICS SPKR
V
CLR ENT ON ON
H
F G
2 CRSR P RAD
RCVRS
S MSTR
ON ON
SQ D NRST RTE WPT NAV MSG
IDS 2 3
V V FAN
H O
F USE STBY USE STBY/RAD R
1 KX 165 TSO COMM NAV
1 4 9
PULL PULL
25K RAD
PULL PULL
OFF TEST IDENT
5 6
RMT FREQ GS/T
D 92.4 112.30
M NM MHZ
FRESH
AIR
E
OFF ON
A HEAT
D ON
COND
OFF
F
ADF BFO FRQ FLT / SET /
ET RST
GND 7
X
P
IDT
u
FL
999 888 ALT ON
GND SBY
R
TST
SBY
ON
ALT
OFF
D
R
VFR
BENDIX/KING 8
ICN-19-A-157000-G-A0126-00003-A-01-1
1. GPS control panel (if installed)

2. ICS control pushbutton switches
3. RAD/MSTR pushbutton switch
4. VHF control panel (if installed)
5. DME control panel (if installed)
6. Cabin ventilation knob
7. ADF control panel (if installed)
8. XPDR control panel (if installed)
9. IDS FAN caution light
Figure 7-3. (sheet 1 of 2) Front Console (Typical)
11-06-07 Page 7-4A

Rev. 9
10
11
12
7 6
ICN-19-A-157000-G-00005-10002-A-01-1
10. Garmin GNS430

11. Hook load indicator
12. Hoist display indicator
Figure 7-3. (sheet 2 of 2) Front Console (Alternative)

Page 7-4B 11-06-07
Rev. 9
I ON
SERVO AWG F-TRIM
C C
C VHF1 VHF2 VOR DME ADF MKR
S O O 1 OFF REGRADE ON
2
N N
M HOT N O
R
O
R
P XMTR
FAIL MIC T M M
M OFF R 2 OFF TEST OFF
L
T ICS NORM VOX OFF RCVR
COMPASS
I ON +
+ MAG
C
S C VHF1 VHF2 VOR DME ADF MKR C 3
O O
M
N DG
C XMTR HOT
T
FAIL MIC
P M OFF R
L
ICS NORM VOX OFF RCVR
T
4 PITCH ROLL YAW
H
E C
L O
I N
5 P
SAS 2
PUSH + T
I AUTO R
L O
O SAS 1 SAS 2 ATTD HOLD TRIM COUPL
L
T
OFF OFF DECOUPL
FUEL OPEN
ON ON XFER
P P
PRE
ST
S E
S
U
TO T
U P V
6 M
P
M
P
U A
M L
P V
1 2 E
OFF OFF OFF
CLOSED
ICN-19-A-157000-G-A0126-00004-A-01-1
1. Pilot ICS control panel (if installed)

2. Miscellaneous control panel
3. Gyrocompass control panel
4. Copilot ICS control panel
5. Helipilot control panel
6. Fuel management control panel
Figure 7-4. Central Console (typical)
11-06-07 Page 7-5

115 VAC 26 VAC

SAS VG GYRO ADI VG SAS SAS ADF GYRO SAS
1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 3
1 1 COMP 2 2 1 CONV COMP 2
DC BUS
HOIST
AI ELT EMER FIRE SUN CHIP
CARGO SAFETY STBY PWR CABLE CABLE CTL FLOATS EXTING LT BURNER
HOOK HOOK CUT 1 CUT 2
EMS
FIRE
1
O2 OUTLET OUTLET DET
IND 12VDC 28VDC
GPS IDENT NAV ADF MB DME NAV RAD RADIO
71 2 5 3 11 2 3 10 2 1
COMM XPDR COMM ALTM VENT
1
INV SAS SPKR INTERCOM VENT RADIO GYRO HSI SAS INV
20 5 10 11 2 11 2 10 1 3 1 5 20
1 1 AMPL CPLT CREW PLT CKPT MASTER COMP 2 2
LT SYS CHIPS ATT DCU
2 1 71 2 71 2 1 25 1 3 1 1
BAGGAGE SRCH SRCH CPLT OVHD INST PLT LDG LDG RLYS ENGAGE
CTL PWR CKPT CSL PNL CKPT PWR CTL
FUEL SYS FORCE CAWS EMER STARTER GEN
1 5 71 2 712 712 5 5 12 10 5 5
QTY VALVE PUMP 1 PUMP 2 XFER TRIM BUS CTL START IGN
RLY
GOV HYD IDS EDU EEC EEC
5 5 11 2 5 5 1 71 2 5
CTL SYS FAN 1 2 ITT TEST
EAPS CHIP WIPER HOOK UTIL EMER

OFF BURNER HOIST HOOK OFF FLOATS
C P
P L
L
T T
ON UTIL ARMED
ON ON ON ARMED
LT SYS
PASS WRN CABIN POS OVHD & CSL INST PNL A-COLL
OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON ON ON OFF BRT OFF BRT ON
HEATER/ECS SYSTEM
OFF OFF OFF ECON
ENG HTR
OFF
IGN
OFF
INV1
OFF
INV2
OFF
2
A
U
T
O
ON ON ON NORM ON CONT ON ON E
S/OFF
MIX L
E
+
VENT PITOT BUS GEN C
OFF OFF OFF RESET BAT T
L C O O
K F F
O P F F
W T
HIGH ON ON ON
ON
ICN-19-A-157000-G-A0126-00005-A-01-1
1. Circuit breaker panel
2. Electrical control panel
Figure 7-5. Overhead Console (typical)

Page 7-6 11-06-07
INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM

The Integrated Instrument Display System (IDS) consists of two
Electronic Display Unit (EDU) capable of displaying all the aircraft
parameters, warnings, messages and annunciations necessary to
operate the aircraft.
The Primary unit (EDU1) in the upper position displays primary flight
parameters and all the warnings, cautions and annunciations. The
Secondary unit (EDU2) in the lower position displays secondary
parameters concerning the fuel system, hydraulic systems, electrical
AC and DC systems, engine and transmission oil systems.
The following operating modes are available on the EDUs:
Primary mode : This is the normal operating mode on EDU1
when both displays are active. The indications
available are: N1, ITT, TQ, N2 and NR together
with all the WARNING, CAUTION, ADVISORY
and STATUS messages. The ITT markings dif-
fer between engine start and normal engine
conditions in accordance with the certified limits.
Secondary mode : This is the normal operating mode on EDU2
when both displays are active. The indications
available are engine oil pressure and tempera-
ture, transmission oil pressure and temperature,
fuel pressure and fuel quantity (LH & RH), n.1 &
n.2 hydraulic systems pressure, DC electrical
system load and voltage, AC electrical system
voltage, OAT and clock.
Reversionary mode : In the event one EDU fails, the remaining unit
switches to this mode displaying all the Primary
mode information together with the critical infor-
mation of the Secondary Mode in order to con-
duct the flight.
Specific maintenance pages are accessible on each EDU when the
aircraft is on ground (rotor RPM below 75%). These pages are
intended for use by ground personnel. The information available is:
Exceedance log : N1, N2, NR, ITT and TQ limits are monitored in
real time from engine start to engine shutdown.
In the event of an exceedance of one these
11-06-07 Page 7-7

parameters, the max value, duration outside the

approved limits and description of the exceed-
ance are logged together with the time the event
occurred.
Fault log : If a warning or caution message is displayed in
flight, its occurrence is logged together with the
duration of the event. If the message is triggered
by a specific flight parameter (such as the
hydraulic pressure), the max/min value of the
parameter is logged as well.
EEC Fault log : The current status of the EEC internal fault log is
accessible through each EDU. Detected faults
leading to an EEC FAIL condition are marked as
critical. Those leading to an EEC DEGRADED
condition are marked as noncritical. Historical
faults are accessible as well.
Calibration page : This page is intended to set the offset on certain
sensors. In addition to this, the collective posi-
tion and the throttle position indications are dis-
played in order to check the rigging.
Configuration page : The IDS hardware and software configuration is
displayed together with the EDU Built In Test
Log. Date, Time and aircraft configuration can
be updated as well.
Each EDU features an ON/OFF switch, two keys to allow for
brightness control and five keys on the bottom of the display. These
are used to perform an EDU test, scroll warning and caution
messages, access maintenance information such as the logs, and to
access the configuration page as well.
The EDUs are provided with a cooling fan. The cooling fan failure is
indicated by the activation of an IDS FAN caution light on the front
console.
Note
For a correct and complete use of the I.D.S., refer to Astro-
nautics A119 I.D.S. Pilot’s Guide, pubblication
n. PLG08909D.
Page 7-8 11-06-07

ADVISORY MESSAGES AND STATUS INDICATIONS

(Figure 7-6)
The EDU1 presents a specific area, at the LH side of the display,
capable of displaying up to 18 lines of 15 characters each, for warning,
caution, advisory and status messages.
The order of priority of the displayed messages is: warnings, cautions,
advisories and status. The “last-in” message goes always on the top
of the relative screen area and displace the existing list down.
When the messages list exceeds 18, the additional caution/advisory/
status messages can be displayed by pressing the MORE key on the
bottom side of the EDU, while the warning messages always remain
displayed at the top of the list.
WARNING
WARNING
ON CAUTION
CAUTION ITT°C TQ%
ADVISORY 755 100
ADVISORY
STATUS
OFF
NR%
BRT 102
N1% N2%
100.0 102
ICN-19-A-157000-G-A0126-00006-A-01-1
Figure 7-6. Advisory Lights Message and Status Indications
11-06-07 Page 7-9

The following table provides a list of the advisory messages and

status annunciations displayable on the IDS.
Table 7-1. List of advisory messages and status indication
PANEL WORDING EXPLANATION

ENG START Engine starter activated.
IGNITER ON Engine ignition system activated.
PITOT HEAT Pitot heater activated.
LANDING LT ON Landing/taxi lights are activated.
FT OFF Force trim is deactivated.
VENT ON Cockpit forced ventilation activated.
The calibration curve offset of one or
CHECK DATA more parameters in the CAL page
exceeds ±3% of the full scale.
Entries present in the maintenance
MAINTENANCE
pages of IDS.
One or more entries are present in the
CHECK EDU
internal BIT log of one EDU.
Page 7-10 11-06-07

POWER PLANT
(Figure 7-7)
The AW119 MKII helicopter is powered by a single Pratt & Whitney
Canada PT6B-37A Build Specification 1242 turboshaft engine.
The engine is a free turbine turboshaft propulsion engine incorporating
a compressor consisting of 3 axial stages and 1 centrifugal impeller
driven by a single-stage compressor turbine. Metered fuel from the
fuel control unit is sprayed into an annular combustion chamber by
fourteen (14) individual fuel nozzles mounted around the gas
generator case.
The engine is separated into two modules:
— power section module;
— reduction gearbox module.
The power section module incorporates the cold section and the hot
section, whilst the reduction gearbox module reduces turbine speed to
a range suitable for the main and tail rotor drive.
Power is managed by an electronic-hydro pneumatic control system.
The mode select torque motor is used to select the mode of
governing. It is actuated by an EEC/MEC mode select switch located
in the cockpit. In case of emergency the EEC is by-passed and
mechanical Nf governing starts.
The manual override system enables the pilot to manually modulate
fuel low directly with the PLA twist grip on the collective lever.
11-06-07 Page 7-11

FWD
REDUCTION
POWER SECTION MODULE GEARBOX
MODULE
POWER
ACCESSORY GEARBOX TURBINE AND
GAS GENERATOR SECTION
SECTION EXHAUST
SECTION
FLANGE G FLANGE C FLANGE A
FWD
ICN-19-A-157000-G-A0126-00007-A-01-1
Figure 7-7. Pratt & Whitney Canada PT6B-37A Build Spec. 1242 Engine
Page 7-12 11-06-07
ENGINE OIL SYSTEM

(Figure 7-8)
The engine oil system consists of a pressure system, a scavange
system and breather system. The oil tank is integrated in the engine
air inlet case and incorporates a drain plug to permit oil drainage. Two
chip detectors, one located in the accessory gearbox and the other in
the reduction gearbox detect ferrous metal particles and warn pilot of
metal contamination.
A low pressure switch is installed in the pressure line; the switch is
electrically connected to both EDUs, but the ENG OIL PRESS warning
and caution messages are displayed only on EDU1.
A temperature switch is located on the return line from the oil cooler;
the switch is electrically connected to both EDUs, but the ENG OIL
HOT warning message is displayed only on EDU1.
A temperature and a pressure transmitter are connected to the
pressure line; the transmitters are electrically connected to both
EDUs, but the engine temperature/pressure indicators are displayed
only on EDU2.
The operation of the oil system is fully automatic and therefore no
action is required from the pilot except for monitoring of the system
indicator and relative caution lights.
11-06-07 Page 7-13

OIL FILLER CAP

AND LEVEL DIPSTICK
FWD
ENGINE
ENGINE OIL TANK

THERMOSTATIC
BYPASS VALVE

PSI °C PSI °C AMP VDC ENG OIL HOT
28.0
ON ON ENG OIL PRESS
1 VAC 2 ENG AGB CHIPS TQ%
110 120
ITT°C
ENG RGB CHIPS 755 100
93 62 35 57 200
OFF OFF
FUEL HYD OAT
PSI KG PSI °C
25
TIME
13:23:54
NR%
BRT BRT 102
N1% N2%
14 201 202 1495 1493 100.0 102
EDU 2 EDU 1
TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
DRAIN TRANSMITTER SWITCH
PRESSURE MAGNETIC CHIP

DETECTOR DRAIN VALVE
RETURN PRESSURE
VENT TRANSMITTER
ELECTRICAL CONN LOW PRESSURE

SWITCH
ICN-19-A-157000-G-A0126-00008-A-01-1
Figure 7-8. Engine Oil System Schematic

Page 7-14 11-06-07
ENGINE MONITORING SYSTEM

(Figure 7-8A)
The Aircraft Data Acquisition System (ADAS) is a recording device
and exceedance monitor. It is designed as a tool for the maintenance
staff to monitor the overall health of the aircraft as well as to document
any abuse while in service. The system records the date, time,
duration, maximum value and average value of any exceedance. It
counts cycles, records flight times, identifies and measures hot starts
and records the maximum value observed by each sensor during
flight. Identification of exceedances or hot start temperatures are
based on user-programmed values for these limits.
The engine/aircraft parameter monitored are mainly:
— Inlet Turbine Temperature (ITT)
— DC Voltmeter
— Torque
— Compressor Speed (N1)
— Turbine Speed (N2)
— Rotor Speed (NR).
With the exception of the ENG MON / TREND switch/fault lamp, the
ADAS has no interface with the aircraft pilot or crew. Communication
with the system processor is done using a WindowsTM based
computer and Altair Avionics Monitor Link Program (MLP). All features
of the ADAS are set using MLP.
Note
Required engine maintenance, as prescribed in the appli-
cable airframe or engine documentation, shall not be pred-
icated on the data obtained from the ADAS.
Note
This system shall not be used to supersede or replace the
pilot's responsibility to monitor and record engine exceed-
ance information.
11-06-07 Page 7-14A

Rev. 2
Because the ADAS may be programmed with engine operating limits

different from those in the Rotorcraft Flight Manual, the rotorcraft's
existing engine instruments shall be used to ensure that the engine is
operated within the limits specified in the Rotorcraft Flight Manual, and
shall also be used to identify exceedances of these limits.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The system incorporates a single ENG MON / TREND switch/fault
lamp (ENG MON identifies the switch, TREND is the fault lamp). The
lamp ENG MON / TREND switch/fault lamp is white in color. When
power is first applied to the processor, the TREND fault lamp will
illuminate for approximately 1 to 5 seconds while the system performs
self-tests. If any of these tests fail, the TREND fault lamp will remain
on.
Note
The TREND fault lamp may momentarily flash during the
self-test. This is normal and is part of the lamp self-test.
If the test passes, the TREND fault lamp will extinguish and the
processor will enter a system state as described below:
TREND fault lamp off - Normal State:

This is the normal condition of the ADAS when all systems checks
have passed and there are no previous flight exceedances recorded.
TREND fault lamp flashing, extinguishing when pressing ENG

MON switch - Maintenance State:
When the ADAS is in Maintenance State, either a previous flight
exceedance has occurred, or the system has detected a minor fault
condition that will not affect its ability to function as an exceedance
monitor.
Page 7-14B 11-06-07

Rev. 2
TREND fault lamp flashing, NOT extinguishing when pressing

ENG MON switch - Caution State:
When the ADAS is in Caution State, the system has detected a fault
condition that may affect its ability to function as an exceedance
monitor.
TREND fault lamp Solid - Fault State:

When the ADAS is in Fault State, the system has detected a fault
condition that WILL affect its ability to function as an exceedance
monitor.
Note
The ADAS will extinguish any of the above TREND fault
lamp conditions once the engine has started.
Once the engine has been started the ADAS TREND fault lamp is
used to display trend and exceedance information to the pilot and/or
crew as follows:
Trend Mode:
The ADAS can be configured to take an automatic trend sample
whenever certain engine/flight conditions are met. Once the trend
criteria are met, the system will collect a sample of data for later
review by maintenance personnel. During this trend sample the ADAS
TREND fault lamp will flash at a slow (1 Hz) rate. Pressing the ENG
MON switch will manually initiate the same trend data sample.
Exceedance Mode:
exceedance Mode is defined as anytime the aircraft or engine has met
the criteria defined for an exceedance. exceedance Mode is displayed
to the pilot via a 2 Hz lamp flash.
The exceedance can be configured such that exceedance Mode can
be acknowledged by pressing the ENG MON switch. If configured this
way, the exceedance Mode TREND fault lamp display will extinguish
when the ENG MON switch is pressed.
11-06-07 Page 7-14C

Rev. 2
Engine Functions:
The ADAS monitoring system monitors and records engine run, trend,
cycle and exceedance information.
ICS CREW
STBY GARMIN GNC 250 ICS SPKR

ACTV
V
CLR ENT ON ON
H
F G
2 CRSR P RAD
RCVRS
S MSTR
ON ON
SQ D NRST RTE WPT NAV MSG
ENG MON
IDS
FAN
V V TREND
H O
F USE STBY USE STBY/RAD R
1 KX 165 TSO COMM NAV
1
1
PULL PULL
25K RAD
PULL PULL
OFF TEST IDENT
RMT FREQ GS/T

D
92.4 112.30
M FRESH
NM MHZ AIR
E
OFF ON
A
HEAT
ON
D COND
OFF
F
FLT/ SET/
ADF BFO FRQ ET RST
GND
ALT ON R
X IDT
u
999 888
TST ON
SBY ALT
P FL GND SBY
OFF
D
R
VFR
BENDIX/KING
ICN-19-A-157000-G-A0126-000018-A-01-1
1. ENG MON / TREND switch/fault lamp
Figure 7-8A. Engine Monitoring System - Controls and Indicators
Page 7-14D 11-06-07

Rev. 2
FUEL SYSTEM
(Figure 7-9)
The fuel system consists of the following sub-systems:
— the storage system
— the distribution system
— the indication system.
The storage system consists of two main lower tanks, the left (n.1) that
feeds the engine and the right (n.2) that transfers fuel to the left tank,
and one main upper tank, connected to both lower tanks.
The distribution system comprises two fuel pumps on the LH (n.1)
lower tank, a transfer pump on the RH (n.2) lower tank, three pressure
switches, a shut-off valve and a pressure transducer. The indicating
system comprises the pressure indicating system, the fuel quantity
indicating system and the fuel low caution circuit, all electrically
connected to both EDUs. The caution message is displayed only on
EDU1 while the fuel pressure and quantity indications are displayed
only on EDU2.
11-06-07 Page 7-15

ENGINE
EDU 2

28.0
ON
1 VAC 2
110 120
ENGINE 93 62 35 57 200
DRIVEN PUMP OFF
FUEL HYD OAT
AND FILTER PSI KG PSI °C
BYPASS 25
VALVE TIME
13:23:54
BRT
DIFFERENTIAL
ENGINE OIL - TO PRESSURE
14 201 202 1495 1493
- FUEL HEATER SWITCH

(IMPENDING
BYPASS)
OPEN
FIRE WALL
V PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
A FUEL
L COMPUTER
V UNIT
E
CLOSED RESTRICTOR
SHUT OFF VALVE

(WITH THERMAL RELIEF)
FLAME
ARRESTOR
UPPER PROBE
UPPER TANK
CHECK FWD PROBE

VALVE
FWD PROBE
XFER
PUMP
REAR
PROBE
FUEL PUMP EJECTOR FLAPPER

UNIT VALVE
FUEL TANK (LH) FUEL TANK (RH)
EDU 1
FUEL
PRESSURE ON ON XFER
P P
TRANSFER U U P FUEL LOW
M U ON FUEL PUMP 1
VENTS M M FUEL PUMP 2 TQ%
ITT°C
RETURN P P P FUEL FILTER 755 100
XFER PUMP
DRAINAGE 1 OFF 2 OFF OFF
FLOW FAIL
OFF
ELECTRICAL
DRAIN VALVE NR%

BRT 102
N1% N2%
100.0 102
CHECK VALVE
ICN-19-A-157000-G-A0126-00009-A-01-1
Figure 7-9. Fuel System Schematic

Page 7-16 11-06-07
FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEMS

(Figure 7-10)
The flight control systems provide the correct control responses when
the pilot makes control selections, giving him positive control of the
attitude, speed and altitude of the helicopter. The helicopter is provided
with conventional flight controls: collective pitch lever, cyclic stick and
tail rotor pedals. A mixing unit in the collective/cyclic control systems
integrates the control inputs from both systems and provides a
common output to the collective/cyclic actuators. Refer to Figure 7-11
for the collective grip assembly and to Figure 7-12 for the cyclic grip
assembly.
11-06-07 Page 7-17

SWASHPLATE ASSY
FLIGHT CONTROLS ACTUATORS
PITCH & ROLL SAS LINEAR ACTUATORS

TAIL ROTOR
TAIL ROTOR ACTUATOR
CYCLIC STICK MIXING UNIT
COLLECTIVE STICK
TOE BRAKE
PEDALS &
T/R CONTROLS
LVDT
ROTARY TRIM ACTUATORS

PITCH & ROLL
ROTARY TRIM ACTUATOR, YAW ICN-19-A-157000-G-A0126-00010-A-01-1
Figure 7-10. Flight Controls System

Page 7-18 11-06-07
2
EEC
1
ON
L BOTH MEC
D T SRCH LT OFF
G A
L X EXT
3
I STOW INC
T T
OFF
N R
L R
7 R I
START
DECR M
RETR
FLOATS
MAN
NOR
4
MAX
IDLE
FLT
1. Landing light control switch

O
F
F
5
2. EEC/MEC switch
3. NR TRIM switch
4. MAN/NOR engine mode selector
5. Red band
6. Engine throttle
6 7. START switch
ICN-19-A-157000-G-A0126-00011-A-01-1
Figure 7-11. Collective Grip Assembly (typical)

11-06-07 Page 7-19
7 8
6
U
P-
HOI ON
ST
WIP CUTT
ER
ER HI
LOW O
RG
CA
T
HOIS
5
OK
HO
9
IM
FCE TR
1 MAS
TER
RST
ICN-19-A-157000-G-A0126-00012-A-01-1
1. Master reset pushbutton switch

2. Force trim pushbutton switch
3. Microphone/ICS trigger switch
4. Beeper trim selector switch
5. Wiper selector switch
6. Cargo hook pushbutton switch (if installed)
7. Hoist switch (if installed)
8. Hoist cable cut pushbutton switch (if installed)
9. FD STBY pushbutton switch
Figure 7-12. Cyclic Grip Assembly (typical)

Page 7-20 11-06-07
HYDRAULIC POWER
(Figure 7-13)
Two independent systems supply the power to operate the flight
control system and are used to provide the hydraulic power for
operation of the main rotor servo actuators (both systems) and the tail
rotor servo actuator (n.1 system only).
The hydraulic power consists of the following sub-systems:
— N.1 hydraulic system;
— N.2 hydraulic system.
N.1 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
This system, which operates at a maximum pressure of 1550 psi,

consists of a suction circuit, a pressure circuit, a return circuit and a
bypass circuit. The hydraulic fluid is contained in the reservoir located
on the right side of the cabin roof. The fluid is sucked by a pump,
driven by the main transmission, and is supplied to the servo actuators
through the filter group and the accumulator. The system is controlled
by the SERVO switch located on the central console. The system
comprises ground test fittings, a pressure monitoring circuit and a low
pressure monitoring circuit.
The system supplies the main rotor servo actuators and the tail rotor
servo actuator.
N.2 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
This system operates as the n.1 system, but it does not boost the tail
rotor servo actuator.
11-06-07 Page 7-21

EDU 2 EDU 1
SUCTION
ENG OIL
PSI °C
XMSN OIL
PSI °C
ELEC
AMP VDC
PRESSURE
28.0
ON ON SERVO 1 RETURN
1 VAC 2 SERVO 2 ITT°C TQ%
110 120
755 100 BYPASS
93 62 35 57 200
OFF
FUEL HYD
OFF ELECTRICAL
OAT
PSI KG PSI °C
25
TIME
13:23:54
NR%
BRT BRT 102
N1% N2%
14 201 202 1495 1493 100.0 102
PRESSURE
TRANSMITTER
CHECK VALVE
PRESSURE GROUND
SERVO TEST FITTING
1 OFF
N RETURN GROUND
O TEST FITTING
R
M
PRESSURE SWITCH
2 OFF
ACCUMULATOR
FUEL
FILTER
RESERVOIR
PUMP
SYSTEM N°2
MAIN ROTOR
SERVO
ACTUATORS
ACCUMULATOR
FUEL
FILTER
TAIL ROTOR
SERVO ACTUATOR
RESERVOIR
PUMP
SYSTEM N°1 ICN-19-A-157000-G-A0126-00013-A-01-1
Figure 7-13. Hydraulic Power Schematic

Page 7-22 11-06-07
ELECTRICAL POWER
(Figure 7-14)
The electrical and electronics systems are powered by a single wire
circuit with common ground return through the helicopter structure.
The helicopter power supplies are:
— 28 V d.c.
— 115 V a.c. 400 Hz single phase
— 26 V a.c. 400 Hz single phase.
A generator, a battery and for ground handling, an external power
receptacle are the dc power main sources.
Two static inverters, powered by dc voltage, are the ac sources.
Both dc and ac power supplies are distributed through a bus bar
system and operated by control switches located on the overhead
console.
The electrical system is interfaced with the voltammeter and with the
caution and warning indication systems.
DC ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
The d.c. electrical system is a 28 V direct current single conductor

system, using the helicopter structure as a negative ground.
The main components of the system are:
— starter generator
— d.c. control box
— battery
— external power receptacle; d.c. relay box.
11-06-07 Page 7-23

Battery
The helicopter is equipped with a 24 V, 27 Ah nickel-cadmium battery
located in the nose compartment.
A temperature switch, inside of the battery and connected to the
warning indication system, detects the internal temperature of the
battery, giving a BATT HOT warning message on EDU1 display in
case of battery overtemperature.
External power
The helicopter is provided with an external power receptacle on the
right side of the fuselage. A microswitch, activated by the receptacle
door, gives the EXT PWR ON caution message on EDU1 display
when the door is in the open condition.
Starter-generator
A starter-generator, installed on the engine accessory gearbox,
provides the power required to start the engine when operated as an
electric starter motor. After engine start the starter-generator, driven
by the engine, reverts into a d.c. generator providing the necessary 28
V d.c. power.
AC ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
The alternating current is supplied by two 250 VA single phase static

inverters via two sensor relays. The inverters require 28 V d.c. input
supplied by the d.c. bus bar. The a.c. supply is controlled through the
INV 1 and 2 switches located on the overhead panel.
Each inverter supplies 115 V a.c. and 26 V a.c. to respective
115 V a.c. and 26 V a.c. distribution busses to which the helicopter
a.c. loads are connected. In the event of an inverter failure, the relative
sensing relay de-energizes, connecting the failed inverter loads to the
other operating inverter.
The voltage indications for both inverters are displayed on EDU2.
Page 7-24 11-06-07

EDU 2 EDU 1

28.0 BATT HOT
ON ON BATT OFF
1 VAC 2 EXT PWR ON
110 120 DC GEN ITT°C TQ%
GEN CONTR
755 100
INV 1 OFF
OFF
93 62
FUEL
35 57
HYD
200
DATA BUS OFF INV 2 OFF
OAT
PSI KG PSI °C
25
TIME
13:23:54
NR%
BRT BRT 102
N1% N2%
14 201 202 1495 1493 100.0 102
#1 26V AC BUS BAR #1 115V AC BUS BAR #2 115V AC BUS BAR #2 26V AC BUS BAR
#1 #2
INVERTER 1 SENSING SENSING INVERTER 2
RELAY RELAY
28V DC BUS BAR GEN BUS BAR
EMERG BUS BAR BATTERY BUS
EMERG BUS GENERATOR

GENERATOR
RELAY BUS RELAY
RELAY
BATTERY EXTERNAL
RELAY POWER
RELAY
EXTERNAL STARTER
POWER GENERATOR
BATTERY
28V DC 26V AC 115V AC
ICN-19-A-157000-G-A0126-00014-A-01-1
Figure 7-14. Electrical Power Schematic

11-06-07 Page 7-25
HELIPILOT SYSTEM
(Figure 7-15)
The system consists of two independent sub-systems controlled by a
common control panel. Each sub-system consists of a computer, two
linear actuators and two position synchro-transmitters (roll and pitch
axes). The linear actuator is inserted in the cyclic pitch control linkage.
The n.1 system, in addition, is provided with a linear actuator and a
position synchro-transmitter for the yaw axis. The linear actuator is
inserted in the tail rotor control linkage. The n.1 computer processes
attitude and heading signals from the vertical and directional
gyroscopes and position signals from the cyclic stick and rudder
pedals position synchro-transmitters and develops the appropriate
control signals for the linear actuators.
The n.2 computer operates in the same manner as the n.1 computer,
but is not provided with the yaw (tail rotor) channel.
The Helipilot system has two modes of operation: stability
augmentation (SAS) and attitude hold (ATTD HOLD).
In the SAS mode, the automatic stabilization system provides a
dampening effect to stabilize the helicopter with respect to external
forces (such as air turbulence, etc.). In this mode, operation of the
Helipilot system does not interfere with attitude changes controlled by
the pilot. In the ATTD HOLD mode, the Helipilot system is capable of
maintaining the attitude of the helicopter, providing the pilot with
limited hands-off flying capabilities. The pilot has the possibility of
trimming the helicopter by operating the beeper trim selector switch on
the cyclic stick grip.
Page 7-26 11-06-07

EDU 1
SAS 1
SAS 2
ON ATT OFF
VG 1 ITT°C TQ%
VG 2 755 100 CONTROL PANEL
PITCH ROLL YAW
OFF
H
E C
L O
I SAS 2 N
P + T
I
PUSH
AUTO R
L
SAS 1 SAS 2 ATTD HOLD TRIM COUPL O
NR% O
T
L
BRT 102
N1% N2% OFF OFF DECOUPL
100.0 102
NO 1
NO 1 COMPUTER
VERTICAL
GYRO
ROLL LINEAR
Y ACTUATOR
YAW
LINEAR R2
ACTUATOR R1
P2
P1
PITCH LINEAR
RATE GYRO ACTUATOR
Y R1 P1
SYNCHRO TRANSMITTERS
R2 P2
NO 2
NO 2 COMPUTER
VERTICAL
GYRO
ICN-19-A-157000-G-A0126-00015-A-01-1
Figure 7-15. Helipilot System Schematic

11-06-07 Page 7-27
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
(Figure 7-16)
The lighting systems include all the lights utilized for the helicopter
interior and exterior illumination.
The exterior lights include three navigation lights, two anticollision
lights and two landing lights.The interior lights include instrument
lights, utility lights and baggage lights.
Page 7-28 11-06-07

8
9
4
10
2 1 ICN-19-A-157000-G-A0126-00016-A-01-1
1. LH landing light (pointing down)

2. Rh landing light (pointing forward)
3. LH spot light
4. RH spot light
5. Upper anticollision light
6. RH stabilizer navigation light (green)
7. Tail cone navigation light (white)
8. LH stabilizer navigation light (red)
9. Lower anticollision light
10. Baggage light (two)
Figure 7-16. Lighting Systems
11-06-07 Page 7-29

EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
(Figure 7-17)
FIRST AID KIT (IF INSTALLED)
The first aid kit consists of a medical bag secured with strips of velcro
to the vertical panel below the rear passenger seat.
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER (IF INSTALLED)
The helicopter is equipped with a portable, manually operated fire

extinguisher installed on the central console, between the pilot’s and
copilot’s (or passenger’s) seats. The mounting bracket is of the quick-
release type, for rapid removal of the fire extinguisher.
Page 7-30 11-06-07

ICN-19-A-157000-G-A0126-00017-A-01-1
1. First aid kid

2. Portable fire extinguisher
Figure 7-17. Emergency Equipment
11-06-07 Page 7-31

Page 7-32 11-06-07

SECTION 8
HANDLING AND SERVICING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
TOWING .......................................................................................... 8-1

PARKING......................................................................................... 8-3
MOORING ....................................................................................... 8-6
SERVICING ..................................................................................... 8-8
11-06-07 Page 8-i

LIST OF FIGURES
Page
8-1. Towing .................................................................................8-2

8-2. Parking in Normal Weather Conditions................................8-4
8-3. All-weather Protective Covers..............................................8-5
8-4. Mooring ................................................................................8-7
8-5. Servicing Diagram................................................................8-8
Page 8-ii 11-06-07

LIST OF TABLES
Page
8-1. Servicing .............................................................................. 8-9
11-06-07 Page 8-iii

Page 8-iv 11-06-07

Document No. 109G0040A017 Handling and Servicing
SECTION 8
HANDLING AND SERVICING
TOWING
(Figure 8-1)
The helicopter can be manoeuvered on the ground, or by a suitable
vehicle, using the tow bar secured to the forward end of the landing
gear skid and ground handling wheels attached to each side of the aft
end of the landing gear skid.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to gyro equipment, the towing and

ground handling of helicopter must be performed at least
20 minutes after the electrical power has been switched off
or with the electrical power on.
11-06-07 Page 8-1

Handling and Servicing Document No. 109G0040A017
2 A
A
1
5
6
4
1. Tow bar
2. Ground handling wheels 3
3. Fixed pin
4. Handle
5. Cradle assembly
6. Spring loading pin
7. Eyebolt
8. Skid tube
9. Eyebolt
7
8
9
ICN-19-A-158000-G-A0126-00001-A-01-1
Figure 8-1. Towing

Page 8-2 11-06-07
PARKING
(Figure 8-2)
Park the helicopter in desired parking area on a level surface, when
possible.
Attach static ground wire and check that all switches are in OFF or
neutral position. Install the approved straps and covers as required.
For extended parking, disconnect the battery, close all access doors
and panels and install protective covers as shown in Figure 8-3.
11-06-07 Page 8-3

2
3
ICN-19-A-158000-G-A0126-00002-A-01-1
1. Engine air intake cover (three required)

2. Pitot tube cover
3. Engine exhaust duct cover (two required)
Figure 8-2. Parking in Normal Weather Conditions
Page 8-4 11-06-07

4
5
3
2
6
5
1
2
7
8
2
10 ICN-19-A-158000-G-A0126-00003-A-01-1
1. Main rotor hub cover

2. Main rotor blade cover (four)
3. Right stabilizer cover
4. Vertical empennage cover
5. Tail rotor blade cover (two)
6. Tail rotor hub cover
7. Left stabilizer cover
8. Tail boom cover
9. Fuselage rear section cover
10. Fuselage nose section cover
Figure 8-3. All-weather Protective Covers

11-06-07 Page 8-5
MOORING
(Figure 8-4)
The helicopter can be moored on a paved ramp, if available, with
suitably spaced tie-down rings, and headed in direction from which
forecast wind is expected.
CAUTION
If forecast wind velocity exceeds 60 kts, moor helicopter in

a sheltered area, or place it in a hangar.
If suitable paved ramp and tie-down rings are not available, park
helicopter on an appropriate parking area, headed in to the wind and
use appropriate mooring anchors or make ”dead man“ anchors. Close
all access doors and panels. Remove from parking area all loose
equipment that can be swept away by wind.
Page 8-6 11-06-07

B
C A
C A
B
B
A
3
1
2
1. Mooring plate (tow required) 4

2.
3.
Screw (eight required)
Rear crossbeam (two required)
C
4. Forward crossbeam (two required)
ICN-19-A-158000-G-A0126-00004-A-01-1
Figure 8-4. Mooring

11-06-07 Page 8-7
SERVICING
3 4 5
3
2
1
8
9 ICN-19-A-158000-G-A0126-00005-A-01-1
1. N°1 hydraulic system reservoir

2. N°2 hydraulic system reservoir
3. Main rotor damper (four)
4. Main transmission
5. Fuel
6. 90° gearbox
7. Engine
8. Flight control accumulator (two)
9. Battery
Figure 8-5. Servicing Diagram

Page 8-8 11-06-07
Table 8-1. Servicing
CAPACIT
N° ITEM Y NOTE
(liter)
1 N° 1 hydraulic system 1.6
2 N° 2 hydraulic system 1.6
3 Main rotor damper 0.05 Each damper
4 Main transmission 10.3
5 Fuel system 605
6 90° gearbox 0.40
7 Engine oil system 10.45
Nitrogen: charge to
1100 psi at 15 °C
8 Flight control accumulators
ambient tempera-
ture
Distilled water.
9 Battery
Add as necessary.
For list of approved fuels and oils refer to Section 1 of this manual.
11-06-07 Page 8-9

Page 8-10 11-06-07

SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTAL PERFORMANCE
INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
GENERAL INFORMATION ............................................................. 9-1

HELICOPTER INFORMATION ....................................................... 9-1
CRUISE CHARTS............................................................................ 9-1
EXAMPLE FOR INTERPOLATION AMONG CHARTS ............. 9-2
RANGE AND ENDURANCE ......................................................... 9-47
11-06-07 Page 9-i

Rev. 4
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
9-1. OAT = -35 °C - Altitude Pressure = -1000 ft ........................9-3

9-4. OAT = 0 °C - Altitude Pressure = -1000 ft............................9-6
9-5. OAT = 20 °C - Altitude Pressure = -1000 ft..........................9-7
9-8. OAT = -35 °C - Altitude Pressure = 0 ft..............................9-10
9-11. OAT = 0 °C - Altitude Pressure = 0 ft.................................9-13
9-12. OAT = 20 °C - Altitude Pressure = 0 ft...............................9-14
9-15. OAT = -35 °C - Altitude Pressure = 3000 ft........................9-17
9-18. OAT = 0 °C - Altitude Pressure = 3000 ft...........................9-20
9-19. OAT = 20 °C - Altitude Pressure = 3000 ft.........................9-21
Page 9-ii 11-06-07

Rev. 4
Page
9-34. OAT = -35 °C - Altitude Pressure = 12000 ft ..................... 9-36

9-37. OAT = -0 °C - Altitude Pressure = 12000 ft ....................... 9-39
9-38. OAT = 20 °C - Altitude Pressure = 12000 ft....................... 9-40
9-43. OAT = 0 °C - Altitude Pressure = 15000 ft......................... 9-45
9-45. Range and Endurance....................................................... 9-48
11-06-07 Page 9-iii

Rev. 4
LIST OF TABLES
Page
9-1. Velocity = 125 kt TAS ...........................................................9-2

9-2. Velocity = Vmax .....................................................................9-2
Page 9-iv 11-06-07

Rev. 4
Document No. 109G0040A017 Supplemental
Performance Information
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTAL PERFORMANCE
INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
The Supplemental Performance Information contained in this section
is provided for use in conjunction with Section 4 and optional
equipment Appendices, as applicable.
This section contains useful cruise charts to determine:
— Max Endurance cruise: airspeed required to achieve the maximum
flight time;
— Max Range cruise: airspeed required to achieve the maximum
range;
— Recommended cruise: a reasonable increase in airspeed for
a 1% increase in specific fuel consumption compare to the
Max Range.
HELICOPTER INFORMATION
Clean configuration.
CRUISE CHARTS
Cruise Charts do not include the effect of bleed air on fuel
consumption.
Fuel Flow data is applicable to the basic helicopter configuration
without any optional equipment which would appreciably affect lift,
drag or available power..
11-06-07 Page 9-1

Rev. 4
Supplemental Document No. 109G0040A017
EXAMPLE FOR INTERPOLATION AMONG CHARTS

Wanted IAS, Torque and Fuel Consumption at 125 KTAS and Vmax.
Known Pressure altitude: 1350 m (4500 ft)
OAT: 10 °C
Gross weight: 2550 kg.
Method - Velocity = 125 KTAS:
Select suitable charts (Figures 9-18, 9-19, 9-25, 9-26).
On each of the 4 charts intersect the Gross Weight 2550 kg
line with the recommended cruise line to read, 125 KTAS,
IAS, TQ and Fuel Consumption. See Table 9-1.
- Velocity = Vmax :
Select suitable charts (Figures 9-18, 9-19, 9-25, 9-26).
On each of the 4 charts intersect the Gross Weight
2550 kg line with the recommended cruise line to read,
TAS, IAS, TQ and Fuel Consumption. See Table 9-2.
Table 9-1 Velocity = 125 kt TAS
DATA (GW=2550 kg)
TAS = 125 kt INTERPOLATION
Fig. 9-18 Fig. 9-19 Fig. 9-25 Fig. 9-26
Pressure
3000 3000 6000 6000 3000 6000 4500
Altitude (ft)
OAT (°C) 0 20 0 20 10 10 10
Torque (%) 71 68 66 63 70 65 68
IAS (kt) 124 119 117 112 122 115 119
Fuel Consumption
180 177 165 162 179 164 172
(kg/h)
Table 9-2 Velocity = Vmax

Vmax DATA (GW=2550 kg)
INTERPOLATION
at MCP Fig. 9-18 Fig. 9-19 Fig. 9-25 Fig. 9-26
Pressure
3000 3000 6000 6000 3000 6000 4500
Altitude (ft)
OAT (°C) 0 20 0 20 10 10 10
Torque (%) 86 71 75 62 79 69 74
TAS (kt) 136 128 133 124 132 129 131
IAS (kt) 134 122 124 112 128 118 123
Fuel Consumption
204 182 179 161 193 170 182
(kg/h)
Page 9-2 11-06-07

Rev. 4
CRUISE
PRESSURE ALTITUDE = -1000 ft
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102 %
ELECTRICAL LOAD: 100 A TOTAL
FUEL CONSUMPTION [kg/h]

100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260
150 170
140 160
VNE LIMIT
130 150
140
120
RECOMMENDED 130
110 CRUISE MAX RANGE
CRUISE
120 INDICATED AIR SPEED [kt]
100
110
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90 100
80 90
70 80
MAX ENDURANCE 70
60
60
MCP
TOP
50 50
40 40
30
GR
30
OS
20
SW
10
26
28
24 0
22 0
20 IGH
20
50
50
50
5
5
E
T[
10
kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]
119G1560A002 ISSUE C ICN-19-A-159400-G-A0126-00038-A-01-1
Figure 9-1. OAT = -35 °C - Altitude Pressure = -1000 ft

11-06-07 Page 9-3
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = -25°C

110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250
150
160
140 VNE 150
130
140
120 RECOMMENDED 130
CRUISE MAX RANGE
110 120
CRUISE
100 110
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90 100
90
80
80
70
MAX ENDURANCE 70
60 60
MCP
TOP
50 50
40
40 30
GR
20
OS
30
10
S
20 EIGH
24 0
22 0
26
28 0
W
50
5
5
50
5
20
10
T[
kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]
119G1560A002 ISSUE B ICN-19-A-159400-G-A0126-00001-A-02-1

Page 9-4 11-06-07
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = -20°C

110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250
150
160
140 VNE
150
130 140
120 RECOMMENDED 130
CRUISE MAX RANGE CRUISE 120
110
110 INDICATED AIRSPEED [kt]
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
100
90
90
80
80
70 MAX ENDURANCE 70
60 60
50 50
40
40 30
GR
MCP
TOP
20
OS
30
10
S
26
20 IGH
22 0
24 0
28 0
W
5
50
5
5
50
20
E
10
T[
kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

11-06-07 Page 9-5
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 0°C

120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260
150 160
VNE
150
140
140
130
130
120 RECOMMENDED
110
110
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
100
90 90
80 80
70 MAX ENDURANCE 70
60 60
50
50
MCP
TOP
40
40 30
GR
20
OS
30 10
SW
22 0
20 IGH
24
26
28 0
50
5
50
5
50
20
E
T[
10
kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]
Figure 9-4. OAT = 0 °C - Altitude Pressure = -1000 ft

Page 9-6 11-06-07
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 20°C

120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260
150 150
140 140
130 130
RECOMMENDED
120 MAX RANGE CRUISE 120
CRUISE
110 110
100 100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90 90
80 80
MAX ENDURANCE 70
70
60
60
50
50 40
MCP
TOP
40 30
GR
20
OS
30 10
SW
22 0
20 IGH
24 0
26
28 0
50
5
5
50
5
20
E
10
T[
kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

11-06-07 Page 9-7
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 40°C

120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260
150
140
140
130
130
RECOMMENDED 120
120 CRUISE MAX RANGE CRUISE
110
110
100
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90
90
80
80
MAX ENDURANCE 70
70
60
60
50
50 40
MCP
TOP
30
GR
40
20
OS
30 10
SW
20 IGHT
22
24 0
26
28 0
50
5
50
5
50
E
20
10
[kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

Page 9-8 11-06-07
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 50°C

120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260
150
140
140
130
130
RECOMMENDED 120
110
110
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90
90
80
80
MAX ENDURANCE 70
70
60
60 50
MCP
TOP
50 40
30
GR
40
20
OS
205 EIGH
22 0
24 0
26
28 0
30 10
SW
50
50
5
20
T[
10
kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

11-06-07 Page 9-9
Rev. 4
CRUISE
PRESSURE ALTITUDE = 0 ft
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102 %

100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260
150
140 160
VNE LIMIT
150
130
140
120
130
RECOMMENDED
110 CRUISE MAX RANGE 120
CRUISE
INDICATED AIR SPEED [kt]
100 110
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90 100
80 90
70 80
MAX ENDURANCE 70
60
60
MCP
TOP
50 50
40 40
30
GR
30 20
OS
10
22 0
26
20 EIG
24 0
28
SW
50
50
5
50
20
HT
10
[kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]
Figure 9-8. OAT = -35 °C - Altitude Pressure = 0 ft

Page 9-10 11-06-07
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = -25°C

110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250
150 160
140 VNE 150
130 140
120 130
RECOMMENDED
110 CRUISE MAX RANGE CRUISE 120

110
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
100
90
90
80
80
70 70
MAX ENDURANCE
60 60
50
MCP
TOP
50
40
40 30
GR
20
OS
30
10
20 EIG
24 0
22 0
26 0
28
SW
50
5
5
50
20
HT
10
[kg
0
]
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120

TORQUE [%]

11-06-07 Page 9-11
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = -20°C

110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250
150 160
140 VNE 150
130 140
120 130
RECOMMENDED
110
110
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
100
90
90
80
80
70 MAX ENDURANCE 70
60 60
50
MCP
TOP
50
40
40 30
GR
20
OS
30
10
20 EIG
22 0 HT [
24 0
26 0
28
SW
5
5
5
50
50
20
10
kg
0
]
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120

TORQUE [%]

Page 9-12 11-06-07
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 0°C

110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250
150 VNE 150
140
140
130
130
120 RECOMMENDED
CRUISE 120
MAX RANGE
110 CRUISE 110 INDICATED AIRSPEED [kt]
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
100
90 90
80 80
70 MAX ENDURANCE 70
60
60
MCP
TOP
50
50
40
GR
40 30
OS
20
30
SW
10
20 GHT
22 0
24 0
26
28 0
EI
5
5
50
5
50
20
10
[kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]
Figure 9-11. OAT = 0 °C - Altitude Pressure = 0 ft

11-06-07 Page 9-13
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 20°C

120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260
150 150
140 140
130 130
RECOMMENDED
120 120
CRUISE MAX RANGE CRUISE
110 110
100
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90 90
80 80
MAX 70
70 ENDURANCE
60
60
50
50 40
MCP
TOP
GR
40 30
OS
20
SW
205 IGH
22 0
24 0
26
28 0
30 10
5
50
5
50
E
20
T[
10
kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

Page 9-14 11-06-07
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 40°C

120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260
150
140
140
130
130
RECOMMENDED 120
110
110
100
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90
90
80
80
MAX ENDURANCE 70
70
60
MCP
TOP
60 50
50 40
30
40
GR
20
OS
30 10
SW
20 IGH
22
26
24 0
28 0
5
50
5
50
50 T [
E
20
10
kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

11-06-07 Page 9-15
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 50°C

120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260
150 140
140 130
130
120
120 MAX RANGE CRUISE
110
110
100
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90
MCP
TOP
90
80
80
MAX ENDURANCE 70
70 60
60 50
50 40
GR
30
40
OS
20
205 EIG
22 0
24 0
28 0
26 0
SW
50
5
5
30 10
20
HT
[kg
10
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

Page 9-16 11-06-07
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102 %

90 110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250
150
VNE LIMIT
140 150
130 140
130
120
RECOMMENDED
MAX RANGE
120
110 CRUISE
CRUISE
110
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
100
90
90
80
80
70 MAX ENDURANCE 70
60 60
MCP
TOP
50 50
40
40
30
GR
30 20
OS
10
SW
24
20 IGH
26
22
28
50
50
50
50
20
50
E
10
T[
kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

11-06-07 Page 9-17
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = -25°C

100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260
150
VNE
150
140
140
130
130
120 RECOMMENDED 120
CRUISE
110
100 100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90 90
80 80
70 MAX ENDURANCE 70
60
60
50
50
40
MCP
TOP
40 30
GR
20
OS
30 10
S
20 IGH
24 0
22 0
26
28 0
WE
50
5
5
50
5
20
T[
10
kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

Page 9-18 11-06-07
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = -20°C

110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250
150 150
140 140
130 130
120 RECOMMENDED 120
CRUISE MAX RANGE CRUISE
110 110
100 100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90 90
80 80
70 MAX ENDURANCE 70
60
60
50
50 40
MCP
TOP
40 30
GR
20
OS
30 10
SW
22 0
20 IGHT
24 0
26
28 0
50
5
5
50
5
E
20
10
[kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

11-06-07 Page 9-19
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 0°C

110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250
150
140
140
130
130
RECOMMENDED 120
110
110
100
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90
90
80
80
MAX ENDURANCE 70
70
60
60
50
MCP
TOP
50 40
40 30
GR
20
OS
30 10
SW
20 IGHT
22
24 0
26
28 0
50
5
5
50
50
20
E
10
[kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

Page 9-20 11-06-07
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 20°C

110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250
150 140
140 130
130 120
RECOMMENDED
110
110
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90
90
80
80
MAX ENDURANCE 70
70 60
MCP
TOP
60 50
50 40
30
40
GR
20
OS
30 10
S
20 IGH
22
24
26
28 0
WE
50
50
50
5
50
20
10
T[
kg
0
]
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120

TORQUE [%]

11-06-07 Page 9-21
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 40°C

110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250
150
130
140
130 120
RECOMMENDED
110 100
100 90
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90 80
80 MAX ENDURANCE 70
70 60
MCP
TOP
60 50
40
50
GR
30
OS
40 20
205 EIGH
22 0
26
24 0
SW
28 50
10
50
5
5
30
0
20
T[
kg
10
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

Page 9-22 11-06-07
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 50°C

110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250
150
130
140
MCP
TOP
120
130
MAX RANGE CRUISE 110
120
110 100

100 90
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90 80
80 70
MAX ENDURANCE
70 60
60 50
40
50
30
28 5 0
GR
50 0
2
40
OS
20
2 4
SW
5
2 2 2 0 5 0 T [k
30 10
5
EIG
20
H
10
g]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

11-06-07 Page 9-23
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102 %

90 110 130 150 170 190 210
150 150
140 140
130 130
120 120
RECOMMENDED
110 CRUISE MAX RANGE
110
CRUISE
100 100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90 90
80 80
70 MAX ENDURANCE 70
60
60
MCP
50
TOP
50
40
40 30
GR
20
30
OS
10
SW
205
22
24
26
28
50
50
50
50
20
0
EIG
HT
10
[kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

Page 9-24 11-06-07
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = -25°C

100 120 140 160 180 200 220240 260
150
140
140
130
130
120
120 RECOMMENDED
110
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90
90
80
80
MAX ENDURANCE 70
70
60
60 50
50 40
MCP
TOP
30
40
GR
20
OS
30 10
SW
20 IGHT
22
24 0
26
28 0
50
50
5
5
50
E
20
10
[kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

11-06-07 Page 9-25
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = -20°C

100 120 140 160 180 200 220240 260
150
140
140
130
130
120
RECOMMENDED
120
CRUISE 110
MAX RANGE CRUISE
110
100
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90
90
80
80
MAX ENDURANCE 70
70
60
60 50
50 40
MCP
TOP
30
40
GR
20
OS
30 10
S
205 IGHT
22
24 0
26
28 0
WE
50
50
5
5
20
0
10
[kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

Page 9-26 11-06-07
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 0°C

100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260
150 140
140 130
130 120
RECOMMENDED
110 100
90
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90 80
80 70
MAX ENDURANCE
70 60
60 50
50 40
MCP
TOP
30
40
GR
20
OS
30 10
S
20 IGH
22 0
24 0
26
28 0
WE
50
5
5
50
5
20
10
T[
kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

11-06-07 Page 9-27
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 20°C

100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240260
150
130
140
120
130
RECOMMENDED
120
100
110
100 90
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90 80
80 70
MAX ENDURANCE
70 60
60 50
MCP
TOP
40
50
GR
30
OS
40 20
SW
20 EIGH
22 0
28
26 0
2450
10
50
50
5
30
20
T[
kg
10
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

Page 9-28 11-06-07
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 40°C

110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250
150 130
140 120
MCP
130 110
MAX RANGE CRUISE
120
100
110
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
80
TOP
90
70
80 MAX ENDURANCE
60
70
50
60
40
50
28 6 5 5 0 0
30
50 0
2
40 20
GR
24 225 050 HT [k
O
10
SS
30
2 G
W EI
20
10
g]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

11-06-07 Page 9-29
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102 %

80 100 120 140 160 180 200
150 140
140
130
130
120
120 RECOMMENDED
110
100
100
90
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90
80
80
MAX ENDURANCE 70
70
60
MCP
TOP
60 50
50 40
40 30
20
GR
30
OS
10
SW
20
22
24
28 0
26
20
50
50
50
50 HT [
5
EIG
10
kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

Page 9-30 11-06-07
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = -25°C

90 110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250
150
130
140
130 120
RECOMMENDED
120 CRUISE
110
MAX RANGE CRUISE
110 100
100 90
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90 80
80 MAX ENDURANCE 70
70 60
60 50
40
50
MCP
TOP
30
40
GR
20
OS
30 10
S
20 IGHT
22 0
24
26
28 0
WE
5
50
50
50
5
20
10
[kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

11-06-07 Page 9-31
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = -20°C

90 110 130 150 170 190 210 230250
150
130
140
120
130
RECOMMENDED 110
110 100
100 90
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90 80
80 MAX ENDURANCE
70
70 60
MCP
50
TOP
60
40
50
30
GR
40
OS
20
SW
10
20 IGHT
22 0
24 0
26
30
28 0
50
5
5
50
5
E
20
[kg
10
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

Page 9-32 11-06-07
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 0°C

100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240
150 130
140 120
130 RECOMMENDED
110
100
110
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
80
90
70
80 MAX ENDURANCE
60
70
50
MCP
TOP
60
40
50
30
GR
OS
40 20
20 EIGH
SW
22 0
24 0
26
28 0
10
50
5
50
5
5
30
20
T[
kg
10
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

11-06-07 Page 9-33
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 20°C

100 120 140 160 180 200 220240 260
150
120
140
RECOMMENDED CRUISE 110
130
MAX RANGE CRUISE
120 100
110 90
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
80
MCP
TOP
90
70
80 MAX ENDURANCE 60
70
50
60
40
50 30
2 8 2 6 4 5 0 50 0
50 50
40 20
GR
2
OS
10
30
22 205 T [k
S
W
EI
20
GH
10
g]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

Page 9-34 11-06-07
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 40°C

100 120 140 160 180 200 220240 260
150 120
140
110
130
100
120
110 90
100 80
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90 70
80 MAX ENDURANCE 60
2850
70 50
2650
60 40
2450 50 50 [kg
GR
OS
50 30
22 20 HT
SW
40 20
EIG
10
30
20
MCP ]
TOP
10
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

11-06-07 Page 9-35
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102 %

50 70 90 110 130 150 170
150
130
140
120
130
110
120 RECOMMENDED CRUISE
90
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90 80
80 70
MAX ENDURANCE
70 60
MCP
TOP
60 50
50 40
30
28 65 45 50
40
50 0 0
20
2
GR
30 10
2
OS
S
22 205 kg]
WE
20
IG
HT
10
0
[
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
TORQUE [%]

Page 9-36 11-06-07
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = -25°C

90 110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250
150 130
140 120
130 RECOMMENDED 110
110
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
80
90
70
80
MAX ENDURANCE
60
70
50
MCP
TOP
60
40
50
30
28 65 50
40 20
GR
50
2
10
OS
24 250 0
30
0
2 05
SW
2 IGHT
20
E
10
[kg
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

11-06-07 Page 9-37
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = -20°C

90 110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250
150
140 120
130 RECOMMENDED 110

CRUISE
110
90
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
80
90
70
80 MAX ENDURANCE
60
70
50
MCP
TOP
60
40
50 30
28 65 50
40 20
GR
50 0
2
10
OS
30
2 4
S
22 205 [kg]
WE
20
5 0
IG
HT
0
10
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

Page 9-38 11-06-07
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 0°C

90 110 130 150 170 190 210230 250
150
120
140
110
MAX RANGE CRUISE 100
120
110 90
100 80
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
MCP
TOP
90 70
80 MAX ENDURANCE 60
70 50
60 40
28
50
50
30
26 245 50 0 T [kg
50 0
GR
40 20
OS
10
2
S
30
20 IGH
W
5
E
20
10
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]

11-06-07 Page 9-39
Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 20°C

90 110 130 150 170 190210 230250
150 120
140
MCP
TOP
110
130
100
120
90
110
80
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90 70
80 MAX ENDURANCE 60
2850
70 50
2650
60 40
GR
50 30
OS
24 25 205 kg]
50 0 0
20
SW
40
10
EIG
30
HT
[
20
10
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]
Page 9-40 11-06-07

Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 40°C

90 110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250
150
110
140
130 100
120 90
110
80
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
70
90
60
80 MAX ENDURANCE
50
GROS
70
2450
40
2250
60
S WEIG
2050
30
50
20
HT [kg
40
10
30
]
MCP
20
TOP
10
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]
11-06-07 Page 9-41

Rev. 4
CRUISE
CRUISE
PRESSUREALTITUDE
PRESSURE ALTITUDE==15000
15000ftft
CLEANCONFIGURATION
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTORSPEED:
ROTOR SPEED:102
102%
%
ELECTRICALLOAD:
ELECTRICAL LOAD:100
100AATOTAL
TOTAL
FUELCONSUMPTION
FUEL CONSUMPTION[kg/h]
[kg/h]
50 70
50 70 90
90 110
110 130
130 150
150
150
150
120
120
140
140
130
130 110
110
RECOMMENDEDCRUISE
RECOMMENDED CRUISE
120
120 100
100
MAXRANGE
MAX RANGECRUISE
CRUISE
110
110 90
90
[kt]
SPEED [kt]
100
100
80
80
[kt]
SPEED [kt]
AIR SPEED
90
90
AIR SPEED
70
70
80
80
MAXENDURANCE
MAX ENDURANCE 60
INDICATED AIR
60
70
70
TRUE AIR
INDICATED
MCP
50
MCP
TOP
50
TOP
60
60
TRUE
40
40
50
50
2885 0
2
30
30
500
22665 45500 500 0
5
40
40 20
20
224 2225 0550 HTT [[k
0
GGR
RO
10
10
2
30
OS
30
SSS W
220 IG
W EI
20
20
EG
H
10
10
kgg]
]
00
00 10
10 20
20 30
30 40
40 50
50 60
60 70
70 80
80 90
90 100
100
TORQUE[%]
TORQUE [%]
119G1560A002ISSUE
119G1560A002 ISSUECC ICN-19-A-159400-G-A0126-00044-A-01-1
ICN-19-A-159400-G-A0126-00044-A-01-1
Page 9-42 11-06-07

Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = -25°C

90 110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250
150 120
MCP
TOP
140
110
100
110 90
100 80 INDICATED AIRSPEED [kt]

TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90 70
80 MAX ENDURANCE 60
70 50
285
60
2650 245 50 50
0
40
50 30
GR
20
OS
2
0
40
2
SW
10
20 IGH
30
E
20
T[
kg
10
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]
11-06-07 Page 9-43

Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = -20°C

90 110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250
150 120
MCP
TOP
140
110
130
100
120
MAX RANGE CRUISE 90
110
100 80
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
90 70
80 MAX ENDURANCE 60
70 50
285
0
2650 450 50 50
60 40
50 30
2
GR
20
OS
40
2 20
SW
10
30
EIG
HT
20
[kg
10
]
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]
Page 9-44 11-06-07

Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 0°C

90 110 130 150 170 190210 230250
150
110
140
MCP
TOP
130 100
120 90
110
80
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
70
90
MAX ENDURANCE 60
80
2850
70 50
265
60 40
0
GR
245 0
50 30
OS
22 2050 T [k
0
20
S
40
W
10
EI
GH
30
g]
20
10
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]
11-06-07 Page 9-45

Rev. 4
CRUISE
CLEAN CONFIGURATION
ROTOR SPEED: 102%
OAT = 20°C

90 110 130 150 170190 210230 250
150
110
140
100
130
120 90
110 80
100
TRUE AIR SPEED [kt]
70
90
60
80 MAX ENDURANCE
50
GROS
70
2450
40
2250 0
60
S WEIG
205
30
50
20
HT [kg
40 10
30
]
20
MCP
TOP
10
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
TORQUE [%]
Page 9-46 11-06-07

Rev. 4
Document N°109G0040A017 Supplemental
RANGE AND ENDURANCE

Figure 9-45 shows the chart to obtain endurance, distance and
specific range in relation to fuel consumption.
Note
The range determined with the diagram correspond to
effective range on ground (zero wind). To take into account
the wind effect in the range calculation, use TAS reduced
by the headwind component (ground speed) before enter-
ing the chart.
11-06-07 Page 9-47

Rev. 4
Supplemental Document N°109G0040A017
RANGE AND ENDURANCE
BASIC CONFIGURATION
DISTANCE [km]
200 400 600 800 1000
1.2
16
15 0
1.1 14 0
0
200
100 TR
0
13 UE
30
40
50
1 0 AIR
12 SP
EE
0 D[
0.9 kt]
SPECIFIC RANGE [nm/kg]
11
g]
0
[k
EL
0.8 10
FU
0
LE
90
B
0.7
A
IL
VA
80
A
0.6
70
0.5
60
0.4 50
40
0.3
0.2
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550
6
DISTANCE [nm] ***
5
ENDURANCE [h]
4 500
AVAIL
ABLE
400 FUEL
3 [kg]
300
2
200
1 100
0
90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250
Figure 9-45 Range and Endurance
Page 9-48 11-06-07

Rev. 4

Manual Aw119 Koala

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Aw119 Koala

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ROTORCRAFT

Publication Code 502051486

Document No. 109G0040A017

Copy assigned to rotorcraft: S/N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ISSUE 1 : 11 JUNE 2007

THIS DOCUMENT MUST BE CARRIED IN AIRCRAFT AT ALL TIMES

Issued by LEONARDO S.p.A.

EASA Approved 11-06-07 A-1

A-2 11-06-07 EASA Approved

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Cont.d)

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Cont.d)

PART II — MANUFACTER’S DATA

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

PART I — EASA APPROVED

PART II — MANUFACTURER’S DATA

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

11-06-07 Page iii

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS AND NOTES

An operating procedure, practice, etc.,

USE OF PROCEDURAL WORDS

— ITT : Inter-Turbine Temperature

— VFR : Visual Flight Rules

11-06-07 Page vii

Figure 1. Helicopter — Three views

Page viii 11-06-07

GENERAL ....................................................................................... 1-1

EASA Approved 11-06-07 Page 1-i

ROTOR LIMITATIONS (NR)..........................................................1-13

Page 1-ii 11-06-07 EASA Approved

1-1. Airspeed Limitation - VNE (power on/off) ............................ 1-3

EASA Approved 11-06-07 Page 1-iii

1-1. Approved fuel.....................................................................1-14

Page 1-iv 11-06-07 EASA Approved

EASA Approved 11-06-07 Page 1-1

AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS (IAS)

VNE (Power-ON/OFF).................................................. : See Figure 1-1

Minimum airspeed in autorotation

Maximum airspeed with torque between

FLIGHT WITH PASSENGER CABIN DOORS OPEN OR REMOVED

VNE with one or both doors open or removed ........................: 85 KIAS

VNE during doors opening and closing operation...................: 70 KIAS

GROUND SPEED LIMITATIONS

Maximum forward speed at touchdown

Page 1-2 11-06-07 EASA Approved

-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120

Figure 1-1. Airspeed Limitation - VNE (power on/off)

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Page 1-4 11-06-07 EASA Approved

SLOPE TAKE-OFF AND LANDING LIMITATIONS

Nose-up operations.................................................................. : 12 deg

Side-up operations................................................................... : 10 deg

Nose-down operations ............................................................... : 2 deg

Maximum Gross Weight for ground operations

Maximum Gross Weight......................................... : 2850 kg (6283 lb).

Minimum Gross Weight for flight ............................ : 1725 kg (3803 lb).

CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITATIONS

Longitudinal CG limits .................................. : See Figures 1-2 and 1-3

Lateral CG limits .......................................... : See Figures 1-4 and 1-5

EASA Approved 11-06-07 Page 1-5

119G0290T149/2 ISSUE A ICN-19-A-151000-G-A0126-00001-A-01-1

Figure 1-2. Weight and Longitudinal CG Envelope

Page 1-6 11-06-07 EASA Approved

119G0290T149/2 ISSUE A ICN-19-A-151000-G-A0126-00006-A-01-1